JP7303165B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine having an outer rail and executing a hold display.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a game machine provided with an outer rail is known (see Patent Literature 1). This game machine is provided with an outer rail that guides a game ball shot by a shooting device to a game area.
Also, conventionally, there is known a game machine that executes a hold display (see Patent Document 2). In this game machine, while a predetermined game state is occurring, a specific hold display is executed at predetermined intervals. Specifically, if a new specific pending display is initiated while one specific pending display is running, the new specific pending display is synchronized with the one specific pending display.

JP 2018-89073 A JP 2018-199051 A

However, in the conventional game machine, there is a possibility that it is not possible to achieve both prevention of displacement and vibration of the outer rail and simplification of processing of the outer rail and attachment to the game board.
Moreover, in the conventional game machine, there is a possibility that the presentation effect of the hold display is lowered. That is, when the conventional game machine is configured to be able to execute a plurality of types of pending displays with different action display cycles, the plurality of types of pending displays with different action display cycles are executed at the same time. The content becomes complicated, and there is a possibility that the production effect of the pending display is reduced.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to achieve both prevention of displacement and vibration of the outer rail, simplification of processing of the outer rail and attachment to the game board, and improvement of the performance effect of the hold display.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to a first invention comprises a game board forming a game area, a plate-shaped outer rail provided on the game board, and a second controller which repeats operation display in a first period. display control means capable of executing 1 pending display, a second pending display that repeats the action display in the first period, and a third pending display that repeats the action display in a second period different from the first period; The outer rail is provided with a plurality of guide portions for guiding the position with respect to the game board along the outer rail, the intervals between the plurality of guide portions are uneven, and the outer rail The range from the starting end of the rail to the left vertex is defined as the first range, the range from the left vertex to the upper vertex of the outer rail is defined as the second range, and the range from the upper vertex to the end of the outer rail is defined as the third range. and when the range from the left vertex to the terminal end of the outer rail is defined as a fourth range , the terminal end of the outer rail is positioned to the right of the upper vertex of the outer rail, and the guide portion is provided more in the first range than in the second range, more in the second range than in the third range, and the first range is greater than or equal to the fourth range When the second pending display is started during execution of the first pending display, the display control means synchronizes the operation display of the second pending display with the operation display of the first pending display. and control so as not to start the third pending display during execution of the first pending display.
In the gaming machine according to the first invention, a plurality of guide portions are provided along the outer rail. This makes it possible to arrange the outer rails at accurate positions on the game board.
Here, in the outer rail, the impact received by the collision of the shot game ball is greater at the start side portion than at the end side portion, and the impact on the launch direction of the shot game ball is greater. . As a result, the outer rail requires higher mounting strength and more accurate placement at the starting end side portion than at the trailing end side portion.
Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the first invention, by increasing the number of guide portions provided in the base end portion of the outer rail, positional deviation and vibration in the base end portion are prevented. becomes possible. In particular, it is possible to stabilize the trajectory of the game ball and execute the game as designed. On the other hand, by reducing the number of guide portions provided at the terminal end portion of the outer rail, it becomes possible to facilitate processing of the outer rail and attachment to the game board. As a result, it is possible to prevent displacement and vibration of the outer rail and facilitate processing of the outer rail and attachment to the game board.
Here, the upper apex of the outer rail is the uppermost portion of the arc-shaped outer rail. The left vertex of the outer rail is the leftmost portion of the arc-shaped outer rail.
Further, in the gaming machine according to the first invention, when the second pending display in which the action display is repeated in the same period as the first pending display is started during the execution of the first pending display, the second pending display A motion indication is synchronized with the motion indication of the first pending indication. On the other hand, during the execution of the first pending display, the third pending display in which the operation display is repeated at a cycle different from that of the first pending display is not started.
This prevents a situation in which a plurality of types of pending displays with different operation display periods are executed at the same time, and prevents the contents of pending displays from becoming complicated. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the hold display.
It does not matter whether the mode of operation display of the first suspension display and the mode of operation display of the second suspension display are the same or different. Further, it does not matter whether the second period is shorter than the first period or the second period is longer than the first period.
Here, the game board corresponds to a game board 11 to be described later. An outer rail 14 described later corresponds to the outer rail. A guide hole gh, which will be described later, corresponds to the guide portion. An upper vertex P1, which will be described later, corresponds to the upper vertex. A left vertex P2, which will be described later, corresponds to the left vertex. The first range corresponds to a first range H1, which will be described later. The second range corresponds to a second range H2 described later. The third range corresponds to a third range H3, which will be described later. The first pending display corresponds to the normal default pending display described later. The second hold display corresponds to a normal special hold display described later. The third pending display corresponds to a short working hours default pending display, which will be described later. An effect control board 300, which will be described later, corresponds to the display control means. The motion display corresponds to a motion during stay, which will be described later.

A gaming machine pertaining to a second invention is the gaming machine pertaining to the first invention, wherein the display control means is capable of executing a fourth pending display that repeats operation display in the second cycle, and the fourth pending display When the third pending display is started during the execution of the above, the operation display of the third pending display is controlled to synchronize with the operation display of the fourth pending display, and during the execution of the fourth pending display, the 2 is characterized by controlling not to start the pending display.
In the gaming machine according to the second invention, when the third pending display in which the motion display is repeated in the same period as the fourth pending display is started during the execution of the fourth pending display, the motion display of the third pending display is synchronized with the motion indication of the fourth pending indication. On the other hand, during execution of the fourth pending display, the second pending display in which the operation display is repeated at a cycle different from that of the fourth pending display is not started.
This prevents a situation in which a plurality of types of pending displays with different operation display periods are executed at the same time, and prevents the contents of pending displays from becoming complicated. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the hold display.
It does not matter whether the operation display mode of the third suspension display and the operation display mode of the fourth suspension display are the same or different.
Here, the fourth suspension display corresponds to a time saving special suspension display, which will be described later.

A gaming machine according to a third aspect comprises game information acquisition means for acquiring game information, and display control means for executing a hold display corresponding to the game information acquired by the game information acquisition means. When other game information is acquired during the execution of the pending display corresponding to the game information, the pending display corresponding to the other game information is displayed after the standby display (waiting mode/waiting state), and the one game information is displayed. Synchronous display (synchronization mode/synchronization state) is synchronized with the hold display corresponding to .
In the gaming machine according to the third aspect, after the hold display corresponding to the other game information to be started later is changed to the wait display, it is synchronized with the hold display corresponding to the first piece of game information to be started. Synchronous display.
As a result, before the timing at which it is possible to synchronize the pending display corresponding to the other game information with the pending display corresponding to the one piece of game information (the timing at which the synchronous display can be started), the other It is possible to start a pending display (standby display) corresponding to the game information.
Here, as the game information, special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information to be described later corresponds. A main control board 200 (step S9-3), which will be described later, corresponds to the game information acquisition means. The reserved display corresponds to the reserved display (display of the reserved symbol h), which will be described later. An effect control board 300, which will be described later, corresponds to the display control means. Waiting animation display (waiting state), which will be described later, corresponds to the waiting display. The synchronous display corresponds to stay animation display, which will be described later.
A gaming machine according to a fourth invention is characterized in that, in the gaming machine according to the third invention, the synchronous display is a moving image (animation image) and the standby display is a still image. In the gaming machine according to the fourth invention, it is possible to suppress an increase in control load.
A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect is the gaming machine according to the third or fourth aspect, wherein the synchronous display is a moving image (animation image), the standby display is a still image, and the standby display is is composed of an image of the first frame of the moving image. In the gaming machine according to the fifth invention, it is possible to make the connection (transition) from the standby display to the synchronous display natural.
A gaming machine according to a sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the third to fifth inventions, wherein the hold display and the synchronous display corresponding to the one game information are periodically repeated. When the display of the image of the first frame of the moving image (animation image) of the same content and related to the hold display corresponding to the one game information is started, the hold corresponding to the other game information is started. The display is characterized in that it is synchronized with the pending display corresponding to the one piece of game information (the synchronous display). In the gaming machine according to the sixth invention, it is possible to simplify the process of synchronizing the pending display.

A gaming machine according to a seventh aspect comprises game information acquisition means for acquiring game information, game determination means for executing game determination based on the game information acquired by the game information acquisition means, and the game determination (or , derivation of the result of the game determination), and display control means for executing a pending display corresponding to the game information on hold, wherein while the holding display corresponding to the one game information is being executed, the other game information is displayed. When acquired, the pending display corresponding to the other game information is synchronized with the pending display corresponding to the first game information (synchronized display, synchronous mode/synchronized state), when the power is turned on (when the power is restored after the power is cut off), if there is game information for which the game determination (or derivation of the result of the game determination) is pending, all of the The display of the pending display related to the game information is started in a state of being synchronized with each other.
In the gaming machine according to the seventh invention, it is possible to simplify processing for synchronizing a plurality of pending displays when the power is turned on.
Here, as the game information, special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information to be described later corresponds. A main control board 200 (step S9-3), which will be described later, corresponds to the game information acquisition means. The game determination corresponds to the starting determination described later. A main control board 200 (steps S11-7 to S11-11), which will be described later, corresponds to the game determination means. The reserved display corresponds to the reserved display (display of the reserved symbol h), which will be described later. An effect control board 300, which will be described later, corresponds to the display control means. The waiting time corresponds to the waiting time described later.
A gaming machine pertaining to an eighth invention is the gaming machine pertaining to the seventh invention, wherein the plurality of pedestal images (moving images/animation images) included in the interface image are displayed in synchronization with each other when the power is turned on. characterized by being started. Here, the "pedestal image" is an image showing the pedestal displayed on hold (the same applies to the following inventions).

A gaming machine according to a ninth aspect comprises game information acquisition means for acquiring game information, game determination means for executing game determination based on the game information acquired by the game information acquisition means, and the game determination (or , derivation of the result of the game determination), and display control means for executing a pending display corresponding to the game information on hold, wherein while the holding display corresponding to the one game information is being executed, the other game information is displayed. When acquired, the pending display corresponding to the other game information is synchronized with the pending display corresponding to the first game information (synchronized display, synchronous mode/synchronized state), and at the time of game state transition (at the time of change), if there is game information for which the game determination (or derivation of the result of the game determination) is pending, all the game information are started to be displayed in synchronization with each other.
In the gaming machine according to the ninth invention, it is possible to simplify the processing for synchronizing a plurality of pending displays when the game state is shifted.
Here, as the game information, special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information to be described later corresponds. A main control board 200 (step S9-3), which will be described later, corresponds to the game information acquisition means. The game determination corresponds to the starting determination described later. A main control board 200 (steps S11-7 to S11-11), which will be described later, corresponds to the game determination means. The reserved display corresponds to the reserved display (display of the reserved symbol h), which will be described later. An effect control board 300, which will be described later, corresponds to the display control means. The waiting time corresponds to the waiting time, which will be described later. As the game state, during execution of the time-saving control described later or during stop of the time-saving control corresponds.
A gaming machine according to a tenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the eighth aspect, wherein a plurality of pedestal images (moving images/animation images) included in the interface image are synchronized with each other at the time of game state transition. A display is started. Here, the "pedestal image" is an image showing the pedestal of the pending display.

A gaming machine according to an eleventh aspect comprises game information acquisition means for acquiring game information, game determination means for executing game determination based on the game information acquired by the game information acquisition means, and the game determination ( Alternatively, display control means for executing a pending display corresponding to the game information for which the derivation of the result of the game determination is pending, and during the execution of the pending display corresponding to one game information, the other game information is acquired, the pending display corresponding to the other game information is synchronized with the pending display corresponding to the one game information (synchronized display, Synchronous mode/synchronized state), and at the time of subtraction (decrease) of the number of game information for which the game determination (or derivation of the result of the game determination) is pending, the game determination (or the result of the game determination derivation) is suspended, display of the suspended display relating to all of the game information is started in a state of being synchronized with each other.
In the gaming machine according to the eleventh invention, when subtracting (decreasing) the number of game information for which game determination (or derivation of the game determination result) is pending, a plurality of pending displays are synchronized. Processing can be simplified.
Here, as the game information, special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information to be described later corresponds. A main control board 200 (step S9-3), which will be described later, corresponds to the game information acquisition means. The game determination corresponds to the starting determination described later. A main control board 200 (steps S11-7 to S11-11), which will be described later, corresponds to the game determination means. The reserved display corresponds to the reserved display (display of the reserved symbol h), which will be described later. An effect control board 300, which will be described later, corresponds to the display control means. The waiting time corresponds to the waiting time, which will be described later.
A game machine according to a twelfth invention comprises a front frame having a design part formed on the top thereof, a game board forming a game area, and a game board disposed above the game area, and having an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface. a first suspension display that repeats the action display in a first period; a second suspension display that repeats the action display in the first period; and a second period that repeats the action display in a second period different from the first period. 3, a display control means capable of executing 3 pending display; Among the portions where the vertical lines with respect to one reference line intersect, the rearmost portion on the lower surface of the design portion is the first design portion, and among the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the first reference line intersect, the design portion When the lowermost part of the lower surface is the second design portion, the first design portion is located below the first reference line, and the distance from the first reference line is the diameter of the game ball. The second design portion is located below the first reference line, and the distance from the first reference line is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball, and the display control means is , when the second pending display is started during execution of the first pending display, the operation display of the second pending display is controlled to be synchronized with the operation display of the first pending display, and is controlled so as not to start the third pending display during the execution of .

According to the present invention, it is possible to achieve both prevention of displacement and vibration of the outer rail and simplification of processing of the outer rail and attachment to the game board, and to improve the performance effect of the pending display. becomes possible.

1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a diagram showing the front of the game board, and schematically showing a part particularly necessary for explanation. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the control system of a pachinko machine. 3 is a block diagram showing configurations of a firing condition detection circuit and a firing control circuit; FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a production|presentation control board. 3 is an address map of a memory area used by the CPU 210. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing CPU initialization processing; 4 is a flowchart showing main loop processing; 7 is a flow chart showing saving processing at power-off. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing dynamic port output processing; 4 is a flowchart showing performance display device output processing. 8 is a flowchart showing setting-related processing; 4 is a flowchart showing switch management processing; It is a flow chart which shows normal figure starting ball detection processing. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 starting ball detection process. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 starting ball detection process. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol random number acquisition process. It is a flow chart showing a special game management process. It is a flow chart showing a special figure variation waiting process. It is a flow chart showing processing during special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows processing during a special figure stop. It is a flow chart which shows a special prize opening pre-opening process. 10 is a flowchart showing a special electric service open/close switching process; It is a flow chart showing a special winning opening opening control process. It is a flow chart showing a special winning opening closing effective process. It is a flow chart showing a special winning opening opening end wait process. It is a flow chart showing normal game management processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure fluctuation waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flow chart which shows processing during normal figure stop. It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessary product opening pre-processing. 10 is a flowchart showing normal electric open/close switching processing; It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessory opening control processing. It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessary product closing effective processing. It is a flowchart showing normal electric accessary product open end wait processing. 4 is a flowchart showing performance display device control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing sub CPU initialization processing; 8 is a flowchart showing initial transfer processing; 4 is a flowchart showing sub timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command reception processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing prefetch command reception processing; 9 is a flow chart showing variation command reception processing. 9 is a flowchart showing stop command reception processing; 9 is a flowchart showing opening command reception processing; 4 is a flowchart showing Vsync interrupt processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing command construction task processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing command construction processing; 4 is a flowchart showing sound interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing lamp interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows movable body interruption processing. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the flow of processing from construction of a drawing command to generation and output of a video signal; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between frame images that make up a stay animation and timings at which synchronization flags are turned ON. It is a figure which shows progress of the pending|holding display which concerns on a 1st example. It is a figure which shows progress of the pending|holding display which concerns on a 2nd example. It is a figure which shows progress of the pending|holding display which concerns on a 3rd example. It is a figure which shows progress of the pending|holding display which concerns on a 4th example. It is a figure which shows progress of the pending|holding display which concerns on a 5th example. It is a figure which shows progress of the pending|holding display which concerns on a 6th example. 9 is a flowchart showing synchronization flag setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing synchronization monitoring processing; It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of an outer rail. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the arrangement of guide holes gh in the outer rail; It is a cross-sectional view of the rail base. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG. 1; Figure 68 is an enlarged view of Figure 67;

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In this embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1. FIG.

(Overall Configuration of Pachinko Machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame unit 2, an inner frame unit 3, a front frame unit 4, and a game board unit 10. - 特許庁
The outer frame unit 2, inner frame unit 3 and front frame unit 4 are fixed to each other via a hinge mechanism. Thereby, the inner frame unit 3 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2 . Also, the front frame unit 4 can be opened and closed with respect to each of the inner frame unit 3 and the outer frame unit 2 .
The outer frame unit 2 includes a rectangular frame (outer frame). The outer frame provided in the outer frame unit 2 is fixed to the island facilities of the game arcade.
The inner frame unit 3 includes a rectangular frame (inner frame). The inner frame unit 3 is arranged inside the outer frame unit 2 .
The front frame unit 4 is formed in a rectangular door shape. The front frame unit 4 includes a rectangular frame (front frame), a pair of transparent plates g1 and g2 arranged substantially at the center of the frame, and a design portion arranged around the transparent plates g1 and g2. It has a (decorative portion) 40, a saucer unit 5 arranged below the transparent plates g1 and g2, and a firing handle unit 6 arranged on the side of the saucer unit 5. - 特許庁
A pair of transparent plates g1 and g2 are arranged in parallel along the depth direction. Each of the transparent plates g1 and g2 is made of a transparent material such as resin or glass and formed into a flat plate shape.
The design portion 40 is made of a resin material and has a shape that bulges (protrudes) toward the front side. At each corner on the upper side of the design section 40, there is provided a sound elimination section 4c in which a speaker 22 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. Each sound removal part 4c is provided with a plurality of sound removal holes through which the sound output by the speaker 22 is passed. A frame lamp 20 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the design portion 40 . The frame lamp 20 includes a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The receiving tray unit 5 includes a receiving tray 5a for receiving game balls (rental balls and prize balls) and various operation means that can be operated by the player.
In this embodiment, as various operation means, there are a production button 5b, a rotary selector 5c, a light amount adjustment button (not shown), a volume adjustment button (not shown), a cross key button (not shown), and the like. ing.
The effect button 5b includes an operation section that can be pressed by the player, and a button switch 25 (see FIG. 3) that detects the pressing operation of the operation section. The button switch 25 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300 (see FIG. 3) each time the operation unit is pressed.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called "jog dial") includes an operating section that can be rotated by the player, and a dial switch 26 (see FIG. 3) that detects the rotating operation of the operating section. The dial switch 26 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300 each time the operating portion is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60[°]).

The light amount adjustment button has two operating sections (first operating section and second operating section) that can be pressed by the player, and a light amount adjusting switch 27 (see FIG. 3) that detects the pressing operation of each operating section. and The light amount adjustment switch 27 outputs a first detection signal to the effect control board 300 each time the first operation unit is pressed down, and each time the second operation unit is pressed down, the second A detection signal is output to the effect control board 300 .
The volume adjustment button consists of two operation units (first operation unit and second operation unit) that can be pressed by the player, and a volume adjustment switch 28 (see FIG. 3) that detects the pressing operation of each operation unit. and The volume adjustment switch 28 outputs a first detection signal to the effect control board 300 each time the first operation unit is pressed down, and each time the second operation unit is pressed down, the second detection signal is output. A detection signal is output to the effect control board 300 .
The cross key button consists of four operation units (up key button, down key button, left key button, and right key button) that can be pressed by the player, and a cross key switch that detects the pressing operation of each operation unit. 29 (see FIG. 3). The cross key switch 29 outputs a first detection signal to the effect control board 300 each time the up key button is pressed, and outputs a second detection signal each time the down key button is pressed. output to the effect control board 300, every time the left key button is pressed, a third detection signal is output to the effect control board 300, and every time the right key button is pressed, the fourth A detection signal is output to the effect control board 300 .

A lending operation unit 7 is arranged on the upper surface of the tray unit 5 . The rental operation unit 7 has a ball rental button 7a, a return button 7b, and a frequency display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicably connected to a CR unit 700 capable of reading and updating information recorded on the prepaid card. Then, when a prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit 700, the remaining credits of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 700 are displayed on the count display device 7c.
Further, when the ball lending button 7a is operated while the prepaid card is inserted in the CR unit 700, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the receiving tray 5a. At this time, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded in the prepaid card is updated according to the number of game balls paid out, and the updated remaining frequency of the valuable medium is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Furthermore, when the return button 7b is operated while the prepaid card with the remaining credits of the valuable medium is inserted in the CR unit 700, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit 700. FIG.
Here, the prepaid cart includes, for example, a magnetic storage medium, a storage IC built-in medium, and the like.

The firing handle unit 6 includes a handle base portion (not shown), a handle operating portion (not shown), and a firing stop button (not shown).
The handle base portion is attached to the front side of the front frame unit 4 . A bearing portion is provided on the front side of the handle base portion.
The handle operation portion is configured in a shape that can be held by the player. A rotating shaft portion is provided on the back side of the handle operation portion. The handle operation portion is rotatably attached to the handle base portion by having its rotating shaft portion pivotally supported by the bearing portion of the handle base portion.
The handle operation portion can be rotated (displaced) from a predetermined initial position to a predetermined limit position. Inside the shooting handle unit 6, biasing means (a spring in this embodiment) that biases the handle operation portion toward the initial position side is arranged. As a result, the handle operating section is placed (displaced) at the initial position when the player does not rotate it.
The firing stop button is provided on the side of the handle operation section. The shooting stop button can be pressed by the player.

The firing handle unit 6 also includes a firing volume 411 , a touch sensor 412 and a firing stop switch 413 .
The firing volume 411 is composed of a variable resistor. The firing volume 411 detects the amount of rotation of the handle operation portion (the angle at which the handle operation portion is rotated). Specifically, the firing volume 411 includes a rotating shaft and a resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the rotating shaft. The rotating shaft of the firing volume 411 is coaxially fixed to the rotating shaft portion of the handle operation portion. As a result, the rotation axis of the firing volume 411 is rotated according to the rotation operation of the handle operation section, and the resistance value of the firing volume 411 changes according to the amount of rotation operation of the handle operation section.
The firing volume 411 is electrically connected to the operation detection section 421 (see FIG. 4). The operation detection unit 421 detects the rotation operation (rotation operation amount) of the handle operation unit based on the change in the resistance value (voltage value) of the firing volume 411 .
The touch sensor 412 detects the player's contact (holding) to the handle operation section based on the change in capacitance. Then, the touch sensor 412 outputs a touch signal to the firing enable condition detection unit 422 (see FIG. 4) when the player's contact with the handle operation unit is detected (the touch signal is set at a high level). do). On the other hand, the touch sensor 412 stops outputting the touch signal to the firing enable condition detection unit 422 (makes the touch signal low level) when the player's contact with the handle operation unit is not detected.
The firing stop switch 413 detects pressing operation of the firing stop button. Then, the firing stop switch 413 outputs a firing stop signal to the firing enable condition detection unit 422 when the press operation of the firing stop button is not detected (sets the firing stop signal to a high level). On the other hand, the firing stop switch 413 stops outputting the firing stop signal to the firing enable condition detection unit 422 (making the firing stop signal low level) when the pressing operation of the firing stop button is detected.

(Configuration of game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be described.
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the front of the game board unit, and schematically showing a part particularly necessary for explanation. FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the game board. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the configuration of the outer rail. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the arrangement of guide holes gh in the outer rail. FIG. 66 is a cross-sectional view of the rail base.
2, the display of the rail base 13 and the like is omitted. 64(a) shows the outer rail 14 as seen from the side, and FIG. 64(b) shows the outer rail 14 as seen from the front. Also, FIG. 65 shows the state of the outer rail 14 attached to the game board 11 viewed from the front side. Also, in FIG. 66, the game ball is indicated by the code "B".
The game board unit 10 is supported by the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the game board unit 10 is attached to the inner side of the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3 . Thereby, the game board unit 10 is arranged on the back side of the front frame unit 4 . The player can visually recognize a game board 11 (game area 30), which will be described later, through the transparent plates g1 and g2. In this embodiment, a game area 30, which will be described later, is formed between the back surface of the transparent plate g2 arranged on the back side of the pair of transparent plates g1 and g2 and the front surface of the game board 11. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board unit 10 includes a set board (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the set board, and various effect devices (main image display device 31, sub image display device 32, movable body unit, etc.).
The set plate is formed in a box shape with an open front side. An opening formed by a through hole is provided in a substantially central portion of the back plate of the set plate.

The game board 11 is attached to the front side of the set board.
As shown in FIG. 63, the game board 11 is made of resin and formed in a flat plate shape. Approximately at the center of the game board 11, an opening (not shown in FIG. 63) consisting of a through hole is provided. The player can view the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 through the opening provided in the game board 11 and the opening provided in the set board.
An inner rail 12, a rail base 13, and an outer rail 14 are attached to the front of the game board 11. - 特許庁A game area 30 is defined by the inner rail 12, the outer rail 14, and the like.
The inner rail 12 is made of resin or the like. The inner rail 12 is configured in an arc shape when viewed from the front side. The outer peripheral surface of the inner rail 12 constitutes an inner guide surface 12a that guides the game ball. A return ball prevention piece 12b is provided at the tip of the inner rail 12. As shown in FIG. The return ball prevention piece 12b prevents the game ball shot from the shooting path r1 to the game area 30 from returning to the shooting path r1.

The rail base 13 is made of resin or the like. As shown in FIG. 63, the rail base 13 is provided with a guide surface 13b that supports the outer rail 14. As shown in FIG. The guide surface 13b extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side.
At least a part of the guide surface 13b in the longitudinal direction is inclined toward the rear side (the front side of the game board 11). In this embodiment, substantially the entire length of the guide surface 13b is inclined toward the rear side. As a result, at least a part of the outer guide surface 14c of the outer rail 14 supported by the guide surface 13b (in this embodiment, substantially the entire area) in the longitudinal direction is directed toward the rear side (the front side of the game board 11). Can be tilted. This makes it difficult for the game ball shot by the game ball shooting device 430 to flow toward the front side (the side of the transparent plate g2), making it possible to suppress contact with the transparent plate g2.
A plurality of protrusions (bosses) pr are provided on the guide surface 13b. Each protruding portion pr is formed as a substantially elliptical protruding portion, and is provided so as to protrude from the guide surface 13b. Each projecting portion pr is fitted into a guide hole gh provided in the outer rail 14 to position the outer rail 14 with respect to the rail base 13 (game board 11).
A proximal end support portion (not shown) that supports the proximal bent portion 14 a provided on the outer rail 14 is provided at the proximal end portion (starting end portion) of the rail base 13 . The proximal support portion is configured as a recess into which the proximal bent portion 14a can be inserted. Further, at the tip (terminating end) of the rail base 13, a tip side support portion (not shown) that supports the tip side bending portion 14b provided on the outer rail 14 is provided. The tip-side support portion is configured as a recess into which the tip-side bent portion 14b can be inserted.
Also, the rail base 13 is provided with a covering portion 13a that covers (supports) the side surface (the side surface on the front side) of the outer rail 14 when viewed from the front side.

The outer rail 14 is made of metal. As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the outer rail 14 is formed in a flat plate shape and extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side.
A base end portion (starting end portion) of the outer rail 14 is provided with a base end bent portion 14a. The proximal bent portion 14a is formed by bending the proximal portion of the outer rail 14 into a substantially L shape. A distal end portion (end portion) of the outer rail 14 is provided with a distal end side bent portion 14b. The distal end bent portion 14b is formed by bending the distal end portion of the outer rail 14 into a substantially U shape.
A guide surface 13b of the rail base 13 supports the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 14 formed in an arc shape. The inner peripheral surface of the outer rail 14 formed in an arc shape constitutes an outer guide surface 14c that guides the game ball.
A plurality of guide holes gh are provided in the outer rail 14 (outer guide surface 14c). Each guide hole gh is a through hole penetrating the outer rail 14 in the thickness direction. Each guide hole gh is a substantially elliptical through hole into which the protrusion pr can be fitted.
In the outer rail 14 (outer guide surface 14c), when the outer rail 14 is supported (attached) to the guide surface 13b, guide holes are formed at positions corresponding to the protrusions pr provided on the guide surface 13b. gh is provided. As a result, the guide hole gh and the protrusion pr guide (define) the mounting position of the outer rail 14 with respect to the rail base 13 (guide surface 13b), and further guide (define) the mounting position of the outer rail 14 with respect to the game board 11. )do.

Next, the arrangement of the guide holes gh in the outer rail 14 (outer guide surface 14c) will be described.
Here, the arrangement of the plurality of guide holes gh in the outer rail 14 and the arrangement of the plurality of protrusions pr in the guide surface 13b correspond to each other.
Therefore, the arrangement condition of the plurality of guide holes gh in the outer rail 14 and the arrangement condition of the plurality of protrusions pr in the guide surface 13b are the same.
Therefore, the arrangement condition of the plurality of guide holes gh in the outer rail 14 will be described below, and the explanation of the arrangement condition of the plurality of protrusions pr in the guide surface 13b will be omitted.
The outer rail 14 is attached to the front of the game board 11 via the rail base 13 . The outer rail 14 (outer guide surface 14c) extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side while attached to the game board 11 .
As shown in FIG. 65, in the following description, when the outer rail 14 attached to the game board 11 is viewed from the front side, the uppermost portion (upper vertex) of the outer rail 14 is referred to as the "upper vertex P1 , and the leftmost portion (left vertex) of the outer rail 14 is defined as "left vertex P2".
The range from the base end (starting end) of the outer rail 14 to the left vertex P2 is defined as a "first range H1", the range from the left vertex P2 to the upper vertex P1 of the outer rail 14 is defined as a "second range H2", The range from the upper vertex P1 of the outer rail 14 to the tip (terminus) is defined as "third range H3".
Also, the range from the left vertex P2 of the outer rail 14 to the tip (terminus) is referred to as a "fourth range". That is, the fourth range=second range H2+third range H3.
A range from the base end (starting end) of the outer rail 14 to the upper vertex P1 is defined as a "fifth range". That is, the fifth range=first range H1+second range H2.
Further, the range from the base end (starting end) to the intermediate portion of the outer rail 14 is referred to as "sixth range", and the range from the intermediate portion to the tip (terminating end) of the outer rail 14 is referred to as "seventh range". Here, the “intermediate portion” is the middle (central) portion of the outer rail 14 in the longitudinal direction.

In this embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is larger than that in the second range H2, and the number of guide holes gh provided in the second range H2 is larger than that in the third range H3. The number of gh provided is increasing.
Further, in the present embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the second range H2, and the number of guide holes gh provided in the second range H2 is The number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3.
Further, in the present embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3, and the number of guide holes gh provided in the second range H2 is greater. The number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3.
Further, in the present embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the second range H2, and the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is The number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3.
Further, in the present embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is larger than that in the fourth range.
Further, in the present embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the fifth range is larger than that in the third range H3.
Further, in the present embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the sixth range is larger than that in the seventh range.

Specifically, three guide holes gh are provided along the longitudinal direction in the first range H1. On the other hand, two guide holes gh are provided in the second range H2 along the longitudinal direction. On the other hand, no guide hole gh is provided in the third range H3.
Thus, the fourth range is provided with two guide holes gh along the longitudinal direction. In addition, five guide holes gh are provided along the longitudinal direction in the fifth range. In addition, four guide holes gh are provided in the sixth range along the longitudinal direction. In addition, one guide hole gh is provided along the longitudinal direction in the seventh range.
That is, in the outer rail 14, the portion on the base end side (game ball launching device 430 side) is more impacted by the collision of the game ball launched by the game ball launching device 430 than the portion on the tip side (terminal side). increases, and the impact on the launching direction of the game ball shot by the game ball shooting device 430 increases.
As a result, in the outer rail 14, the base end side (game ball launching device 430 side) is required to have higher mounting strength than the tip end side (terminating end side), and more accurate placement is required. requested.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, by increasing the number of guide holes gh provided in the base end side (game ball launching device 430 side) portion of the outer rail 14, positional deviation in the base end portion can be prevented. and vibration can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to stabilize the trajectory of the game ball and execute the game as designed. In particular, it is possible to prevent the damage and vibration of the outer rail 14 due to the collision of the shot game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the shot game ball from shaking due to the damage or vibration, and it is possible to send the shot game ball to the board surface of the game board 11 stably. As a result, irregular movements of the game ball are reduced, and the game can be stably executed.
On the other hand, by reducing the number of guide holes gh provided in the front end side (terminating end side) of the outer rail 14, it is possible to facilitate processing of the outer rail 14 and attachment to the rail base 13. It becomes possible.
As described above, it is possible to achieve both prevention of displacement and vibration of the outer rail 14 and facilitation of processing of the outer rail 14 and attachment to the game board 11 .

In particular, in this embodiment, the guide holes gh are not formed at the upper vertex P1 and the left vertex P2 of the outer rail 14 .
That is, when an impact is applied to the upper and lower side surfaces or the left and right side surfaces of the game board 11, the impact is strongly transmitted to the upper vertex P1 or the left vertex P2 of the outer rails . As a result, when the guide holes gh are formed at the upper vertex P1 and the left vertex P2 of the outer rail 14, the strength of the upper vertex P1 and the left vertex P2 is reduced due to the formation of the guide holes gh, and when the impact is transmitted, The outer rail 14 may be damaged. Therefore, by forming the guide hole gh while avoiding the upper vertex P1 and the left vertex P2 of the outer rail 14, it is possible to suppress damage to the outer rail 14. FIG.
Further, in the present embodiment, the guide hole gh is not formed in the third range H3. This makes it possible to facilitate processing of the outer rail 14 and attachment to the rail base 13 . Note that one or more guide holes gh may be formed in the third range H3.

As described above, in this embodiment, the outer rail 14 is formed with five guide holes gh along the longitudinal direction. At this time, the arrangement intervals of the five guide holes gh are uneven. In particular, the arrangement intervals of the five guide holes gh are set so as to be wider toward the tip side (end side). In other words, the arrangement interval of the five guide holes gh is set so as to become narrower toward the proximal end (starting end).
Each guide hole gh is formed at a position where the game ball shot by the game ball shooting device 430 does not come into contact. That is, as shown in FIG. 66, each guide hole gh is formed at the end of the inner rail 14 in the width direction (the front side of the game board 11). In particular, each guide hole gh is formed at a position on the back side (front side of the game board 11) from the front side position by the radius of the game ball from the front side of the game board 11 in the width direction of the outer rail 14. ing.

Next, a method for attaching each rail 12, 14 to the game board 11 will be described.
To attach the inner rail 12 to the game board 11, the positioning protrusion (not shown) provided on the back side of the inner rail 12 is inserted into the positioning recess (not shown) provided on the front side of the game board 11. (not shown). As a result, the inner rail 12 is arranged at a predetermined position in front of the game board 11 . Then, the inner rail 12 is fixed to the front surface of the game board 11 by screwing.
To attach the outer rail 14 to the game board 11 , first, the rail base 13 is attached to the front surface of the game board 11 . For this purpose, a positioning protrusion (not shown) provided on the back side of the rail base 13 is inserted into a positioning recess (not shown) provided on the front side of the game board 11 . As a result, the rail base 13 is arranged at a predetermined position in front of the game board 11 . Then, the rail base 13 is fixed to the front surface of the game board 11 by screwing.
Next, the outer rail 14 is attached to the rail base 13 . For this purpose, the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 14 is arranged along the guide surface 13 b of the rail base 13 . In addition, the proximal bent portion 14 a of the outer rail 14 is inserted (fitted) into the proximal support portion of the rail base 13 , and the distal bent portion 14 b of the outer rail 14 is attached to the distal end support portion of the rail base 13 . Insert (fit) into the part. Further, each protrusion pr provided on the guide surface 13b is inserted (fitted) into each guide hole gh provided on the outer rail 14 . As a result, the outer rail 14 is attached to the rail base 13 in a state in which substantially the entire longitudinal direction of the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 14 is supported by the guide surface 13b.

In front of the game board 11, a game area 30 is defined by the inner rail 12, the outer rail 14, and the like. In the game area 30, there are a left path (left hitting area) formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 and a right path (right hitting area) formed on the right side of the main image display device 31 as paths along which game balls flow down. area) and are configured.
In addition, on the front surface of the game board 11, the inner guide surface 12a of the inner rail 12 and the outer guide surface 14c of the outer rail 14 are arranged facing each other with a predetermined spacing. A shooting path r1 for guiding the game ball shot by the game ball shooting device 430 to the game area 30 is formed between the inner guide surface 12a and the outer guide surface 14c.
Further, in the game area 30, a guiding path r2 is formed to guide (guide) the game ball shot from the shooting path r1 to the right side path. The guide passage r2 is formed at the upper end of the game area 30. As shown in FIG. The guide path r2 is formed above the main image display device 31. As shown in FIG. The guide passage r2 extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side.
In this embodiment, the outer guide surface 14c constitutes the outer peripheral surface ra of the guide passage r2. A decorative portion 33 is provided above the opening in the front of the game board 11 . An inner peripheral surface rb of the guide passage r2 is formed on the upper surface of the decorative portion 33. As shown in FIG.
The game ball shot by the game ball shooting device 430 passes through the shooting path r1 and flows into the game area 30. - 特許庁At this time, when the momentum of the shot game ball is weak, the game ball that has passed through the shooting path r1 flows into the left path. On the other hand, when the momentum of the shot game ball is strong, the game ball that has passed through the shooting path r1 passes through the guide path r2 and flows into the right path.

Here, the positional relationship between the design portion 40 and the guide passage r2 will be described.
67 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 68 is an enlarged view of FIG. 67. FIG. In addition, in FIG.67 and FIG.68, the code|symbol "B" shows the game ball.
As shown in FIG. 67 , a design portion 40 is provided at the upper end portion of the front frame unit 4 . The design portion 40 is provided so as to surround the transparent plates g1 and g2 when viewed from the front side. The design portion 40 is provided so as to bulge (protrude) from the front of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) toward the front side. In particular, the design portion 40 is provided so as to bulge (protrude) toward the front side with respect to the transparent plates g1 and g2.
Specifically, the design portion 40 includes an upper surface 41 extending from the front surface of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) toward the front side, and a front surface 42 extending downward from the front end portion (front end portion) of the upper surface 41 . and a lower surface 43 extending from the lower end of the front surface 42 toward the back surface. As a result, the design portion 40 has a substantially U-shaped cross section.
The rear end (rear end) of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 extends to the front of the transparent plate g1. In this embodiment, the rear-side end of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is in contact with the front surface of the transparent plate g1.
In particular, the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is inclined in the depth direction so that the front side is lower and the rear side is higher. As a result, a part of the upper end of the game board 11 is covered (concealed) by the lower end of the design portion 40 when viewed from the front side.
In addition, the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is curved such that each end in the left-right direction is low and the central portion in the left-right direction is high.

In the following description, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, a portion (hereinafter referred to as " An imaginary line passing through the apex of the outer periphery) is defined as a "first reference line k1". In addition, in this embodiment, the outer peripheral vertex coincides with the upper vertex P1.
Further, an imaginary line that extends along the vertical direction, intersects the first reference line k1, and intersects the back side end (rear end) of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is defined as the "first vertical line ” (not shown). A portion of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 that intersects the first vertical line is defined as a "first design portion d1".
Further, an imaginary line that extends along the vertical direction, intersects the first reference line k1, and intersects the lowest portion (lowest portion) of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is defined as the "second vertical line” (not shown). A portion of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 that intersects the second vertical line is defined as a "second design portion d2".
An imaginary line that is orthogonal to the front surface of the game board 11 and passes through a portion of the inner peripheral surface rb of the guide path r2 that is located directly below the outer peripheral vertex is defined as a "second reference line k2". That is, the second reference line k2 is parallel to the first reference line k1 directly below the first reference line k1.
As a result, an imaginary line that extends in the vertical direction, intersects the second reference line k2, and intersects the back side end (rear end) of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is the above-described second reference line. 1 coincides with the plumb line. As described above, the portion of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 that intersects the first vertical line is the first design portion d1.
In addition, the virtual line that extends along the vertical direction, intersects the second reference line k2, and intersects the lowermost portion (lowest portion) of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is the above-mentioned Coincides with the second vertical line. As described above, the portion of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 that intersects the second vertical line is the second design portion d2.

In this embodiment, the first design portion d1 is arranged below (lower than) the first reference line k1. In particular, the distance (dimension) A from the first reference line k1 to the first design portion d1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball (4 [mm] in this embodiment). Here, the distance A is the height difference between the position of the first reference line k1 and the position of the first design portion d1.
Further, in the present embodiment, the second design portion d2 is arranged below (lower than) the first reference line k1. In particular, the distance (dimension) B from the first reference line k1 to the second design portion d2 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball (40 [mm] in this embodiment). Here, the distance B is the height difference between the position of the first reference line k1 and the position of the second design portion d2.
Thus, in the present embodiment, the second design portion d2 is arranged below (lower position) than the first reference line k1, and in particular, the distance B from the first reference line k1 to the second design portion d2 is By setting the diameter to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere, it is possible to increase the size of the design portion 40 in the vertical direction. On the other hand, by setting the distance A from the first reference line k1 to the first design portion d1 to be equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball is strongly shot by the game ball launcher 430, and the game ball travels along the guide path r2. When rolling along the outer peripheral surface ra, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the game ball from the front side. As described above, since the pachinko machine 1 ensures the visibility of the game balls, the player is prevented from overlooking the game balls, and the game can be played normally. As a result, the game can be played stably.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first design portion d1 is arranged above (higher than) the second reference line k2. In particular, the distance (dimension) C from the second reference line k2 to the first design portion d1 is greater than or equal to the radius of the game ball (14 [mm] in this embodiment). Here, the distance C is the height difference between the position of the second reference line k2 and the position of the first design portion d1.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the second design portion d2 is arranged below (lower than) the second reference line k2. In particular, the distance (dimension) D from the second reference line k2 to the second design portion d2 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball (22 [mm] in this embodiment). Here, the distance D is the height difference between the position of the second reference line k2 and the position of the second design portion d2.
Thus, in this embodiment, the second design portion d2 is arranged below (lower position) than the second reference line k2, and in particular, the distance D from the second reference line k2 to the second design portion d2 By setting the diameter to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere, it is possible to increase the size of the design portion 40 in the vertical direction. On the other hand, by setting the distance C from the second reference line k2 to the first design portion d1 to be equal to or greater than the radius of the game ball, the game ball is weakly launched by the game ball launching device 430, and the game ball travels along the guide path r2. When rolling along the inner peripheral surface rb, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the game ball from the front side. As described above, since the pachinko machine 1 ensures the visibility of the game balls, the player is prevented from overlooking the game balls, and the game can be played normally. As a result, the game can be played stably.

A board lamp 21 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the game area 30 of the game board 11 . The board lamp 21 includes a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.
The main image display device 31 is attached to the back side of the set plate. The main image display device 31 is configured by a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display.
The main image display device 31 includes a display screen 31a capable of displaying various effects images (moving images and still images).
The display screen 31a displays three first production pattern display areas a1 to a3 (not shown) in which a first production pattern z1 (not shown) and a second production pattern z2 (not shown) are displayed. It is possible to configure one second effect symbol display area a4 (not shown).
The first production pattern z1 includes identification information (symbols) such as numbers, letters, symbols, and characters. In each of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the first effect symbol z1. The second effect pattern z2 is composed of a color bar. In the second effect symbol display area a4, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the second effect symbol z2.

The variable display of the production designs z1 and z2 means that the first production design z1 is moved (scrolled) in each of the first production design display areas a1 to a3, and the second production design displayed in the second production design display area a4. 2 Refers to a display in which the type of effect pattern z2 is changed (the color represented by the color bar is changed sequentially).
The stop display of the production patterns z1 and z2 means that the first production pattern z1 of one kind is stopped at the lottery result display position of each of the first production design display areas a1 to a3, and the second production design display area a4. , a display in which one type of second effect pattern z2 is displayed (a color bar represents a predetermined color).
Then, a combination of the first production pattern z1 stop-displayed in the three first production pattern display areas a1 to a3 and the second production design z2 stop-displayed in the second production design display area a4 produces a special design. The result of the lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is displayed.
Further, on the display screen 31a, reserved symbol display areas b1 and b2 (not shown) in which reserved symbols h (not shown) are displayed can be configured. Reserved symbol display regions b1 and b2 display reserved symbols h corresponding to game information for which the derivation of the result of start determination (completion of stop display of special symbols) is withheld, which will be described later.
In the reserved symbol display area b1, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the game information during the notification display (variation display and stop display of special symbols) is displayed. In the reserved symbol display area b2, a reserved symbol h corresponding to the game information whose notification display is being reserved is displayed.

The sub-image display device 32 is arranged on the front side of the main image display device 31 .
The sub-image display device 32 is composed of a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT display. The sub-image display device 32 has a display screen 32a capable of displaying effect images.
The sub-image display device 32 can be vertically displaced (moved) by a driving mechanism (not shown). Specifically, the sub-image display device 32 can be displaced within a predetermined range including an origin position (see FIG. 2) and an effect position (not shown) below the origin position. .
The sub image display device 32 arranged (displaced) at the origin position is arranged above the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and does not cover the display screen 31a. On the other hand, the sub-image display device 32 arranged (displaced) at the rendering position is arranged on the front side of the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and covers part of the display screen 31a.

A first start port 51 is provided below the display screen 31 a in the game area 30 . The first starting port 51 is a ball-entering port (so-called “navel”) that opens upward, and is always capable of entering a game ball. The first starting port 51 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the right path).
In the first start port 51, a special figure 1 start port switch 101 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. The special figure 1 starting port switch 101 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball entered into the first starting port 51 (entering the game ball into the first starting port 51) Output. The main control board 200 executes the first special symbol lottery according to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 .

On the left side of the first starting opening 51 in the game area 30, an upper left other winning opening 55, a middle left winning opening 56, and a lower left winning opening 57 are provided. Each of the other prize winning openings 55 to 57 is a ball entry opening that opens upward, and game balls can be entered at all times. Each of the other winning holes 55 to 57 allows entry of game balls flowing down the left path (impossibility of entry of game balls flowing down the right path).
The game board 11 is provided with a left winning slot switch 106 (see FIG. 3). The left winning port switch 106 is a game ball entering the upper left other winning port 55 (entering a game ball into the upper left other winning port 55), a game ball entering the left center other winning port 56 (left middle other winning In response to the detection of the game ball entering the opening 56) and the game ball entering the lower left other winning opening 57 (the game ball entering the lower left other winning opening 57), a detection signal is output to the main control board. 200 output. The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the left winning hole switch 106 .

A starting gate 41 is provided on the right side of the display screen 31 a in the game area 30 . The starting gate 41 is formed so that game balls can always pass through it. The starting gate 41 allows passage of game balls flowing down the right path (impossibility of passage of game balls flowing down the left path).
The starting gate 41 is provided with a gate switch 104 (see FIG. 3). The gate switch 104 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the start gate 41 (passage of the start gate 41 by the game ball). The main control board 200 executes a normal symbol lottery according to the input of the detection signal from the gate switch 104 .

A large winning opening 53 is provided below the starting gate 41 in the game area 30 . The big winning hole 53 is displaced between a closed state that makes it impossible for the game ball to enter the big winning hole 53 and an open state that makes it possible for the game ball to enter the big winning hole 53. A special electric accessory (special electric role) 53a (so-called “attacker”) is provided.
The special electric accessory 53a is opened and closed by a special electric accessory solenoid 65 (see FIG. 3). The special electric accessory 53a is normally closed to the big winning port 53, making it impossible for game balls to enter, but the player wins the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. Then, when the jackpot game state is generated, the special electric accessory 53a is brought into the open state, and the game ball can be entered. The big winning opening 53 allows entry of game balls flowing down the right path (impossibility of entry of game balls flowing down the left path).
A count switch 103 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the big winning opening 53 . The count switch 103 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the big winning hole 53 (entering the game ball into the big winning hole 53). The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the count switch 103 .

A second starting opening 52 is provided below the big winning opening 53 in the game area 30 . The second starting port 52 has a closed state that makes it impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 52, and an open state that allows a game ball to enter the second starting port 52. A displaceable ordinary electric accessory (ordinary electric accessory) 52a (so-called “electric tulip”) is provided.
The normal electric accessory 52a is opened and closed by a normal electric accessory solenoid 64 (see FIG. 3). In the second starting port 52, the normal electric accessory 52a is normally in a closed state, making it impossible to enter the game ball. 52a is opened and a game ball can be entered. The second starting port 52 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
Inside the second starting port 52, a special figure 2 starting port switch 102 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. The special figure 2 starting port switch 102 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that entered the second starting port 52 (entering the game ball to the second starting port 52) Output. The main control board 200 executes the second special symbol lottery according to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 .

A right other prize winning opening 54 is provided below the second start opening 52 in the game area 30 . The right other prize winning port 54 is a ball entrance opening upward, and game balls can be entered at all times. The right other prize winning port 54 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
A right prize winning port switch 105 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the right other prize winning port 54 . The right winning opening switch 105 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball that has entered the other right winning opening 54 (entrance of a gaming ball into the other right winning opening 54). . The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the right winning opening switch 105 .

At the lowest position in the game area 30, an out port 58 is provided for discharging game balls that have not entered (won a prize) in any of the winning ports 51-57.
Here, the inner frame unit 3 includes a discharge path (not shown) through which game balls discharged from the game area 30 pass. Specifically, the discharge path is attached to the back side of the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3 . The pachinko machine 1 is configured such that all game balls hit into the game area 30 (all game balls discharged from the game area 30) pass through the discharge path. That is, the game ball launched into the game area 30 is discharged from the game area 30 by entering one of the winning openings 51 to 57 or passing through the out opening 58, and flows into the discharge path. do.
Specifically, the game balls that have entered the winning holes 51 to 57 are guided to the discharge path after being detected by the switches 101 to 103, 105, 106 provided in the winning holes. Also, the game ball discharged from the out port 58 is guided to the discharge path.
The inner frame unit 3 is provided with an out switch 109 (see FIG. 3). Then, the out switch 109 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the discharge path (a game ball discharged from the game area 30). As a result, all game balls ejected from the game area 30 are detected by the out switch 109 .
Furthermore, in the game area 30, a plurality of nails (not shown) are arranged so as to guide the game balls to the respective prize winning openings 51 to 57 and the starting gate 41. As shown in FIG.

A main display device 60 is arranged on the game board 11 . The main display device 60 includes a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light-emitting element (LED in this embodiment).
Information about the game is displayed on the main display device 60 .
The main display device 60 includes a special figure 1 display device, a special figure 2 display device, a normal figure display device, a special figure 1 reservation display device, a special figure 2 reservation display device, a general figure reservation display device, and a round It is configured including a display device, a right-handed display device, a variable probability display device, and a time saving display device.
Specifically, the main display device 60 includes 32 lighting elements (LED1 to LED32).
And, in the main display device 60, LED1 ~ LED8 constitutes a special figure 1 display device, LED7 ~ LED16 constitutes a special figure 2 display device, LED17, 18 constitutes a general figure display device, LED19 ~LED23 constitutes a round display device, LED24 constitutes a right-handed display device, LED25, 26 constitutes a special figure 1 pending display device, LEDs 27, 28 constitutes a special figure 2 pending display device Then, the LEDs 29 and 30 constitute a normal figure holding display device, the LED 31 constitutes a variable probability display device, and the LED 32 constitutes a time saving display device.

The special figure 1 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the first special symbol consisting of numbers, symbols, and the like. Then, in the special figure 1 display device, the result of the first special symbol lottery is displayed by the stopped and displayed first special symbol.
The special figure 2 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the second special pattern consisting of numbers, patterns, and the like. Then, in the special figure 2 display device, the result of the second special symbol lottery is displayed by the stopped and displayed second special symbol.
Here, the display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the special symbol display device and the display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4 are the time when the variable display is started. , the time when the stop display is started, and the lottery results indicated by the symbols stopped and displayed are associated with each other.
Then, when the first special symbol (stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device becomes a specific symbol (jackpot symbol), or the second special symbol stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device ( When the stop symbol) becomes a specific symbol (big win symbol), a big win game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is generated.
The normal pattern display device can perform variable display and stop display of normal patterns consisting of numbers, patterns, and the like. Then, in the normal pattern display device, the results of the normal pattern lottery are displayed by the stopped normal symbols. Then, when the normal pattern stop-displayed on the normal pattern display device becomes a specific pattern (normal pattern per pattern), the normal pattern per game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is generated.

The special figure 1 reservation display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery is withheld (the number of special figure 1 reservations). That is, the special figure 1 reservation number is the number of special figure 1 game information that the start determination is withheld.
The special figure 2 reservation display device displays the number of times (special figure 2 reservation number) that the display of the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is withheld. That is, the special figure 2 reservation number is the number of special figure 2 game information that the starting determination is withheld.
The normal pattern lottery holding display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery is held (the number of normal pattern holdings). That is, the number of general pattern reservations is the number of general pattern game information that the starting determination is reserved.
The round display device displays the number of round games executed during the jackpot game state (type of jackpot game state).
The right hitting display device displays the path (left path or right path) along which the game ball should be hit.
The variable probability display device displays the game state at the time of power return (during the occurrence of the special figure high probability state or the occurrence of the special figure low probability state).
The current game state (executing or stopping the time saving control) is displayed on the time saving display device.

Also, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with one or a plurality of movable units (not shown). In this embodiment, the front frame unit 4 is provided with one or more movable units, and the game board unit 10 is provided with one or more movable units.
Each movable body unit of the front frame unit 4 is arranged on the front surface of the design part 40, the upper surface of the tray unit 5, etc., and is capable of performing a predetermined performance action.
Each movable unit of the game board unit 10 is attached to the front side of the set plate. Specifically, each movable body unit is arranged in a space (hereinafter referred to as “effect space”) between the game board 11 and the main image display device 31 (display screen 31a). Each movable body unit can perform a predetermined performance action in the performance space.
Each movable body unit includes an effect member, a drive mechanism, a drive source, and a position detection sensor 24 (see FIG. 3). In this embodiment, a motor 23 (see FIG. 3) is used as the drive source. The motor 23 is a stepping motor. Note that a configuration using a solenoid as a driving source may be employed.
The effect member can be displaced along a predetermined direction by a drive mechanism. Specifically, the effect member can be displaced to a plurality of positions including an initial position and a effect position. The effect member is driven (displaced) by a motor 23 .

The position detection sensor 24 is configured by a photosensor or the like. The position detection sensor 24 detects the position of the production member. Specifically, the position detection sensor 24 includes a light projecting section and a light receiving section that receives the light projected from the light projecting section. Then, the position detection sensor 24 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300 in accordance with the reception (detection) of the light projected from the light projecting unit by the light receiving unit. On the other hand, the position detection sensor 24 stops outputting the detection signal to the production control board 300 when the light receiving section does not receive (detect) the light projected from the light projecting section.
A shield plate is provided at a predetermined position of the effect member. Then, when the effect member is arranged at the initial position, the shielding plate is arranged between the light projecting part and the light receiving part of the position detection sensor 24 to block light from entering the light receiving part. Thereby, when the production member is arranged at the initial position, the output of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 24 to the production control board 300 is stopped. On the other hand, when the production member is not arranged at the initial position, a detection signal is output from the position detection sensor 24 to the production control board 300 .
Thereby, the effect control board 300 can detect whether or not the effect member is arranged at the initial position depending on the input state of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 24 .

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with detection sensors for detecting various abnormal states.
In this embodiment, a glass frame opening sensor 107, an inner frame opening sensor 108, a vibration detection sensor 113, a radio wave detection sensor 114, a magnetic detection sensor 115, and the like are arranged as detection sensors.
The glass frame opening sensor 107 detects opening of the front frame unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3 . Then, the glass frame opening sensor 107 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 according to the opening of the front frame unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3 .
The inner frame open sensor 108 detects opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2 . Then, the inner frame opening sensor 108 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 according to the opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2 .

The vibration detection sensor 113 detects vibration of the game board 11 . In this embodiment, the vibration detection sensor 113 is arranged on the game board 11 . Then, the vibration detection sensor 113 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of vibration of the game board 11 .
The radio wave detection sensor 114 detects radio waves generated around the game board 11 . In this embodiment, two radio wave detection sensors 114 are arranged on the game board 11 . Each radio wave detection sensor 114 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of radio waves.
The magnetism detection sensor 115 detects magnetism generated around the game board 11 . In this embodiment, three magnetic detection sensors 115 are arranged. Specifically, one magnetic detection sensor 115 is arranged in the inner frame unit 3 (discharge path). Also, two magnetic detection sensors 115 are arranged on the game board 11 . Then, the magnetic detection sensor 115 arranged in the inner frame unit 3 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to detection of magnetism. Further, each magnetic detection sensor 115 arranged on the game board 11 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in accordance with detection of magnetism.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachinko machine. FIG. 6 is an address map of the memory area used by the CPU 210. As shown in FIG.
The pachinko machine 1 includes various control boards.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 1 supplies power (electric power) to the main control board 200, the performance control board 300, the payout control board 400, and the control boards 200, 300, 400, etc. It has a plurality of control boards such as a power supply board 600, a driver board 330, a sub-connection board 340, and the like.
The plurality of control boards 200, 300, 400, 600 are independent (separate) circuit boards. Each control board 200, 300, 400, 600 is housed in a separate board case.
The main control board 200 and the effect control board 300 are included in the game board unit 10 . Specifically, the main control board 200 and the effect control board 300 are attached to the back side of the game board 11 .
The payout control board 400 is included in the inner frame unit 3 . Specifically, the payout control board 400 is attached to the back side of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3 .

(Configuration of main control board 200)
First, the configuration of the main control board 200 will be described.
The main control board 200 controls the progress of the game.
The main control board 200 includes a one-chip microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer), a clock generation circuit 202, a random number generation circuit 203, an input port 204, an output port 205, a performance display device 206, a RAM clear switch 207, a setting key switch 208, and a sink. It includes a driver 240, source drivers 250a and 250b, and the like.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI integrated with a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, and the like. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, and the like.

The main control board 200 includes a memory area used by the CPU 210 . As shown in FIG. 6, the memory area used by the CPU 210 includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the ROM 220 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the RAM 230. .
Here, in FIG. 6, addresses for specifying memory areas are shown in hexadecimal numbers ("H" indicates hexadecimal numbers).

The ROM 220 (memory area of the ROM 220) includes a used area m1 (0000H to 1A7AH) and an unused area m2 (2000H to 2BFFH).
The used area m1 includes a program area, an unused area, and a data area. The program area stores a program (program code) for controlling the progress of the game. The data area stores data (program data) for controlling the progress of the game. Note that the used area m1 may be configured without an unused area.

The unused area m2 includes a program area and a data area.
The program area includes a program (program code) for executing processing related to the test defined by the game machine regulations, and a program (program code) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 (specifically, calculating the base ratio). code) and are stored. The data area stores data (program data) for executing processing related to tests defined by gaming machine regulations and data (program data) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 .
The ROM 220 also has an unused area, a ROM comment area, a program management area, etc., in addition to the used area m1 and the non-used area m2.
Arbitrary data such as program titles and versions are stored in the ROM comment area. On the other hand, the program management area stores information necessary for the CPU 210 to execute various programs.
Further, in the ROM 220, an unused area m3 of predetermined bytes (for example, 16 bytes or more) is provided between the used area m1 and the unused area m2. This clarifies the boundary between the use area m1 and the non-use area m2.

The RAM 230 (memory area of the RAM 230) includes a used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) and an unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH).
The use area M1 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. Note that the used area M1 may be configured without including an unused area.
Specifically, the work area includes a setting value area, a gaming machine state flag area, a checksum area, a backup flag area, an error related area, a normal game related area 1, and a normal game related area 2. is composed of
A setting value is stored in the setting value area. A gaming machine status flag is stored in the gaming machine status flag area. A checksum is stored in the checksum area. A backup flag is stored in the backup flag area. Information about errors is stored in the error-related area. The normal game-related area 1 stores a sub-command pointer and the like. The normal game-related area 2 stores input/output data in the main control board 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), lottery results, flags for managing the game state, and the like. In particular, the normal game-related area 2 is a special figure 1 starter switch 101, a special figure 2 starter switch 102, and a region for storing game information acquired with the input of a detection signal from each of the gate switch 104 (game information storage area, which will be described later).

The unused area M2 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing processing related to tests defined by game machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). It is used as an area for temporarily storing various data. On the other hand, the stack area is during execution of a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing processing related to tests defined by gaming machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). In addition, it is used as an area to temporarily save various data.
Specifically, the work area includes a performance display related area. The performance display related area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during the execution of the program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. FIG.
In addition, the RAM 230 is provided with an unused area M3 of predetermined bytes (16 bytes or more) between the used area M1 and the unused area M2. This clarifies the boundary between the use area M1 and the non-use area M2.

In this embodiment, it is permitted to refer to the data stored in the non-use area M2 in the process based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1.
On the other hand, it is prohibited to rewrite (change) the data stored in the non-use area M2 by processing based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. there is
Also, in the process based on the program stored in the non-use area m2 (the program for executing the process related to the test defined by the game machine regulations, or the program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), the use area It is permitted to refer to the data stored in M1.
On the other hand, by processing based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing processing related to the test specified by the game machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), the use area The data stored in M1 is prohibited from being rewritten (changed).
A game in the pachinko machine 1 can be progressed (completed) by a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1.

The clock generation circuit 202 generates a clock (synchronization signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (12 [MHz] in this embodiment) and outputs this clock to the CPU 210 and the random number generation circuit 203 respectively.
A random number generating circuit 203 includes a first loop counter for generating a winning random number for the normal symbol lottery, a second loop counter for generating a big winning random number for the first special symbol lottery, and a second loop counter for generating a big winning random number for the second special symbol lottery. It comprises a 3rd loop counter and a 4th loop counter that generates a reach group random number.
The first loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (within the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment) each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A winning random number for a normal pattern lottery is generated. In this embodiment, the value of the first loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).
The second loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (within the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment) each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A jackpot random number for the first special symbol lottery is generated. In this embodiment, the value of the second loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).

The third loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (within the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment) each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A jackpot random number for the second special symbol lottery is generated. In this embodiment, the value of the third loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).
The fourth loop counter keeps the value of the loop counter within a predetermined range (0 to 10006 in this embodiment) every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (once at the clock frequency divided by 32). within range) to generate a reach group random number. In this embodiment, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated every 2.666 [μs] (32 [s]/12 [MHz]=2.666 [μs]).

The input port 204 includes a plurality of input ports (input port 0 to input port 3 in this embodiment).
Input port 0 receives a detection signal from the glass frame opening sensor 107, a detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108, a detection signal from the vibration detection sensor 113, a detection signal from one of the radio wave detection sensors 114, and a magnetic detection sensor 115. A detection signal or the like from is input.
Input port 1 receives the RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208, the handle detection signal from the firing enable condition detector 422, and the like.
The input port 2 receives a detection signal from the count switch 103, a detection signal from the right winning slot switch 105, a detection signal from the left winning slot switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, and a signal from the radio wave detection sensor 114 on the other side. A detection signal or the like is input.
To the input port 3, a detection signal from the special figure 1 starter switch 101, a detection signal from the special figure 2 starter switch 102, a detection signal from the gate switch 104, and the like are input.
Each input port (input port 0 to input port 3) is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor (detection signal). In the reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor, 1-bit data indicating the reception state of the detection signal from the switch/sensor is set.
Specifically, in the reception storage area corresponding to each switch sensor, "1" is set when the detection signal from the switch sensor is input (high level). "0" is set when the detection signal from is not input (low level).

The output port 205 includes a plurality of output ports (output port 0 to output port 4 in this embodiment).
The output port 0 outputs data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the main display device 60 . A data signal output from the output port 0 is input to the source driver 250a.
The output port 1 outputs common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) for controlling lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, and a launch enable signal for detecting launch conditions, which will be described later. A common signal output from the output port 1 is input to the sink driver 240 .
Output port 2 outputs an external signal. At this time, the external signal output from the output port 2 is input to the hall computer via the payout control board 400 and the external terminal board 450 .
The output port 3 outputs a control signal for controlling the drive of the normal electric accessory solenoid 64, a control signal for controlling the drive of the special electric accessory solenoid 65, and the like.
The output port 4 outputs data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the performance display device 206 . A data signal output from the output port 4 is input to the source driver 250b.

Also, the main control board 200 is configured to include a command output port 1 and a command output port 2 . Then, the CPU 210 transmits a control command (subcommand) to the performance control board 300 from the command output port 1, and transmits a control command (payout command) to the payout control board 400 from the command output port 2. do.
Command output port 1 and command output port 2 each include a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), a transmission shift register (not shown), have.
The transmission data register outputs the control command input based on the subcommand transmission processing (step S2-4), which will be described later, to the FIFO buffer.
The FIFO buffer is composed of multiple registers and is capable of storing multiple control commands. The FIFO buffer stores the control commands input from the transmission data register and outputs the stored control commands to the transmission shift register in the input order.
The transmission shift register performs parallel-serial conversion on the control command input from the FIFO buffer, and transmits it to the effect control board 300 or the payout control board 400 as serial data.

Performance display device 206 includes a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light-emitting element (LED in this embodiment). It should be noted that the performance display device 206 is arranged on the back side of the game board 11, so that it cannot be visually recognized by the player.
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the state of the game machine (hereinafter referred to as "game machine state") includes a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting error state, and a RAM error state. and a backup abnormal state are defined. The information displayed on the performance display device 206 changes according to the gaming machine state that has occurred.

The performance display device 206 includes four (four-digit) display units (not shown). Each display section is composed of eight lighting elements. That is, each display unit is composed of a 7-segment LED capable of displaying numbers, symbols, etc., and a dot-segment LED capable of displaying dots such as a decimal point.
Specifically, the performance display device 206 includes 32 lighting elements (LED33 to LED64). In the performance display device 206, LED33 to LED40 are the first digit display portion, LED41 to LED48 are the second digit display portion, LED49 to LED56 are the third digit display portion, and LED57 to LED64. is the fourth digit display.

The game can be played while the playable state is being generated. Then, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 while the playable state is occurring.
In this embodiment, while the playable state is occurring, the performance display device 206 changes the first base ratio and the second base ratio every predetermined time (5.0 [s] in this embodiment). , are displayed alternately.
The “first base ratio” is the base ratio of the current section (the base ratio calculated for the period from the start of the current section to the current time).
The “second base ratio” is the base ratio of the previous section (the final base ratio calculated for the previous section).
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information for identifying the type of base ratio (first base ratio or second base ratio) is displayed by the upper two-digit display portion of the four-digit display portion. A number indicating the base ratio (percentage) is displayed by the lower two digits of the display.

While the setting change state is occurring, the setting value can be changed. While the setting change state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information indicating that the setting change state is occurring is displayed by the display portion of the upper three digits of the display portion of the four digits (specifically, ""n." is displayed in the upper two digits, and "-" is displayed in the upper third digit. be done.
While the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting value can be confirmed. While the setting confirmation state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring is displayed by the display section of the upper three digits of the display section of four digits (specifically, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring (specifically, ""r" is displayed in the upper two digits, and "n." be.

The game cannot progress while the game stop state (setting error state, RAM error state, and backup error state) is occurring. While the game stop state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information indicating that the game stop state is occurring is displayed by the display portion of the upper three digits of the display portion of four digits (specifically, the upper first digit indicates "E" is displayed in the upper two digits, "r." A number indicating the error code corresponding to the status) is displayed.

The RAM clear switch 207 is a tactile switch. In other words, the RAM clear switch 207 includes an operation unit that can be pressed. The RAM clear switch 207 outputs a RAM clear signal to the input port 1 when the operation unit is pressed.
The setting key switch 208 is a key lock switch. In other words, the setting key switch 208 includes an operation section provided with a keyhole. The operation unit is unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole, and can be rotated (switched) from the OFF state to the ON state. The setting key switch 208 outputs a detection signal to the input port 1 when the operation unit is in the ON state.

The sink driver 240 controls the output of common signals to the respective display devices 60 and 206 according to the common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) output from the output port 1. FIG.
The source driver 250a controls the output of data signals to the main display device 60 according to the data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 0. FIG.
The source driver 250b controls the output of data signals to the performance display device 206 according to the data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 4. FIG.
In the pachinko machine 1, a source driver 250a corresponding to the main display device 60 and a source driver 250b corresponding to the performance display device 206 are provided. Application of the power supply voltage Vcc to the data signal lines is individually controlled by the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206 .

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, a sink driver 240 common to the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206 is provided. Grounding of the common signal line is collectively controlled by the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206 .
This eliminates the need to provide sink drivers 240 corresponding to the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, respectively. output port) is no longer necessary.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts required to control the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, and the main control board 200 (CPU 210) can be used to control the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206. Therefore, it becomes possible to reduce the control load for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206 .

The main control board 200 also includes a test signal output circuit (not shown).
CPU210, in the test signal output process (step S4-24) to be described later, to generate test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (jackpot game state, execution state of time saving control, probability state of special symbol lottery, etc.) and stores the generated test signal in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, the test signal stored in the port output request buffer is output from the predetermined output port. A test signal output from a predetermined output port is input to an interface board of a test computer (not shown) via a test signal output circuit.
Also, in the main control board 200, the detection signal from the special figure 1 starter switch 101, the detection signal from the special figure 2 starter switch 102, the detection signal from the gate switch 104, the detection signal from the count switch 103, the right prize A detection signal from the opening switch 105, a detection signal from the left winning opening switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, etc. are input to the input port 204, and sent to the computer for testing via the test signal output circuit. Input to the interface board.
Furthermore, in the main control board 200, a control signal for controlling the driving of each solenoid (ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64, special electric accessory solenoid 65, etc.) output from the output port 3 is sent to each solenoid 64, 65 Along with being input, it is input to the interface board of the computer for testing via the test signal output circuit.

(Configuration of payout control board 400)
Next, the configuration of the payout control board 400 will be described.
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the firing condition detection circuit and the firing control circuit.
The payout control board 400 controls the shooting of game balls to the game area 30 and the payout of game balls.
The payout control board 400 includes a one-chip microcomputer.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI integrated with a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, and the like. Specifically, a one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like.
The payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation (prize ball payout operation) by the game ball payout device 440 based on the control command received from the main control board 200 . Also, the payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation (rental ball payout operation) by the game ball payout device 440 based on the ball lending instruction signal received from the CR unit 700 .
In addition, the payout control board 400 includes a resistance value (voltage value) input from the firing volume 411, a touch signal input from the touch sensor 412, a firing stop signal input from the firing stop switch 413, and a main control board. Based on the launch permission signal input from 200 and the CR connection signal input from CR unit 700, the game ball shooting operation by game ball shooting device 430 (shooting solenoid 431) is controlled.
Hereinafter, a method for controlling the game ball shooting operation by the payout control board 400 will be described in detail.

As shown in FIG. 4, the payout control board 400 includes a launch condition detection circuit 420 and a launch control circuit 425 as circuits for controlling the game ball payout operation.
The firing condition detection circuit 420 is a circuit that detects establishment of firing conditions, which will be described later.
The firing condition detection circuit 420 includes an operation detection section 421 , a firing condition detection section 422 and a firing condition detection section 423 .
The operation detection unit 421 is a circuit that detects a rotation operation (amount of rotation operation) of the handle operation unit.
The operation detection unit 421 includes an operational amplifier that controls the output of the operation detection signal (makes the operation detection signal high level or low level) according to the resistance value (voltage value) of the emission volume 411 .
Specifically, in the firing handle unit 6, the resistance value of the firing volume 411 changes according to the amount of rotation operation of the handle operation section. Then, the operation detection unit 421 detects the resistance value (voltage value) of the firing volume 411, and based on the detected resistance value (voltage value), the presence or absence of the rotation operation of the handle operation unit and the rotation operation of the handle operation unit. Quantity and to detect.
Then, the operation detection unit 421 generates an operation detection signal while detecting a rotation operation of the handle operation unit, and outputs the generated operation detection signal to the firing enable condition detection unit 422 (operation detection signal to high level). On the other hand, the operation detection unit 421 stops outputting the operation detection signal to the firing enable condition detection unit 422 (makes the operation detection signal low level) when the rotation operation of the handle operation unit is not detected.
In addition, the operation detection unit 421 generates a firing intensity signal corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the handle operation unit (resistance value of the firing volume 411) while detecting the rotation operation of the handle operation unit, and generates a firing intensity signal. An intensity signal is output to firing control circuit 425 .

The firing enable condition detection unit 422 is a circuit that detects establishment of the firing enable condition.
The firing enable condition detection unit 422 includes an AND gate IC (logic IC) that controls the output/stop of a predetermined signal in accordance with the AND operation result of the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the firing stop signal, and an AND gate. and a transistor for switching output/stop of the steering wheel detection signal according to a predetermined signal output from the IC.
The "fireable condition" is a condition related to the player's operation (player's intention) among a plurality of conditions constituting the later-described firing condition.
The firing enable conditions include (1) a condition based on the detection status of the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 (detection status of the rotation operation of the handle operation part), and (2) a detection status of the touch sensor 412 (a player's handle and (3) a condition based on the detection status of the firing stop switch 413 (detection status of the pressing operation of the firing stop button).

In this embodiment, (1) the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 have detected the rotation operation of the handle operation unit, and (2) the touch sensor 412 has detected contact with the handle operation unit by the player. and (3) that the firing stop switch 413 does not detect that the firing stop button has been pressed down, the firing enable condition is met. On the other hand, when at least one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the condition for enabling shooting is not satisfied.
Here, the firing enable conditions are (1) a condition based on the detection state of the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 (detection state of the rotation operation of the handle operation unit), and (2) the detection state of the touch sensor 412 (player and (3) the condition based on the detection status of the firing stop switch 413 (the detection status of the pressing operation of the firing stop button) is not included. I don't mind.
That is, (1) the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 have detected the rotation operation of the handle operation unit, and (2) the touch sensor 412 has detected the player's contact with the handle operation unit. When both conditions of (1) and (2) are satisfied, the firing enable condition is satisfied, and when at least one of the conditions (1) and (2) is not satisfied, the firing enable condition is not satisfied. I don't mind.

Specifically, the firing condition detection unit 422 detects an operation detection signal input from the operation detection unit 421, a touch signal input from the touch sensor 412, and a firing stop signal input from the firing stop switch 413. Based on this, it detects whether or not the conditions for enabling the firing are established.
At this time, the firing enable condition detection unit 422 detects that the firing enable condition is established when all of the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the firing stop signal are input. On the other hand, when at least one of the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the firing stop signal is not input, the fulfillment of the firing enable condition is not detected.
The firing condition detection unit 422 generates a handle detection signal when detecting the establishment of the firing condition, and sends the generated handle detection signal to the main control board 200 and the firing condition detection unit 423 respectively. output (set the steering wheel detection signal to high level). On the other hand, the firing condition detection unit 422 stops outputting the handle detection signal to each of the main control board 200 and the firing condition detection unit 423 (lowers the handle detection signal) when it does not detect that the firing condition is satisfied. level).

The firing condition detection unit 423 is a circuit that detects establishment of firing conditions.
The firing condition detection unit 423 includes an AND gate IC (logic IC) that controls the output/stop of the firing signal in accordance with the AND operation result of the handle detection signal, the firing permission signal, and the CR connection signal. be.
The "shooting condition" is a condition for shooting a game ball (game ball shooting operation) to the game area 30 by the game ball shooting device 430 (shooting solenoid 431).
In this embodiment, (1) the firing enable condition is met, (2) the firing permission signal is input from the main control board 200, and (3) the CR connection signal is input from the CR unit 700. The firing condition is satisfied when all the conditions of On the other hand, when at least one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the launch condition is not established.

The "fire permission signal" indicates that communication between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 is possible (the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected). As a premise, it is output from the main control board 200 to the firing condition detection section 423 when the game ready state is set.
Here, a configuration may be adopted in which the firing permission signal is output from the main control board 200 to the firing condition detection unit 423 during the period when the main control board 200 is powered on, regardless of the state of the gaming machine. do not have. That is, when communication is possible between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 (when the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected), the firing permission signal However, it may be configured such that it is output from the main control board 200 to the firing condition detection section 423 .
When the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 are in a communicable state (when the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected), the "CR connection signal" It is output from the CR unit 700 to the firing condition detection section 423 .

Specifically, the firing condition detection section 423 detects a handle detection signal input from the firing condition detection section 422, a firing permission signal input from the main control board 200, and a CR connection signal input from the CR unit 700. , to detect whether or not the launch condition is established.
At this time, the firing condition detector 423 detects that the firing condition is established when all of the handle detection signal, the firing permission signal, and the CR connection signal are input. On the other hand, when at least one signal among the handle detection signal, the firing permission signal, and the CR connection signal is not input, the fulfillment of the firing condition is not detected.
The firing condition detector 423 generates a firing signal while detecting that the firing condition is established, and outputs the generated firing signal to the firing control circuit 425 (making the firing signal high level). On the other hand, the firing condition detector 423 stops outputting the firing signal to the firing control circuit 425 (makes the firing signal low level) when it does not detect that the firing condition is met.

The shooting control circuit 425 is a circuit for controlling the shooting intensity of the game ball by the game ball shooting device 430 and the shooting timing of the game ball by the game ball shooting device 430 . That is, the shooting control circuit 425 controls the output of the drive signal to the game ball shooting device 430 (shooting solenoid 431).
Specifically, the firing control circuit 425 includes a clock generating section (not shown), a firing timing control section (not shown), and a firing solenoid driving section (not shown).
The clock generator outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency to the launch timing controller.
The firing timing control section generates a pulse signal for controlling firing timing based on the clock signal input from the clock generating section, and outputs the generated pulse signal to the firing solenoid driving section. At this time, the launch timing control section generates a pulse signal so that the number of game balls launched per minute is a predetermined number (for example, 100 [balls]).
The firing solenoid drive unit activates the firing solenoid based on the firing signal input from the firing condition detection unit 423, the pulse signal input from the firing timing control unit, and the firing intensity signal input from the operation detection unit 421. It controls the output of drive signals to 431 .
Specifically, when the firing signal is input from the firing condition detecting section 423, the firing solenoid drive section receives input from the operation detecting section 421 triggered by the pulse signal input from the firing timing control section. A drive signal (driving current) corresponding to the emission intensity signal is output to the emission solenoid 431 . As a result, the game ball is shot with an intensity corresponding to the shot intensity signal input from the operation detection unit 421 .
On the other hand, the firing solenoid drive section stops outputting the drive signal to the firing solenoid 431 when the firing signal is not input from the firing condition detection section 423 . As a result, the shooting of the game ball is stopped.

The game ball shooting device 430 includes a ball-striking mallet (not shown) and a shooting solenoid 431 for driving the ball-striking mallet. The firing solenoid 431 is composed of a rotary solenoid. Here, the ball hitting mallet may be driven by another driving source such as a motor.
A game ball is supplied to the game ball launcher 430 from a ball feeding unit (not shown). Then, when a drive signal is input to the shooting solenoid 431, the shooting solenoid 431 is driven according to the input drive signal, and a game ball is shot out by the ball hitting mallet. As a result, the game ball is shot to the game area 30. - 特許庁

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, on the premise that the game-enabled state is set in the main control board 200, and that communication is possible between the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400, shooting is stopped. When the handle operation portion is rotated (displaced from the initial position toward the limit position side) by contact with the player without pressing the button, the game ball shooting operation by the game ball shooting device 430 is started. . During execution of the game ball shooting operation by the game ball shooting device 430, the game ball is shot to the game area 30 with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the handle operation section.
Further, when the shooting stop button is pressed, the game ball shooting operation by the game ball shooting device 430 is stopped. That is, even when the handle operation portion is rotated by the player's contact, the game ball shooting operation by the game ball shooting device 430 is stopped when the shooting stop button is pressed.
Furthermore, when the handle operation portion is returned to the initial position (when the handle operation portion is not rotated), the game ball shooting operation by the game ball shooting device 430 is stopped. In other words, even when the player is in contact with the handle operating portion, the shooting operation of the game ball by the game ball shooting device 430 is stopped when the handle operating portion is returned to the initial position.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the output of the handle detection signal from the ready-to-fire condition detector 422 to the main control board 200 is maintained while the ready-to-fire condition is satisfied (hereinafter referred to as the "ready-to-fire state"). be done.
In other words, a state in which a rotation operation of the handle operation unit is detected, a contact to the handle operation unit is detected, and a pressing operation of the firing stop button is not detected (fireable state) is occurring. Meanwhile, the output of the handle detection signal from the firing condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained.
At this time, as long as the firing enable state is occurring, regardless of whether or not a firing permission signal is input from the main control board 200 to the firing condition detection circuit 420 (regardless of the game machine state set in the main control board 200). ), the output of the handle detection signal from the firing condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained.
Also, as long as the firing ready state is occurring, regardless of whether or not the CR connection signal is input from the CR unit 700 to the firing condition detection circuit 420 (communication between the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 is possible state, the output of the handle detection signal from the firing condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained.
As described above, it becomes possible for the main control board 200 to detect (grasp) whether or not the ready-to-fire state is occurring, and control the progress of the game, the content of the effects, etc. according to the state of occurrence of the ready-to-fire state. It becomes possible to

That is, the main control board 200 can fire when it detects that the steering wheel detection signal has changed from the state in which it is not input to the state in which it is input (the steering wheel detection signal has changed from low level to high level). A game situation designation command designating the occurrence (start) of the state is transmitted to the effect control board 300. - 特許庁
On the other hand, the main control board 200 can fire when it detects that the steering wheel detection signal has changed from being input to not being input (changed from high level to low level). A game situation designation command designating release (end) of the state is transmitted to the effect control board 300 .
As a result, the effect control board 300 detects the occurrence of the ready-to-fire state by receiving the game situation designation command designating the occurrence of the ready-to-fire state, It becomes possible to detect release of the ready-to-fire state.
Then, the effect control board 300 can change the content of the effect depending on whether or not the state of being ready to be fired is occurring.

(Configuration of production control board 300)
Next, the configuration of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the effect control board.
The effect control board 300 controls effects (display effects, sound effects, lamp effects, movable object effects, etc.) based on control commands received from the main control board 200 .
As shown in FIG. 5 , the effect control board 300 includes a microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 301 and various external devices externally connected to the microcomputer 301 .
In this embodiment, various external devices include a control ROM 302, a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 303, a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) 304, and the like.

The control ROM 302 stores a control program for controlling the operation of the microcomputer 301, various data necessary for executing the control program, and the like. In particular, the control ROM 302 contains effect scenario data corresponding to each effect number, an animation table corresponding to each display effect number, a sound table corresponding to each sound effect number, a lamp control table corresponding to each lamp effect number, each movable A movable body control table corresponding to the body effect number, various compression lamp driving data, and various compression motor driving data are stored (stored).
"Compressed lamp driving data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) the lamp driving data in a predetermined format. "Lamp drive data" is data for driving various lamps 20 and 21 (data specifying luminance values of lamps 20 and 21 belonging to each system).
The "compressed motor drive data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) the motor drive data in a predetermined format. "Motor driving data" is data for driving various motors 23 (data defining the output value of each motor 23).
In this embodiment, a NOR flash memory (NOR ROM) is used as the control ROM 302 . Here, as the control ROM 302, an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory) may be used.
Control ROM 302 is connected to HOST interface 313 of microcomputer 301 .

The CGROM 303 stores (stores) various compressed image data, various compressed audio data, and the like.
"Compressed image data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) image data (material data) in a predetermined format. "Image data (material data)" is data of an image (moving image/still image) that serves as a material for drawing processing.
"Compressed audio data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) audio data in a predetermined format. “Audio data” is audio data output from various speakers 22 .
In this embodiment, a NAND flash memory (NAND ROM) is used as the CGROM 303 . Specifically, the CGROM 303 is configured by an SSD (Solid State Drive) using a NAND flash memory as a storage unit.
CGROM 303 is connected to CG bus interface 314 of microcomputer 301 . The CG bus interface 314 is a SATA (Serial AT Attachment) standard connection interface. As a result, various data stored in the CGROM 303 are read by SATA transfer.

The DRAM 304 is provided with a preload area. Various data (specifically, compressed image data, compressed audio data, etc.) stored in the CGROM 303 are transferred (preloaded) to the preload area.
The DRAM 304 is also provided with a drawing command buffer area, a sound command buffer area, a lamp command buffer area, and a motor command buffer area. In this embodiment, the drawing command buffer area adopts a double buffering method, and the DRAM 304 is provided with two drawing command buffer areas.
The two drawing command buffer areas are configured with the same size. While one of the two drawing command buffer areas is designated as the construction area, the other drawing command buffer area is designated as the transfer area. Designation of the construction area and designation of the transfer area are alternately switched for each drawing command buffer area for each frame.
Then, for each drawing command buffer area, a display list, which will be described later, is stored (generated and constructed) in the drawing command buffer area during the period designated as the construction area, and during the period designated as the transfer area. , the display list stored in the drawing command buffer area is transferred to the VDP (specifically, the preloader circuit 319).
DRAM 304 is connected to DRAM interface 315 of microcomputer 301 .

A microcomputer 301 is an LSI integrated with a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, and the like.
The microcomputer 301 controls production operations by various production means based on control commands received from the main control board 200 .
"Various rendering means" includes various image display devices 31 and 32, various speakers 22, various lamps 20 and 21, and various motors 23 (various movable bodies). Therefore, the "effect operations by various effect means" include display of effect images by various image display devices 31 and 32, output of sound by various speakers 22, driving (lighting) of various lamps 20 and 21, various motors 23 ( (various movable bodies), etc.
The microcomputer 301 includes a CPU 310, a CPU work memory 311, a CPU interface 312, a host interface 313, a CG bus interface 314, a DRAM interface 315, a VRAM 316, a serial communication controller 317, a transfer circuit 318, a preloader circuit 319, a display circuit 320, a graphic It includes internal devices such as a sound decoder circuit 321 , a drawing circuit 322 , a sound controller 323 , etc. These internal devices are connected to a data bus 324 .

The CPU 310 is connected to the HOST interface 313 via the CPU interface 312 . The HOST interface 313 is also connected to the main control board 200 and receives control commands from the main control board 200 . Furthermore, a data bus 324 is connected to the HOST interface 313 .
This allows the CPU 310 to receive control commands (sub-commands) from the main control board 200 via the HOST interface 313 .
Also, the CPU 310 can communicate with internal devices such as the serial communication controller 317, the preloader circuit 319, the display circuit 320, and the sound controller 323 via the HOST interface 313 and data bus 324. .
The CPU 310 can also read various data (control programs, control data, etc.) stored in the control ROM 302 via the HOST interface 313 .
The CPU 310 can also read various data (compressed audio data) stored in the CGROM 303 via the HOST interface 313 , data bus 324 and CG bus interface 314 .
Furthermore, the CPU 310 can execute data reading/writing with respect to the DRAM 304 via the HOST interface 313 , data bus 324 and DRAM interface 315 .

The CPU 310 executes various kinds of arithmetic processing required to control the performance operations by various kinds of performance means, control processing of internal devices according to the various kinds of arithmetic processing, and the like.
At this time, the CPU 310 uses the CPU work memory (RAM) 311 and the DRAM 304 as a work area for various arithmetic processing, a buffer area for various arithmetic processing data, a table data area, a buffer area for various input/output data, and the like. do.
That is, the CPU 310 selects the effect (effect number) to be executed based on the control command received from the main control board 200, and selects and sets the effect scenario data corresponding to the selected effect number. In addition, various command information (messages) are sequentially set according to the selected/set production scenario data. Furthermore, various control data (animation table, sound table, lamp control table, movable body control table, etc.) are selected and set according to the set command information. Internal commands (drawing commands, sound commands, lamp commands, motor commands, etc.).

Specifically, the CPU 310 generates a display list in the drawing command buffer area designated as the construction area according to the animation table.
A "display list" is a collection of drawing commands for one frame. That is, the display list describes drawing commands for one frame in a predetermined order. Then, in VDP, drawing data for one frame is generated by executing processing based on each drawing command in the order described in the display list.
The "drawing command" is information specifying the content of the drawing process (drawing control) to be executed by the VDP. In particular, the drawing command includes the address of the storage area where the compressed image data used for drawing is stored (hereinafter referred to as "image address"), the magnification (enlargement/reduction ratio) at the time of drawing the image data, the The coordinates for drawing image data (coordinates in the frame buffer area), the transmittance (transparency, transparency, transparency) at the time of drawing the image data, and the like are specified.

Also, CPU 310 generates a sound command in the sound command buffer area according to the sound table.
The “sound command” is information specifying the content of the audio output process (audio output control) to be executed by the sound controller 323 .
Further, CPU 310 generates a lamp command in the lamp command buffer area according to the lamp control table.
The "lamp command" is information specifying the contents of the lamp driving process (lamp driving control) to be executed by the lamp controller 317a.
Further, CPU 310 generates a motor command in the motor command buffer area according to the movable body control table.
The "motor command" is information specifying the contents of motor drive processing (motor drive control) to be executed by the motor controller 317b.

Also, the CPU 310 transfers (preloads) the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304 when the power is turned on.
That is, the NAND type flash memory such as the CGROM 303 is easier to increase the capacity than the NOR type flash memory such as the control ROM 302, but the data reading speed is slow. Therefore, if the compressed audio data is read directly from the CGROM 303 (NAND type flash memory) when the sound controller 323 executes the audio output process, the processing performance may drop significantly.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the DRAM 304, which is a memory means having a faster data read speed than the CGROM 303, before the audio output processing is executed. . By adopting a configuration in which compressed audio data is read from the DRAM 304 when audio output processing is executed, deterioration in processing performance is prevented.

Specifically, when the power is turned on, the CPU 310 transfers (preloads) predetermined compressed audio data among the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304 . At this time, in this embodiment, all compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 are transferred to the preload area of the DRAM 304 . Here, part of the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 may be transferred to the preload area of the DRAM 304 .
After the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, the pachinko machine 1 enters a state in which it is possible to control the output of audio from the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound controller 323). In other words, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes impossible to control the output of audio from the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound controller 323).
Further, after the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, the various image display devices 31 and 32 are ready to control the display of effect images (drawing processing by VDP). In other words, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, the various image display devices 31 and 32 cannot control the display of the effect image (drawing processing by VDP). .

On the other hand, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes possible to control the driving (emission) of the various lamps 20 and 21 (lamp driving processing by the lamp controller 317a).
Further, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes possible to control the driving of the various motors 23 (various movable bodies) (motor driving processing by the motor controller 317b).

The transfer circuit 318 transfers various data between internal devices.
Specifically, the transfer circuit 318 transfers the display list stored in the drawing command buffer area designated as the transfer area to the preloader circuit 319 . The transfer circuit 318 also transfers the display list rewritten by the preloader circuit 319 to the drawing circuit 322 .
The transfer circuit 318 also transfers the sound command stored in the sound command buffer area to the sound controller 323 . The transfer circuit 318 also transfers the lamp command stored in the lamp command buffer area to the lamp controller 317a. The transfer circuit 318 also transfers the motor command stored in the motor command buffer area to the motor controller 317b.

The VRAM 316 is provided with an image expansion area. Image data (material data) developed (restored/decoded) by the graphics decoder circuit 321 is temporarily stored in the image development area.
In addition, the VRAM 316 is provided with a frame buffer area. In this embodiment, a double buffering method is adopted for the frame buffer area, and two frame buffer areas are provided in the VRAM 316 .
The two frame buffer areas are configured with the same size. While one of the two frame buffer areas is designated as the drawing area, the other frame buffer area is designated as the output area. Designation of the drawing area and designation of the output area are alternately switched for each frame buffer area for each frame.
For each frame buffer area, drawing data for one frame is stored (generated and drawn) during the period designated as the drawing area, and during the period designated as the output area. , the video signal is output based on the drawing data for one frame stored in the frame buffer area.

In the microcomputer 301, the preloader circuit 319, display circuit 320, graphics decoder circuit 321, drawing circuit 322, etc. function as a VDP (Video Display Processor).
The VDP controls display of effect images by various image display devices 31 and 32 . Specifically, the VDP generates drawing data in response to receiving a display list (drawing command) from the CPU 310, generates a video signal based on the generated drawing data, and converts the generated video signal into various images. Output to display devices 31 and 32 .
The preloader circuit 319 can read various data (compressed image data) stored in the CGROM 303 via the CG bus interface 314 .
In particular, the preloader circuit 319 transfers (preloads) the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304 before the rendering process by the rendering circuit 322 is executed.
That is, as described above, the NAND type flash memory such as the CGROM 303 is easier to increase the capacity than the NOR type flash memory such as the control ROM 302, but the data reading speed is slow. Therefore, if the compressed image data is read directly from the CGROM 303 (NAND flash memory) when the drawing circuit 322 executes the drawing process, the processing performance may be remarkably lowered.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the compressed image data previously stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the DRAM 304, which is a storage means having a faster data read speed than the CGROM 303, before the drawing process is executed. By adopting a configuration in which the compressed image data is read from the DRAM 304 when the drawing process is executed, the deterioration of the processing performance is prevented.

Specifically, each time the preloader circuit 319 receives a display list, the preloader circuit 319 loads one frame of compressed image data specified by the display list out of the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 into the preload area of the DRAM 304 . transfer (preload) to At this time, the preloader circuit 319 rewrites the display list.
That is, in the display list generated by the CPU 310, an address specifying a storage area of the CGROM 303 is described as an image address included in each drawing command. Therefore, the preloader circuit 319 loads the compressed image data stored in the storage area (storage area of the CGROM 303) specified by the image address included in the drawing command for each drawing command included in the display list into a predetermined area of the DRAM 304. , the image address included in the drawing command is rewritten to an address designating the storage area (predetermined area of the DRAM 304) after the transfer. As a result, a new display list with rewritten image addresses is generated.
In this embodiment, the preloader circuit 319 transfers (preloads) the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304 . However, the preloader circuit 319 may transfer the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to a predetermined area (preload area) of the VRAM 316 .
The display list rewritten by the preloader circuit 319 is transferred to the drawing circuit 320 by the transfer circuit 318 .

The drawing circuit 322 stores (generates/renders) drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer area designated as the drawing area according to the display list received from the preloader circuit 319 .
Specifically, every time the drawing circuit 320 receives a display list, it reads out from the DRAM 304 one frame of compressed image data specified in the display list. One frame of compressed image data read from the DRAM 304 is restored (decoded/decoded) by the graphic decoder circuit 321 and stored (expanded) in the image expansion area of the VRAM 316 . The rendering circuit 320 then uses the image data stored in the image rendering area to generate rendering data for one frame in the frame buffer area designated as the rendering area.

The display circuit 320 generates a video signal based on drawing data for one frame stored (generated and drawn) in the frame buffer area designated as the output area, and displays the generated video signal in various image displays. Output to devices 31 and 32 . In this embodiment, digital RGB signals are output as video signals. Here, a configuration in which an LVDS (Low voltage differential signaling) signal is output as the video signal may be employed.
Specifically, the display circuit 320 includes a data acquisition circuit (not shown), a scaler circuit (not shown), a color correction circuit (not shown), a ditherer circuit (not shown), and a synchronization signal generation circuit (not shown). ) etc.
The data acquisition circuit reads the drawing data stored in the frame buffer area designated as the output area.
The scaler circuit can apply scaling processing (enlargement processing/reduction processing) to the drawing data read by the data acquisition circuit.
The color correction circuit can apply color correction processing to the drawing data processed by the scaler circuit.
The ditherer circuit can perform dithering processing on the drawing data processed by the color correction circuit.
The drawing data after processing by the dithering circuit is output as a video signal (digital RGB signal).
The sync signal generation circuit generates a horizontal sync signal and a vertical sync signal (Vsync). Then, the synchronizing signal generation circuit outputs the generated horizontal synchronizing signal and vertical synchronizing signal to various image display devices 31 and 32 . Also, the synchronization signal generation circuit outputs the generated vertical synchronization signal to the CPU 310 .
Here, in the present embodiment, the display of the effect image (the display of the effect image based on drawing data for one frame) on each of the image display devices 31 and 32 is updated every 16.66 [ms]. Therefore, the synchronization signal generation circuit outputs a vertical synchronization signal to the CPU 310 (high level) every 16.66 [ms].

The sound controller 323 controls audio output from the various speakers 22 .
Specifically, the sound controller 323 generates an audio signal in response to receiving a sound command from the CPU 310 and outputs the generated audio signal to the various speakers 22 .
The sound controller 323 includes an audio decoder circuit (not shown). Upon receiving a sound command from CPU 310 , the audio decoder circuit reads compressed audio data specified by the sound command from DRAM 304 . It also restores (decodes/decodes) the read compressed audio data. An audio signal is generated based on the restored audio data, and the generated audio signal is output to various speakers 22 .

The serial communication controller 317 includes a lamp controller 317a and a motor controller 317b.
The lamp controller 317a controls driving (light emission) of the various lamps 20 and 21. FIG.
Specifically, the lamp controller 317a generates lamp driving data in response to receiving a lamp command from the CPU 310, and outputs the generated lamp driving data to the lamp drivers 332 and 342 together with the clock signal. At this time, the lamp drive data is output as serial data.
The ramp controller 317a includes a ramp decoder circuit (not shown). Upon receiving a lamp command from CPU 310 , the lamp decoder circuit reads compressed lamp driving data specified by the lamp command from control ROM 302 . It also restores (decodes/decodes) the read compressed lamp driving data. Then, it generates lamp driving data based on the restored lamp driving data, and outputs the generated lamp driving data to the lamp drivers 332 and 342 .

The motor controller 317b controls driving of various motors 23 (various movable bodies).
Specifically, the motor controller 317b generates motor drive data in response to receiving a motor command from the CPU 310, and outputs the generated motor drive data to the motor drivers 333 and 343 together with the clock signal. At this time, the motor drive data is output as serial data.
The motor controller 317b includes a motor sequencer circuit (not shown). Upon receiving a motor command from the CPU 310 , the motor sequencer circuit reads compression motor drive data specified by the motor command from the control ROM 302 . It also restores (decodes/decodes) the read compressed motor drive data. Then, based on the restored motor drive data, the motor drive data is generated, and the generated motor drive data is output to the motor drivers 333 and 343 .
Further, the motor controller 317b receives information indicating the detection status of the various sensors 24 from the driver board 330, and information indicating the detection status of the switches 25 to 29 from the sub-connection board 340 and information indicating the detection status of the various sensors 24. are input.

(Control method of production by production control board 300)
Next, the control method of the production|presentation by the production|presentation control board 300 is demonstrated.
The CPU 310 selects an effect (effect number) to be executed according to the control command received from the main control board 200 . Then, the effect scenario data corresponding to the selected effect number and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area of the DRAM 304 .
"Production scenario data" is information that defines the progress of production. Specifically, a plurality of pieces of process data are registered in chronological order in the production scenario data. In other words, the production scenario data registers a plurality of process data and information designating the start time (start timing) of the process based on each process data.
Each process data contains one or more command information (messages). In particular, as command information, sub-effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, or movable body effect) command information (hereinafter referred to as "production start command"), sub-effect (display effect, sound Instruction information (hereinafter referred to as "effect end command") for designating the end of the effect, lamp effect, or movable object effect is defined.
The effect start command includes information specifying a sub-effect to be started (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, or movable body effect). Specifically, the production start command includes information specifying the sub production number (display production number, sound production number, lamp production number, or movable body production number) of the sub production to be started.
The effect end command includes information designating a sub-effect to end (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, or movable body effect). Specifically, the effect end command includes information specifying the sub effect number (display effect number, sound effect number, lamp effect number, or movable body effect number) of the sub effect to end.

Then, the CPU 310 controls the progress of the effect based on the effect scenario data set in the effect scenario setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 updates the effect scenario timer set in the effect scenario setting area at a first predetermined cycle (1/30 [s] in this embodiment), and updates the effect scenario timer after the update. Based on the value of , it is determined whether there is any process data whose start time has come among the process data registered in the production scenario data set in the production scenario setting area. Then, when it is determined that there is process data whose start time has come, each command information included in the process data is stored (stored) in a buffer area corresponding to the command information.
At this time, the command information regarding the display effect (the effect start command designating the start of the display effect, the effect end command designating the end of the display effect, etc.) is stored in the display command buffer area.
On the other hand, the command information regarding the sound effect (the effect start command designating the start of the sound effect, the effect end command designating the end of the sound effect, etc.) is stored in the sound command buffer area.
On the other hand, the command information regarding the lamp effect (the effect start command designating the start of the lamp effect, the effect end command designating the end of the lamp effect, etc.) is stored in the lamp command buffer area.
On the other hand, command information related to the movable body effect (effect start command designating the start of the movable body effect, effect end command designating the end of the movable body effect, etc.) is stored in the movable body command buffer area.

(Control method of display effect)
Next, a method of controlling the display effect (display) by the effect control board 300 will be described.
The control ROM 302 stores an animation table corresponding to each display effect (each display effect number). In the animation table corresponding to each display effect, display priority information corresponding to the display effect (images constituting the display effect) and index numbers corresponding to the display effect (images constituting the display effect) are stored. , are associated.
"Display priority information" is information that designates display priority.
"Display priority" is information for designating display (drawing) priority.
Then, when a plurality of display effects (displays) are executed overlapping in time, the display of the display screen 31a (the image displayed on the display screen 31a) is based on the plurality of display effects (images related to the plurality of display effects). effect image) is configured. In this case, among the plurality of display effects (plurality of images) constituting the display (the effect image), the display effect (image) with the higher display priority is displayed with respect to the display effect (image) with the lower display priority. , are displayed with priority. That is, among the plurality of display effects (the plurality of images) forming the effect image, a display effect (image) having a higher display priority is preferentially displayed.
In other words, among the plurality of display effects (plurality of images) that make up the effect image, the display effect (image) with the higher display priority is closer to the player than the display effect (image) with the lower display priority. side). That is, among the plurality of display effects (the plurality of images) forming the effect image, the display effects (images) having higher display priorities are displayed closer to the viewer.
As a result, of the plurality of display effects (plurality of images) that make up the effect image, a display effect (image) with a higher display priority and a display effect (image) with a lower display priority overlap. If there is, a display effect (image) having a higher display priority is preferentially displayed for the overlapping portion.

The "index number" is a number unique to the display effect (the animation table).
In this embodiment, it is possible to set a frame rate for each display effect (animation table). In other words, it is possible to individually set the frame rate for a plurality of display effects (a plurality of images) that constitute the display of the display screen 31a (the effect image displayed on the display screen 31a). This makes it possible to set different frame rates for a plurality of display effects (a plurality of images) that form the display of the display screen 31a (a effect image displayed on the display screen 31a).
At this time, for each display effect (each animation table), either frame rate of "30 [FPS]" or "60 [FPS]" is set according to the index number of the display effect (the animation table). be done.
The control ROM 302 stores a frame rate setting table in which correspondence between index numbers and frame rates (“30 [FPS]” or “60 [FPS]”) is registered. When setting the frame rate corresponding to each display effect (each animation table), the frame rate setting table is referred to, and the frame rate corresponding to the index number assigned to the display effect (animation table) is set. is set.

The CPU 310 (display control unit) determines whether command information is stored in the display command buffer area at a second predetermined cycle (1/60 [s] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that command information is stored in the display command buffer area, each command information stored in the display command buffer area is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
Here, the second predetermined period is a period shorter than the first predetermined period. In particular, in this embodiment, the second predetermined period is half the first predetermined period.
At this time, when the effect start command is stored in the display command buffer area, the animation table corresponding to the display effect number specified by the effect start command is read out of the animation tables stored in the control ROM 302 . Then, in the animation table setting area of the DRAM 304, the read animation table and the frame rate corresponding to the animation table are set (stored/registered).
As a result, the animation table stored in the control ROM 302 is duplicated in the animation table setting area. A plurality of animation tables can be set in the animation table setting area.

The “animation table” is information (various parameters for controlling the display of images) that defines the progress of display effects (display of effect images) by the various image display devices 31 and 32 . In other words, the animation table is information that defines the movement of images.
Specifically, a predetermined number of pieces of frame information are registered in chronological order in the animation table. Then, for a predetermined number of frame information registered in the animation table, the display effect progresses by sequentially executing the display of the image based on each frame information according to the registered order.
Each piece of frame information is various parameters for controlling (executing/configuring) display of an image for one frame. That is, each frame information includes information (image address information) specifying image data (compressed image data) used for drawing, information (display priority information) specifying the display priority of the image data (the display effect), the image Information that specifies the magnification (magnification/reduction) at the time of drawing data (hereinafter referred to as "display magnification information"), information that specifies the coordinates (coordinates in the frame buffer area) for rendering the image data (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as "display coordinate information"), information specifying the transmittance (transparency, transparency, transparency) at the time of drawing the image data (hereinafter referred to as "transmittance information"), etc. .

Then, CPU 310 controls display of effect images corresponding to each frame based on one or more animation tables set in the animation table setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 executes command construction processing, which will be described later, at a second predetermined cycle (1/60 [s] in the present embodiment).
Here, the DRAM 304 is provided with an update timing determination area. The update timing determination area is an area capable of storing 1-bit information. That is, "0" or "1" is set (stored) in the update timing determination area.
Then, in the command building process, first, the value set in the update timing determination area is inverted. That is, when "0" is set in the update timing determination area, "1" is set instead, and when "1" is set in the update timing determination area, it is set instead. to set “0”.

In the command building process, next, an animation table is selected as a target for updating frame information.
Specifically, first, the value set in the update timing determination area is checked.
Then, when the value set in the update timing determination area is "1", an animation table in which the frame rate is set to 30 [FPS] among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area; The animation table in which the frame rate is set to 60 [FPS] is selected as a target for updating the frame information. That is, in this case, all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area are selected as targets for updating the frame information.
On the other hand, if the value set in the update timing determination area is "0", only the animation tables set to the frame rate of 60 [FPS] among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area , to select the frame information to be updated. That is, in this case, among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, the animation table in which the frame rate is set to 30 [FPS] is not selected as a target for updating the frame information.
Then, the frame information is updated for each animation table selected as a target for updating the frame information. That is, instead of the currently selected frame information, the frame information of the next order is selected as the frame information to construct the display list.

As described above, among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, for the animation table in which the frame rate is set to 60 [FPS], in each command construction process (each command construction process is executed ), an update of the frame information is performed. As a result, frame information is updated every 1/60 [s] for the animation table in which the frame rate=60 [FPS] is set. Therefore, the image data (frame) is updated (replaced) every 1/60 [s].
On the other hand, among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, for the animation table in which the frame rate = 30 [FPS] is set, in the command construction processing at intervals (2 [times] command construction processing is performed each time it is executed), an update of the frame information is performed. As a result, frame information is updated every 1/30 [s] for the animation table in which the frame rate=30 [FPS] is set. Therefore, the image data (frame) is updated (replaced) every 1/30 [s].

In the command building process, next, based on all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, a display list is built in the drawing command buffer area specified in the building area.
Specifically, for all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, among the frame information registered in each animation table, the frame information selected as the target for constructing the display list is acquired. A display list is constructed based on all the acquired frame information.
At this time, regarding the animation table whose frame information has been updated in the current command building process, among the frame information registered in the animation table, the frame information updated by the current command building process is added to the display list. will be acquired as a target for constructing. As a result, the frame information (image/frame) updated by the previous command building process is updated to the frame information (image/frame) updated by the current command building process.
On the other hand, for the animation table whose frame information has not been updated in the current command building process, the frame information updated by the previous command building process out of the frame information registered in the animation table is displayed in the display list. will be acquired as a target for constructing. As a result, the frame information (image/frame) updated by the previous command building process is maintained in the current command building process.

As described above, the VDP is controlled according to the display list generated in the drawing command buffer area, and the display of the effect image (display composed of one or more display effects) by the image display devices 31 and 32 is controlled.
That is, when one animation table is set in the animation table setting area, a display list specifying drawing of image data related to the one animation table (one frame information) is constructed.
On the other hand, when a plurality of animation tables are set in the animation table setting area, drawing of image data related to the plurality of animation tables (plurality of frame information) is executed in a predetermined order (order). A display list is constructed that specifies the
At this time, based on the display priority specified by the display priority information set in the animation table setting area, the order of executing drawing of the image data corresponding to the display priority information is set.
Specifically, among the plurality of image data, image data with a lower display priority is rendered before image data with a higher display priority. That is, among the plurality of image data, the image data having the lower display priority is rendered earlier.
As a result, among the plurality of image data, the image data with the lower display priority (image data to be drawn first) and the image data with the higher display priority (image data to be drawn later) overlap. If it exists, the image data with the lower display priority is replaced (overwritten) with the image data with the higher display priority for the overlapping portion. Therefore, image data with a higher display priority is preferentially displayed with respect to image data with a lower display priority.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, on the display screen 31a, a display effect that constitutes a pending display (display of a pending symbol h, etc.), a display effect that constitutes a look-ahead advance notice effect, a display effect that constitutes a special figure fluctuation effect ( display of the first effect pattern z1, etc.), display effect that constitutes the special stop effect (display of the first effect pattern z1, etc.), display effect that constitutes the main notice effect, display of the background image, display of the interface image, etc. Various display effects are executed.
In addition, on the display screen 31a, various types of display such as display of a right hitting notification image, display of a left hitting notification image, display of an error notification image, display of a volume adjustment image, display of a light amount adjustment image, display of a button image, etc. are performed. be done.
In particular, one or a plurality of display effects/displays among the various display effects/displays described above are combined to form the effect image on the display screen 31a.
The "interface image" is an image that decorates the periphery of the effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. Specifically, the interface image is an image that defines (specifies) the position where the first effect symbol z1 is displayed, the position where the reserved symbol h is displayed, and the like. Specifically, the interface image is an image that displays the pedestal of the pending symbol h, a frame (decoration) surrounding the area where the first effect symbol z1 is variably displayed/stopped, and the like.
The “background image” is an image that serves as the background of the first production pattern z1.
The “right hitting notification image” is an image that instructs (notifies) the player to launch the game ball to the right path. The hitting to right notification image is displayed during the hitting to right period.
The "left shot notification image" is an image that instructs (notifies) the player to launch the game ball into the left path. The left-handed notification image is displayed during the left-handed hitting period. In particular, the hitting-to-the-left notification image is displayed for a predetermined period of time when the hitting to the right period ends and the hitting to the left period starts.
The "error notification image" includes various errors (occurrence of vibration error (error caused by detection of vibration in game board 11), occurrence of magnetic error (occurrence of magnetism detected around game board 11). error), radio wave error (error caused by the detection of radio waves around the game board 11), right-handed error (due to the detection of a game ball being launched into the left path during the right-handed period) Error that occurs), Illegal Winning Error (Error that occurs due to the detection of a ball entering the variable ball entrance during a period in which no ball is detected), Dispensing Error (The operation of distributing prize balls error), full tank error (error caused by the prize balls stored in the receiving tray becoming full), ball clogging error (error caused by ball clogging in the game ball dispensing device 440), etc. ) is generated. The error notification image is displayed according to the occurrence of various errors.
The “volume adjustment image” is an image showing the current volume setting and the volume setting (adjustment) method. The volume adjustment image is displayed for a predetermined time when the operation of the volume adjustment button is detected.
The “light amount adjustment image” is an image showing the current light amount setting and the light amount setting (adjustment) method. The light amount adjustment image is displayed for a predetermined period of time when an operation of the light amount adjustment button is detected.
The "button image" is an image that prompts the player to press the effect button 5b. In other words, the button image is an image that notifies that the pressing operation of the effect button 5b is valid. The button image is displayed during a period in which the pressing operation of the effect button 5b is valid.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, a first display type and a second display type are defined as the types of display effect/display. A frame rate of 60 [FPS] is set for each display effect/display belonging to the first display type, and a frame rate of 30 [FPS] is set for each display effect/display belonging to the second display type. .
In the present embodiment, a display effect (hereinafter referred to as a "specific normal reach display") that constitutes a specific "normal reach fluctuation effect" is defined as a display effect/display belonging to the first display type.
On the other hand, as the display effect/display belonging to the second display type, all display effects/displays other than the "specific normal reach display" are defined. That is, as display effects/displays belonging to the second display type, a display effect that constitutes a pending display, a display effect that constitutes a pre-reading notice effect, a display effect that constitutes a special figure fluctuation effect (excluding "specific normal reach display"), Display effects that make up the special stop effect (display of the first effect pattern z1, etc.), display effects that make up the main notice effect, background image display, interface image display, right-hand shot notification image display, left-hand shot notification image display, error notification image display, volume adjustment image display, light amount adjustment image display, button image display, and the like are defined.

As a result, during the execution of the "specific normal reach display", among the displays on the display screen 31a, the "specific normal reach display" (display of the first effect pattern z1, display of effects imparted to the first effect pattern z1, etc.) , the image data (frame) is updated every 1/60 [s], and other displays (display effects that make up the pending display (display of the pending pattern h), display effects that make up the pre-reading preview effect, main Image data (frames) are updated every 1/30 [s] for the display effect, background image display, interface image display, right-handed notification image display, etc. that constitute the advance notice effect.
In other words, during execution of the "specific normal reach display", among the images displayed on the display screen 31a, images constituting the "specific normal reach display" (image data of the first effect symbol z1, Regarding the image data of the effect to be applied, etc.), the image data (frame) is updated every 1/60 [s], and the image constituting the other display (the image constituting the pending display (the image of the pending pattern h ), images that make up the preview effect, images that make up the main notice effect, background images, interface images, right-handed notification images, etc.), the image data (frame) is updated every 1/30 [s]. be.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to individually set the frame rate for a plurality of displays (display effects) executed at the same time on the display screen 31a. In other words, it is possible to individually set the frame rate for a plurality of images displayed at the same time on the display screen 31a.

(Sound effect control method)
Next, a method of controlling sound effects by the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 (sound control unit) determines whether command information is stored in the sound command buffer area at a first predetermined cycle (1/30 [s] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the command information is stored in the sound command buffer area, each command information stored in the sound command buffer area is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
At this time, when the effect start command is stored in the sound command buffer area, the sound table corresponding to the sound effect number specified by the effect start command is read out of the sound tables stored in the control ROM 302 . Then, the read sound table is set (stored) in the sound table setting area of the DRAM 304 .
One or more sound tables can be set in the sound table setting area.
The “sound table” is information that defines the progress of sound effects (audio output) by the various speakers 22 .
Then, CPU 310 controls the progress of the sound effect based on one or more sound tables set in the sound table setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 executes sound interrupt processing, which will be described later, at a first predetermined cycle (1/30 [s] in this embodiment).
In the sound interrupt process, information registered in each sound table is updated for all sound tables set in the sound table setting area, and based on the updated information, a sound command is issued in the sound command buffer area. Generate.
As a result, the sound controller 323 is controlled according to the sound command generated in the sound command buffer area, and sound effects (audio output by various speakers 22) are controlled.

(Lamp effect control method)
Next, the control method of the lamp production by the production control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 (lamp control unit) determines whether command information is stored in the lamp command buffer area at a first predetermined cycle (1/30 [s] in this embodiment). When it is determined that command information is stored in the lamp command buffer area, each command information stored in the lamp command buffer area is analyzed, and processing is executed according to the analysis result.
At this time, when the performance start command is stored in the lamp command buffer area, the lamp control table corresponding to the lamp performance number specified by the performance start command is read out of the lamp control tables stored in the control ROM 302.例文帳に追加Then, the read lamp control table is set (stored) in the lamp control table setting area of the DRAM 304 .
One or more lamp control tables can be set in the lamp control table setting area.
The "lamp control table" is information that defines the progress of the lamp presentation by the various lamps 20 and 21 (driving (light emission) pattern of the various lamps 20 and 21).
Then, the CPU 310 controls the progress of the lamp effect based on one or a plurality of lamp control tables set in the lamp control table setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 executes lamp interrupt processing, which will be described later, at a first predetermined cycle (1/30 [s] in this embodiment).
In the lamp interrupt processing, for all lamp control tables set in the lamp control table setting area, information registered in each lamp control table is updated, and based on the updated information, in the lamp command buffer area, Generate lamp commands.
As a result, the lamp controller 317a is controlled according to the lamp command generated in the lamp command buffer area, and the lamp effects (driving (lighting) of the various lamps 20 and 21) are controlled.

(Control method for movable body production)
Next, a method of controlling the movable object effect by the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 (movable body control unit) determines whether command information is stored in the movable body command buffer area at a first predetermined cycle (1/30 [s] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that command information is stored in the movable body command buffer area, each command information stored in the movable body command buffer area is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
At this time, when the effect start command is stored in the movable body command buffer area, the movable body control table corresponding to the movable body effect number specified by the effect start command is selected from the movable body control table stored in the control ROM 302. read the table. Then, the read movable body control table is set (stored) in the movable body control table setting area of the DRAM 304 .
The "movable body control table" is information that defines the progress of the movable body presentation (driving pattern of the various motors 23 (various movable bodies)) by the various motors 23 (various movable bodies).
Then, the CPU 310 controls the progress of the movable body presentation based on one or a plurality of movable body control tables set in the movable body control table setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 executes movable body interrupt processing, which will be described later, at a first predetermined cycle (1/30 [s] in the present embodiment).
In the movable body interrupt processing, for all movable body control tables set in the movable body control table setting area, information registered in each movable body control table is updated, and based on the updated information, a motor command is issued. Generate motor commands in the buffer area.
As a result, the motor controller 317b is controlled according to the motor command generated in the motor command buffer area, and the movable body effect (drive of various motors 23 (various movable bodies)) is controlled.

(Configuration of Driver Board 330)
The driver board 330 includes a parallel-serial conversion circuit 331 , a lamp driver 332 and a motor driver 333 .
The lamp driver 332 controls the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups of each system constituting the board surface lamp 21 according to the lamp driving data input from the lamp controller 317a.
At this time, in the lamp driving data, luminance values corresponding to each system constituting the board lamp 21 are specified. An excitation signal (driving current) corresponding to the luminance value specified by the lamp driving data is supplied to each system constituting the board lamp 21 . As a result, the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups forming the system is controlled for each system.
The motor driver 333 generates an excitation signal (driving current) for various motors 23 (motors 23 constituting various movable units) provided in the game board unit 10 according to motor drive data input from the motor controller 317b. to control the output of
At this time, the output value of each motor 23 arranged on the game board unit 10 is specified in the motor drive data. An excitation signal (driving current) corresponding to the output value specified by the motor driving data is supplied to each motor 23 . Thus, the driving of each motor 23 is controlled.
Detection signals from various sensors 24 are input to the parallel-serial conversion circuit 331 . The parallel-serial conversion circuit 331 converts the detection signals from the various sensors 24 into serial data and outputs the serial data to the serial communication controller 317 .

(Configuration of Sub Connection Board 340)
The sub-connection board 340 includes a parallel-serial conversion circuit 341 , a lamp driver 342 and a motor driver 343 .
The lamp driver 342 controls driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups of each system constituting the frame lamp 20 according to the lamp driving data input from the lamp controller 317a.
At this time, in the lamp drive data, luminance values corresponding to each system constituting the frame lamp 20 are specified. An excitation signal (driving current) corresponding to the luminance value specified by the lamp driving data is supplied to each system constituting the frame lamp 20 . As a result, the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups forming the system is controlled for each system.
The motor driver 343 generates an excitation signal (drive current) for various motors 23 (motors 23 constituting various movable units) provided in the front frame unit 4 in accordance with motor drive data input from the motor controller 317b. to control the output of
At this time, the output value of each motor 23 arranged in the front frame unit 4 is specified in the motor drive data. An excitation signal (driving current) corresponding to the output value specified by the motor driving data is supplied to each motor 23 . Thus, the driving of each motor 23 is controlled.
Detection signals from various sensors 24 and detection signals from various switches 25 to 29 are input to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 341 . The parallel-serial conversion circuit 341 converts the detection signals from the various sensors 24 and the detection signals from the various switches 25 to 29 into serial data and outputs the serial data to the serial communication controller 317 .

(Regarding gaming machine status)
In the pachinko machine 1, six states (specifically, playable state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, setting error state, RAM error state, and backup error state) are defined as gaming machine states. .
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a gaming machine state flag area. In the gaming machine status flag area, six gaming machine statuses (specifically, playable status, setting change status, setting confirmation status, setting error status, RAM error status, and backup error status) are displayed as gaming machine status flags. ), a value corresponding to any one gaming machine state is stored (set). Then, in the pachinko machine 1, a gaming machine state corresponding to the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is generated.
The "playable state" is a gaming machine state in which a game can be played.
Execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is permitted while the game-enabled state is occurring. As a result, the game (regular game and special game) can be progressed.
Also, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 while the playable state is occurring. In addition, information about the game is displayed on the main display device 60 .

The “setting change state” is a gaming machine state in which the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 can be changed.
The configuration change state occurs when the configuration change condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108 is input, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208 is input, and the detection from the RAM clear switch 207 The setting change condition is established when the signal is input. That is, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the setting change state occurs. be done.
While the setting change state is occurring, execution of the processing of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited. As a result, the game (specifically, normal game and special game) is stopped.
Also, while the setting change state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored in the setting value area. Also, all the lighting elements that constitute the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
Furthermore, by pressing the RAM clear switch 207 while the setting change state is occurring, the setting value stored in the setting value area can be changed. When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is being generated, the game ready state is generated instead of the setting change state. As a result, the set value stored in the set value area is determined.

The “setting confirmation state” is a game machine state in which the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 can be confirmed.
The set-verify state occurs when the set-verify condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108 is input, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208 is input, and the detection from the RAM clear switch 207 The setting confirmation condition is met when no signal is input. That is, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is not pressed, the setting confirmation state occurs. be done.
Execution of the processing of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the setting confirmation state is occurring. As a result, the game (specifically, normal game and special game) is stopped.
Also, while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored in the setting value area. This makes it possible to confirm the set value stored in the set value area. Also, all the lighting elements forming the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
Note that the set values stored in the set value area cannot be changed while the setting confirmation state is occurring.
When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting confirmation state is being generated, the game ready state is generated instead of the setting confirmation state.

The "setting error state" is a gaming machine state in which a setting error has occurred.
The abnormal setting state is generated when it is determined that the set value set in the set value area is not within the specified range while the playable state is being generated.
Execution of the processing of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the setting error state is occurring. As a result, the game (specifically, normal game and special game) is stopped.
Further, while the abnormal setting state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays an error code designating the occurrence of the abnormal setting. Also, all the lighting elements forming the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the setting error state, it is necessary to execute power shutdown and power on to cause a setting change state.

"RAM abnormal state" is a gaming machine state in which a RAM abnormality occurs.
The RAM abnormal state occurs when it is determined that a read/write abnormality has occurred in the RAM 230 when the power is turned on.
Execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the RAM abnormal state is occurring. As a result, the game (specifically, normal game and special game) is stopped.
Further, while the RAM abnormality state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays an error code designating the occurrence of the RAM abnormality. Also, all the lighting elements forming the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the RAM abnormal state, it is necessary to execute power shutdown and power on to cause the setting change state.

The “backup abnormality state” is a gaming machine state in which a backup abnormality has occurred.
The backup abnormality state is generated when it is determined that the RAM 230 has a backup abnormality (specifically, a backup flag abnormality or a checksum abnormality) when the power is turned on.
Execution of the processing of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the backup abnormal state is occurring. As a result, the game (specifically, normal game and special game) is stopped.
Further, while the backup abnormality state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays an error code designating the occurrence of the backup abnormality. Also, all the lighting elements forming the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the backup abnormal state, it is necessary to execute power shutdown and power on to cause a setting change state.

(About setting value)
Next, setting values (setting information) set in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The "set value" is information that designates the probability of winning a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery) (probability of winning a jackpot game state). In this embodiment, values from "0" to "5" are defined as the set values.
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a set value area. Any one of "0" to "5" is stored (set) in the setting value area as the setting value. Then, in the pachinko machine 1, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery is determined according to the value set in the set value area.
In this embodiment, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery corresponding to each setting value is, in order from the highest winning probability, the winning probability corresponding to the setting value = "5", the winning probability corresponding to the setting value = "4". , winning probability corresponding to set value = "3", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "2", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "1", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "0" (winning Probability "high" → Winning probability "low").

Especially, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to change (select) the setting value stored in the setting value area while the setting change state is occurring. Here, the change of the setting value is executed by the administrator of the pachinko machine 1 (such as an employee of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed).
That is, as described above, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is opened, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the setting A modified state is raised.
While the setting change state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored in the setting value area. Further, each time the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the set value stored in the set value area is changed. At this time, when the setting value set in the setting value area is changed, the setting value displayed on the performance display device 206 is also changed accordingly.
When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is being generated, the game ready state is generated instead of the setting change state. As a result, the set value stored in the set value area is determined.

(About base ratio)
In the pachinko machine 1, the base ratio (base value) is calculated by the CPU 210 while the playable state is occurring. In this embodiment, the base ratio is calculated only during the occurrence of a predetermined game state (specifically, during the occurrence of the special figure low probability state and during the stop of the time saving control).
Then, the calculated base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 while the playable state is occurring.
The "base ratio" is the number of game balls launched into the game area 30 and the predetermined ball entrance (in this embodiment, the first start hole 51, the second start hole 52 and other winning holes 54 to 57) It is information calculated based on the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of the game ball. Specifically, the base ratio is the ratio (percentage) of the number of payouts to the number of out balls.
In the present embodiment, the base ratio is calculated for each predetermined section (period). As the predetermined section, a section in which a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 60000 [balls]) of out balls is detected (discharged) is defined. That is, each section starts when the previous section ends, and ends when the number of out-balls detected during the current section reaches a predetermined number (60000 [balls]). Then, the CPU 210 calculates the base ratio at any time (in real time) during each interval.

It should be noted that a predetermined period of time may be defined as the predetermined section. That is, the CPU 210 may be configured to calculate the base ratio for each predetermined time.
"Number of out balls" refers to the number of out balls. “Out ball” refers to a game ball ejected from the game area 30 . Specifically, the out ball is a game ball that has passed through the discharge path (a game ball detected by the out switch 109).
In addition, the game ball discharged from the out port 58 may be used as an out ball. Specifically, the out switch 109 may be configured to detect only the game ball discharged from the out port 58, and the game ball detected by the out switch 109 may be the out ball.
The "number of payouts" refers to the total number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of game balls into the first start hole 51, the second start hole 52 and the other winning holes 54-57.

(Regarding various lotteries)
Next, various lotteries executed by the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, a normal symbol lottery is executed when a game ball passes through a starting gate 41.例文帳に追加Then, when the normal symbol lottery is won, a normal per game state is generated. In the normal per game state, the normal electric accessory 52a is displaced (opened) from the closed state to the open state, and the entry of the game ball to the second start port 52 becomes possible.
In this embodiment, one type of "per normal pattern" is set as the type of per normal per game state generated when the normal symbol lottery is won.

In the case of winning the ``permanent pattern'' (winning the normal pattern lottery), the general pattern display device is controlled to stop and display the normal pattern as the ``permanent pattern''.
On the other hand, when the normal pattern lottery is lost, the normal pattern display device is controlled so as to stop and display the normal pattern as a "missing pattern".
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute time-saving control as auxiliary control that is advantageous to the player.
During the execution of the time saving control, the time for performing the variable display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "variation time") is shortened compared to the time when the time saving control is stopped. In this embodiment, during execution of the time saving control, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is improved and the time for performing the variable display of the normal symbols is shortened as compared with the stop of the time saving control. In addition, during the execution of the time saving control, compared to when the time saving control is stopped, in the game state per normal figure, the number of openings of the normal electric auditors 52a is increased, and the opening time of the normal electric auditors 52a be extended.

In the case of winning the "normal figure hit", the number of opening times of the normal electric accessory 52a is set to 1 [times] or 3 [times], and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 52a at each time is 0.5. [s] or 2.0 [s]. At this time, during execution of the time saving control, the number of times the normal electric accessory 52a is opened is set to 3 [times], and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 52a at each time is set to 2.0 [s]. set. On the other hand, while the time saving control is stopped, the number of opening times of the normal electric accessory 52a is set to 1 [times], and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 52a at each time is set to 0.5 [s]. be done.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, the first special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the first starting port 51, and the second special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 52. A special design lottery is executed. Then, when winning the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, a big win game state is generated. In the jackpot game state, a round game is executed in which the special electric accessory 53a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and a game ball can be entered into the big winning opening 53.
In this embodiment, "jackpot 1" and "jackpot 2" are set as types of the jackpot gaming state generated when the first special symbol lottery is won, and are generated when the second special symbol lottery is won. "Big win 3" to "Big win 6" are set as the types of the big win gaming state.

When "big win 1" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to "big win 1 symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "probability variation symbol" is stop-displayed.
Here, the "variable probability pattern" is, for example, the first production pattern z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first production design display areas a1 to a3 is the same as "7, 7, 7". The second production pattern z2 stop-displayed in the second production pattern display area a4 is displayed in a predetermined color while being aligned with "number patterns" showing odd numbers.
When the "jackpot 2" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "jackpot 2 pattern" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device. In addition, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "normal symbol" is stop-displayed.
Here, the "normal symbol" means, for example, that the first effect symbols z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 are the same, such as "2, 2, 2". The second production pattern z2 stop-displayed in the second production pattern display area a4 is displayed in a predetermined color while the "number patterns" showing even numbers are aligned.
When the "big win 3" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "big win 3 pattern" is stop-displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "probability variation symbol" is stop-displayed.

When the "big hit 4" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit 4 pattern" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "probability variation symbol" is stop-displayed.
When the "big hit 5" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit 5 pattern" is stop-displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "hidden symbol" is stop-displayed.
Here, the "hidden symbol" is, for example, the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, and a predetermined number such as "1, 2, 3". A combination having regularity is obtained, and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 has a display mode in which a predetermined color is indicated.
When the "jackpot 6" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "jackpot 6 pattern" is stop-displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "hidden symbol" is stop-displayed.

On the other hand, when the special symbol lottery is lost (in the case of "lost"), the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed in the special figure 1 display device or the special figure 2 display device. . Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "lost symbol" is stop-displayed.
Here, the "missing symbol" means, for example, the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is stopped and displayed in at least one area such as "1, 6, 9". The number indicated by the displayed "number pattern" has a different combination from the number indicated by the "number pattern" stopped and displayed in the other area, and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. indicates a predetermined color.

When "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 6" are won, a predetermined number of round games are executed in the jackpot game state.
In this embodiment, when "jackpot 1", "jackpot 2", "jackpot 5" or "jackpot 6" is won, the number of round games is set to 5 [times]. On the other hand, when the "jackpot 3" is won, the number of round games is set to 15 [times]. On the other hand, when the "jackpot 4" is won, the number of round games is set to 10 [times].
When "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 6" are won, the maximum opening time of the special electric accessory 53a in each round game is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment). be. Then, in each round game, the set maximum opening time has elapsed since the special electric accessory 53a was opened, and the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 53 in the round game The game ends when one of the conditions of reaching a predetermined upper limit number (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is met.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, the game states related to the winning probability of the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery) are "special symbol low probability state", "special symbol high probability state", is stipulated.
During the occurrence of the "special symbol low probability state", the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is the first probability (hereinafter referred to as "low probability").
During the occurrence of the "special symbol high probability state", the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is set to a second probability (hereinafter referred to as "high probability") higher than the first probability.
The main control board 200 sets the winning probability of each lottery so that the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery and the winning probability of the second special symbol lottery are synchronized. Here, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery means the probability of winning the "win"("big win 1" to "big win 6") that causes the big win gaming state.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is the probability corresponding to the combination of the set value set in the set value area and the game state (special symbol low probability state or special symbol high probability state). becomes.

Specifically, when the set value is "0" and the "special symbol low probability state" is occurring, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (big hit probability) is 1/319.69. On the other hand, when the set value is "0" and the "special symbol high probability state" is occurring, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (big hit probability) is 1/32.13.
On the other hand, when the set value is "1" and the "special symbol low probability state" is occurring, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (big hit probability) is 1/312.08. On the other hand, when the set value is "1" and the "special symbol high probability state" is occurring, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (big hit probability) is 1/31.36.
On the other hand, when the set value is "2" and the "special symbol low probability state" is occurring, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (big hit probability) is 1/304.82. On the other hand, when the set value is "2" and the "special symbol high probability state" is occurring, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (big hit probability) is 1/30.62.

On the other hand, when the set value is "3" and the "special symbol low probability state" is occurring, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (big hit probability) is 1/297.89. On the other hand, when the set value is "3" and the "special symbol high probability state" is occurring, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (big hit probability) is 1/29.93.
On the other hand, when the set value is "4" and the "special symbol low probability state" is occurring, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (big hit probability) is 1/291.27. On the other hand, when the set value is "4" and the "special symbol high probability state" is occurring, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (big hit probability) is 1/29.26.
On the other hand, when the set value is "5" and the "special symbol low probability state" is occurring, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (big hit probability) is 1/284.94. On the other hand, when the set value is "5" and the "special symbol high probability state" is occurring, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (big hit probability) is 1/28.62.

When a ``jackpot 2'' or ``jackpot 6'' is won, a ``special low-probability state'' is generated in a period from the end of the jackpot game state to the occurrence of the next jackpot game state.
On the other hand, when "jackpot 1" or "jackpot 3" to "jackpot 5" are won, a "special figure high probability state" is generated according to the end of the jackpot game state. In this embodiment, the "special figure high probability state" is started in response to the end of the big win game state, and ends in response to the start of the next big win game state (end of the stop display of the "big win design").
In addition, the "special figure high probability state" is started according to the end of the jackpot game state, and the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the occurrence of the "special figure high probability state" is a predetermined number (for example, 10000 [ Times]) may be terminated according to reaching ("special figure low probability state" is generated) configuration.

Further, when "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 6" are won, time saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends.
Time saving control is started in response to the end of the jackpot game state, winning the special pattern lottery ("big hit pattern" is stopped and displayed), and notification display of the special pattern of a predetermined number of times of time saving (variation display and stop display) are executed.
When "jackpot 2" or "jackpot 6" is won, 100 [times] is set as the predetermined number of times of time saving.
on the other hand. When "jackpot 1" or "jackpot 3" to "jackpot 5" are won, 10000 [times] is set as the predetermined number of times of time saving.

(Regarding control commands)
Next, control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 and control commands transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 will be described.
The main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, the communication between the main control board 200 and the effect control board 300 is performed only in one direction from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300, and the communication from the effect control board 300 to the main control board 200 is Not done.
Each control command transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 consists of 1-byte upper data indicating the type of control command and 1-byte lower data indicating the content of the control command. there is
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command composed of upper data and lower data to the effect control board 300 by serial communication. When the effect control board 300 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 include a symbol type designation command, a variation mode designation command, a variation pattern designation command, a stop designation command, a game state designation command, a number of pending Designation command, opening designation command, round start designation command, round end designation command, ending designation command, first prefetch designation command, second prefetch designation command, third prefetch designation command, error designation command, demo designation command, setting value designation Commands, game status designation commands, etc. are set.
The symbol type designation command is a command for designating the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number). Specifically, the symbol type designation command designates one type of "losing symbol" and "big hit 1 symbol" to "big hit 6 symbols". The symbol type designation command is transmitted at the start of the variable display of special symbols. In this embodiment, the symbol type specifying command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.

The variation mode specification command is a command that specifies the type of variation mode (variation mode number). The variation mode specification command specifies the variation time associated with the variation mode number by specifying the variation mode number. The variation mode designation command designates the variation time of the first half period (form of the first half of the variation performance) of the variation display (variation performance) of the special symbol.
In the present embodiment, m (plurality) types are set as the types of variation modes, each of which is associated with a different variation time. Then, the variation mode designation command designates one of m types of variation mode types (variation mode numbers) (“variation mode m”).

The variation pattern specification command is a command that specifies the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number). The variation pattern specification command specifies the variation time associated with the variation pattern number by specifying the variation pattern number. The variation pattern specification command specifies the variation time of the second half period (mode of the second half period of the variation presentation) of the variation display (variation presentation) of the special symbol.
In this embodiment, n (plurality) kinds of fluctuation pattern types are set, each of which is associated with a different fluctuation time. Then, the variation pattern specification command specifies one (“variation pattern n”) of the n types of variation pattern types (variation pattern numbers).
The variation mode designation command and the variation pattern designation command are transmitted at the start of the variable display of the special symbols.

The stop designation command is a command for designating the stop display of special symbols (effect symbols z1, z2). The stop designation command is transmitted at the start of stop display of special symbols.
The game state designation command is a command for designating a game state (game state offset value).
Here, the "game state offset value" is information specifying the game state. In this embodiment, as the gaming state offset value, the value of the time saving control flag, the value of the special figure high probability state flag, the value of the last big hit design flag, and the value of the rotation number counter after the big hit, each combination A corresponding number is set.
The game state designation command designates one game state offset value. The game state designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when changing the special game phase, which will be described later, or the like.

The pending number designation command is a command for designating the pending number. In this embodiment, the pending number designation command designates that the pending number (Special Figure 1 pending number or Special Figure 2 pending number) has increased by "1", the pending number has decreased by "1", the pending number, etc. .
Here, the "special figure 1 pending number" refers to the number of notice display (fluctuation display and stop display) of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display device is reserved. In addition, the "special figure 2 pending number" refers to the number of notice display (fluctuation display and stop display) of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 display device is reserved.
The pending number designation command is transmitted when power is turned on, when game information is stored, when variable display of special symbols is started, and the like. In this embodiment, as the reserved number designation command, those corresponding to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are set.

The opening designation command is a command that designates the start of the opening period (the start of the jackpot game state). The opening designation command designates the type of jackpot gaming state (type of "jackpot pattern"). Concretely, the opening designation command designates one type of "jackpot 1 symbol" to "jackpot 6 symbols". The opening designation command is transmitted at the start of the opening period (at the start of the jackpot game state).
The round start designation command is a command for designating the start of a round game. The round start designation command is transmitted at the start of the round game.
The round end designation command is a command for designating the end of the round game. The round end designation command is transmitted at the end of the round game.
The ending designation command is a command that designates the start of the ending period. The ending specifying command is sent at the beginning of the ending period.

The first look-ahead designation command is a command for designating the type of stop symbol (one type out of "lost symbol" and "big hit 1 symbol" to "big hit 6 symbols"). In this embodiment, the first prefetch designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.
The second look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the contents of the variation mode. Specifically, the second look-ahead specifying command is that the type of the variation mode is undefined ("undefined value"), or one of m types of variation modes (variation mode number) ("variation mode m" ). The second prefetch designation command is transmitted when game information is stored.
The third look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the contents of the variation pattern. Specifically, the third prefetch designation command is that the type of variation pattern is undefined ("undefined value"), or one of n types of variation patterns (variation pattern number) ("variation pattern n" ). The third prefetch designation command is transmitted when game information is stored.

The error designation command is a command that designates the occurrence of various errors. In this embodiment, the error designation command designates occurrence of vibration error, magnetic error, radio wave error, or right-handed hitting error. The error designation command is sent when the occurrence of various errors is detected.
The demonstration designation command is a command that designates the start of the customer waiting state. The demonstration designation command is sent at the start of the customer waiting state.
The setting value designation command is a command for designating the setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 . The setting value designation command is transmitted when the RAM is cleared, when the power is restored after the power is turned on, when the setting change state ends, or when the setting confirmation state ends.
The game status designation command is a command for designating generation (start) or cancellation (end) of the state of being ready for shooting. The game status designation command is transmitted when the game ready state occurs (at the start) and when the play ready state is canceled (at the end).

The main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 is bidirectional. Each control command transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 consists of 1-byte data.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command to the payout control board 400 by serial communication. In the payout control board 400, when a control command is received from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing. Also, the payout control board 400 transmits a control command to the main control board 200 by serial communication. In the main control board 200, when a control command is received from the payout control board 400, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, as a control command transmitted from the main control board 200 to the payout control board 400, a command for designating the number of winning balls and the like are set.
The prize number designation command is a command for designating the number of prize balls to be paid out. In this embodiment, the number-of-prizing-balls designation command designates the payout of n (n=1 to 15) prize balls. The prize ball number designation command is transmitted when the payout control board 400 executes the prize ball payout operation.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200 include the occurrence/cancellation of an error during payout, the occurrence/cancellation of a full tank error, the occurrence/cancellation of a jammed ball error, and the like. A control command specifying each is set. Each control command is sent upon detection of occurrence/release of various errors.

(Processing executed by main control board 200)
Next, processing executed by the main control board 200 will be described.
First, the functions of the hardware configured on the main control board 200 will be described.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the random number generation circuit 203 starts the hardware random number update process.
In the hard random number update process, each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202 (every 0.083 [μs] in this embodiment), the values of the first to third loop counters are changed within a predetermined range. (within the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment) is updated by "1".

Further, in the hardware random number update process, every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (every 2.666 [μs] in this embodiment), the value of the fourth loop counter falls within a predetermined range (this In the embodiment, it is updated by "1" in the range of 0 to 10006).
Then, the winning random number of the normal symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the second special symbol lottery, and the ready-to-win group random number are respectively updated by the hardware random number updating process. The hardware random number update process is executed as a function of the random number generation circuit 203 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the transmission shift registers of the command output ports 1 and 2 transmit the control commands stored in the FIFO buffers to the performance control board 300 or the payout control board 400. Start control command transmission processing. The control command transmission process is executed as a function of the command output ports 1 and 2 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

Next, game control processing executed by the CPU 210 of the main control board 200 based on the program (software) stored in the ROM 220 will be described.

(CPU initialization processing)
First, CPU initialization processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing CPU initialization processing.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the CPU 210 starts the CPU initialization process shown in FIG. The CPU initialization process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the CPU initialization processing is processing based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 .
When the CPU initialization process is started, first, the process moves to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, an initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, a startup program is read from the ROM 220, and settings necessary for executing various processes such as register settings are performed.

In the initial setting process, the RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208, and the detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108 are read.
Specifically, the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the RAM clear switch 207 is read two times, and the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on based on the reading result of the two times. is occurring. Then, the determination result is stored as switch information for the RAM clear switch 207 . At this time, if it is determined that the ON state has occurred, a value (“1” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has occurred is stored as the switch information, and the ON state has occurred. If it is determined that the switch has not occurred, a value (“0” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has not occurred is stored as the switch information.

Also, the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the setting key switch 208 is read two [times], and based on the reading result of the two [times], the ON state is generated for the setting key switch 208. Determine whether or not Then, the determination result is saved as switch information of the setting key switch 208 . At this time, if it is determined that the ON state has occurred, a value (“1” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has occurred is stored as the switch information, and the ON state has occurred. If it is determined that the switch has not occurred, a value (“0” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has not occurred is saved as the switch information.

Furthermore, the value set in the receiving storage area corresponding to the inner frame open sensor 108 is read 2 [times], and based on the result of reading 2 [times], the inner frame open sensor 108 is turned on. is occurring. When it is determined that the ON state has not occurred, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value (“0” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has not occurred. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state has occurred, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is not rewritten.

In step S1-2, wait processing time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-3. In the wait processing time setting process, a predetermined wait processing time (3.1 [s] in this embodiment) is set in the timer counter. As a result, measurement of the set wait processing time by the timer counter is started.
In step S1-3, it is determined whether or not the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has passed. If it is determined that the wait processing time has passed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-4, If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the processing of step S1-3 is repeated.

In step S1-4, RAM access permission processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-5. In the RAM access permission process, necessary processes are executed to permit access to the work area of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to access permission is stored as a RAM protection value in the RAM access protection area of the RAM 230 . As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is permitted.

At step S1-5, a gaming machine state flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the gaming machine status flag is acquired.
Specifically, in the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is saved (loaded) in the D register.
At step S1-6, it is determined whether or not the backup valid flag is normal. If it is determined that it is not (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, when the value (backup valid flag) stored in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230 is a predetermined valid value, it is determined that the backup valid flag is normal, and the value stored in the backup valid flag area is determined to be normal. is not a predetermined valid value, it is determined that the backup valid flag is not normal.

In step S1-7, checksum calculation processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-8. In the checksum calculation process, a checksum is calculated based on the backup information.
Specifically, in the checksum calculation process, first, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the use area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.
Next, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the non-use area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.
In step S1-8, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S1-7 is normal, and if it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-9, If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, "the checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230" and "step S1 The checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in -7 must match the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area." Judge that the checksum is normal.
On the other hand, "the checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230" and "step S1- The checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in step 7 matches the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area." If not, it is determined that the checksum is not normal.

In step S1-9, a clear target area setting process at power-on is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-10. In the power-on clear target area setting process, as a range to clear (initialize) the use area M1 of the RAM 230, areas other than the setting value area and the gaming machine state flag area (specifically, the checksum area, Backup valid flag area, error related area, normal game related area 1, normal game related area 2, and stack area) are set.
At step S1-10, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on. If it is determined that the ON state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-21.
Here, based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 saved in step S1-1, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on. At this time, if a value indicating that an ON state has occurred is stored as switch information, it is determined that an ON state has occurred, and a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is stored. If so, it is determined that the ON state has not occurred.

In step S1-11, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-12, and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
Here, based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register, it is determined whether or not the game ready state has occurred. At this time, if the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state has occurred. It is determined that no possible state has occurred.

In step S1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-13, and the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
The "setting confirmation condition" is that a game ready state has occurred, the RAM clear switch 207 has not been turned on, the setting key switch 208 has been turned on, and This is established when the frame open sensor 108 is in the ON state.
Here, in step S1-1, if the inner frame open sensor 108 is not turned on, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that it is not turned on. As a result, when both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 are in the on state, a value indicating that the setting key switch 208 is in the on state is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. . On the other hand, if at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 is not turned on, a value indicating that the setting key switch 208 is not turned on is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. be done.
Therefore, in step 1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. At this time, if a value indicating that an ON state has occurred is stored as switch information, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, and a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is stored. If so, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied.

In step S1-13, a setting confirmation state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the setting confirmation state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting value confirmation state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-14, a process for setting an area to be cleared when power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-15. In the clear target area setting process at the time of power return, as the range to clear (initialize) the use area M1 of the RAM 230, the set value area, the gaming machine state flag area, the normal game related area 2, and other areas excluding the stack area Areas (specifically, checksum area, backup valid flag area, error-related area, and normal game-related area 1) are set.

In step S1-15, an initialization process at the time of power return is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-16. In the power recovery initialization process, the range set in step S1-14 is cleared (initialized) in the use area M1 of the RAM 230. FIG.
In step S1-16, a subcommand transmission process at power return is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-17. In the power recovery subcommand transmission process, a subcommand (power recovery designation command) designating recovery from power shutdown is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
In step S1-17, a payout command transmission process at power return is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the payout command transmission process at the time of power recovery, a payout command designating recovery from power shutdown is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S1-18, a backup abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-19. In the backup abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the backup abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-19, a non-use area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-20. In the non-use area read/write check process, the non-use area M2 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and a read/write check is performed.
In step S1-20, a process for setting an area to be cleared in the event of an abnormality is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-21. In the abnormality clear target area setting process, all areas (specifically, the setting value area, the gaming machine status flag area, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, error-related area, normal game-related area 1, normal game-related area 2, and stack area).
In step S1-21, a used area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-22. In the used area read/write check process, the range set in step S1-20 in the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and read/write check is performed.

In step S1-22, it is determined whether or not the result of the read/write check performed in steps S1-19 and S1-21 is normal. If it is determined that the result of the read/write check is not normal (No), , the process proceeds to step S1-23, and when it is determined that the result of the read/write check is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-24.
In step S1-23, RAM abnormality setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the RAM abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the RAM abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-24, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-25, and the setting is performed. If it is determined that the confirmation state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-26.
Here, based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred. At this time, if the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred. Determine that no confirmation condition has occurred.
At step S1-25, a playable state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-26. In the playable state setting process, a value corresponding to the playable state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.

In step S1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied.If it is determined that the setting change condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-27, and the setting change condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the condition is not established (No), the process proceeds to step S1-28.
The "setting change condition" is that the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on, the setting key switch 208 is turned on, and the inner frame open sensor 108 is turned on. holds when
Here, as described above, when both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 are in the ON state, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 indicates that the ON state has occurred. Value is saved. On the other hand, if at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 is not turned on, a value indicating that the setting key switch 208 is not turned on is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. be done.
Therefore, in step 1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. .
At this time, if both the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 store a value indicating that the ON state has occurred, the setting change condition is satisfied. I judge. On the other hand, if at least one of the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 stores a value indicating that the ON state has not occurred, the setting change condition is satisfied. determine that it is not.

In step S1-27, a setting change state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the setting change state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting change state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
At step S1-28, a gaming machine state flag saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-29. In the gaming machine status flag saving process, the gaming machine status flag set in the D register is saved in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 .
At step S1-29, a RAM clear subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-30. In the RAM clearing subcommand transmission process, a subcommand (RAM clearing designation command) designating that RAM clearing has been executed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
At step S1-30, the RAM clear initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-31. In the RAM clear initialization process, the range set in step S1-9 or step S1-20 in the use area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized).
In step S1-31, a payout command transmission process when RAM is cleared is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the payout command transmission process at the time of RAM clearing, a payout command specifying that the RAM clearing has been executed is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S1-32, a subcommand setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-33. In the subcommand setting process, a power-on gaming machine state designation command designating the current gaming machine state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, in the sub-command setting process, a sub-command output request of the RAM 230 outputs a power-on gaming machine state specifying command that specifies the gaming machine state flag (gaming machine state) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 . Store in buffer.
In step S1-33, a subcommand group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-34. In the subcommand group setting process, the subcommand group is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230 .
Here, the sub-command group includes a sub-command specifying the power recovery phase, a sub-command specifying the game state (game state offset value), a sub-command specifying the firing position, and a stop symbol of the first special symbol. Subcommand to specify the stop symbol of the second special symbol, subcommand to specify the special figure 1 reserved number, subcommand to specify the special figure 2 reserved number, subcommand to specify the value of the time saving counter, RAM230 includes a setting value designation command for designating the setting value stored in the setting value area of .

At step S1-34, an initial display time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-35. In the initial display time setting process, the initial display time of the performance display device 206 is set in the initial display timer.
At step S1-35, an interrupt setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to the main loop process (step S2-1). In the interrupt setting process, initial setting of a CTC (counter/timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is performed.
Specifically, in the interrupt setting process, an interrupt vector register is set, and an interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment) is set in the CTC.

(main loop processing)
Next, main loop processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing main loop processing.
After completing the CPU initialization process (step S1-35) shown in FIG. 7, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in FIG. The main loop processing is processing based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop processing is processing based on the program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 .
When the main loop process is started, first, the process moves to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-2. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt prohibition state is set to prohibit interrupts of other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S2-2, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
Here, "initial value random number" is a random number for determining the initial value and end value of soft random numbers (hit pattern random numbers, reach mode random numbers, variation pattern random numbers, etc.) that are random numbers generated on the program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates soft random numbers is updated within a preset range from the initial value to the end value. The initial value and end value of the loop counter that generates soft random numbers are changed each time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

At step S2-3, main command analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, the main command received from the payout control board 400 (the control command transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200) is analyzed, and the process according to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, subcommand transmission processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of the output port 205 (command output port 1).
As a result, the subcommand input to the transmission data register is stored (stored) in the FIFO buffer. Then, the subcommands stored in the FIFO buffer are transmitted to the effect control board 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
At step S2-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-6. In the interrupt permission processing, the interrupt disabled state is canceled. As a result, during the period from the execution of the interrupt permission process of step S2-5 to the execution of the interrupt prohibition process of step S2-1, the execution of the saving process at power shutdown, the timer interrupt process, etc. is permitted. This is the interrupt enabled period.
In step S2-6, another random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-1. In the other random number update process, the software random numbers excluding the hit pattern random numbers (specifically, reach mode random numbers, variation pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

(Save processing when power is cut off)
Next, the power-off save process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing the saving process at power-off.
The main control board 200 includes a power interruption detection circuit (not shown). The power cutoff detection circuit monitors the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 600 and outputs a power cutoff warning signal to the input port 204 when the value of the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value.
When the CPU 210 receives the power-off notice signal, the CPU 210 starts the power-off saving process shown in FIG. 9 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop process. The power-off save process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the saving process at power-off is a process based on the program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 .

When the power-off saving process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-2. In the register saving process, the values of the registers used during execution of the main loop process are saved in the saving area of the RAM 230 .
In step S3-2, power-off notice signal read processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-3. In the power cut-off notice signal reading process, the power cut-off notice signal is read from the power cut-off detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power-off notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power-off notice signal of the input port 204 is read.
In step S3-3, based on the value read in step S3-2 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cut-off notice signal), whether the power cut-off notice signal is input from the power cut-off detection circuit. If it is determined that the power cut-off notice signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-4, and if it is determined that the power cut-off notice signal has not been input (No), goes to step S3-13.

In step S3-4, output port stop processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-5. In the output port stop processing, output of control signals and control commands by the output ports 205 (output port 0 to output port 4) is stopped.
Specifically, in the output port stop processing, the values of all bits included in the port registers of the output ports 205 (output port 0 to output port 4) are initialized. This stops the output of control signals and control commands from the output ports 205 (output port 0 to output port 4).
In step S3-5, a backup valid flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-6. In the backup valid flag setting process, a predetermined valid value is stored (saved) in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230 .

In step S3-6, checksum storage processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-7. In the checksum storage process, a checksum is calculated and stored.
Specifically, in the checksum storage process, first, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the use area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 . Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230 .
Next, based on the information stored in the non-use area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of RAM 230, a checksum is calculated. Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum area.
In step S3-7, RAM access prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-8. In the RAM access prohibition processing, processing for prohibiting access to the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to access prohibition is stored as a RAM protection value in the RAM access protection area of the RAM 230 . As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is prohibited.

At step S3-8, a loop counter setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-9. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of power-off notice signal reading times is set as the value of the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-9, power-off notice signal reading processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-10. In the power cut-off notice signal reading process, the power cut-off notice signal is read from the power cut-off detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power-off notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power-off notice signal of the input port 204 is read.
In step S3-10, based on the value read in step S3-9 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cut-off notice signal), whether the power cut-off notice signal is input from the power cut-off detection circuit. If it is determined that the power cut-off notice signal has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-11, and if it is determined that the power cut-off notice signal has been input (Yes). goes to step S3-8.

In step S3-11, loop counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-12. In the loop counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-12, it is determined whether or not the value of the return determination loop counter is "0". If it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is "0" (Yes), the CPU When it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S3-9.
In step S3-13, a register return process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the original process is returned to. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S3-1 is restored. After completion of the register return processing, the program returns to the main loop processing (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(timer interrupt processing)
Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.
The clock generation circuit 202 generates an interrupt request signal every predetermined interrupt cycle (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment).
In response to the generation of the interrupt request signal, the CPU 210 starts timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 10 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop processing. The main loop processing is processing based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop processing is processing based on the program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 .

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the process moves to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the main loop process are saved in the save area of the RAM 230 .
In step S4-2, interrupt permission processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-3. In the interrupt permission processing, interrupts are permitted.
In step S4-3, dynamic port output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-4. Dynamic port output processing will be described later.

In step S4-4, port input processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-5. In port input processing, the state of each switch sensor (each signal) is obtained.
The RAM 230 includes an input information storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor (each signal input to the input port 204) connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3), and an input information storage area corresponding to the input port 204 (input and an ON state storage area corresponding to each switch sensor (each signal input to input port 204) connected to port 0 to input port 3).
In the port input process, first, for each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3), information set in the reception storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor is obtained, The acquired information is saved (stored) in the input information storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor.
As a result, for each switch sensor, when the detection signal from the switch sensor is input (high level), "1" is stored in the input information storage area corresponding to the switch sensor. When the detection signal from the switch sensor is not input (low level), "0" is stored in the input storage area corresponding to the switch sensor.

Next, it is determined whether or not each switch sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3) is turned on. At this time, for each switch sensor, the ON state is determined based on the value saved in the input information storage area in the previous port input process and the value saved in the input information storage area in the current port input process. Determine whether or not it has occurred.
The “on state” refers to a state in which a state (low level) in which no detection signal is input has changed to a state (high level) in which a detection signal is input.
When it is determined that each switch/sensor is in the ON state, "1" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state has not occurred for each switch/sensor, "0" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor.
In the following description, the value stored in the ON state storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor is referred to as the "switch bit data" of the switch/sensor.
In particular, the input port 1 is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal input from the firing enable condition detection section 422 . In the port input process, the information set in the reception storage area corresponding to the steering wheel detection signal of input port 1 is acquired, and the acquired information is stored in the input information storage area corresponding to the steering wheel detection signal. ) is done.

At step S4-5, a gaming machine state flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
In step S4-6, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-7, and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-9.
Here, based on the gaming machine state flag acquired in step S4-5, it is determined whether or not the game ready state has occurred. At this time, when the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state is generated, and when the acquired gaming machine state flag is not a value corresponding to the playable state, the gameable state is generated. determine that it is not.

In step S4-7, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that an abnormal state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-8, and the abnormal state is If it is determined that it has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-19.
Here, based on the gaming machine state flag obtained in step S4-5, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred. At this time, if the obtained gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to any one of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred. If the obtained gaming machine state flag does not correspond to any one of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that the abnormal state has not occurred.

In step S4-8, setting-related processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. The setting-related processing will be described later.
In step S4-9, timer update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-10. In the timer update process, various timers are updated.
Specifically, in the timer update process, the value of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, security timer, etc.) is updated.
In step S4-10, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-11. The initial value random number update process in step S4-10 is the same process as the initial value random number update process in step S2-2.
Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-11, a hit symbol random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-12. In the winning symbol random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the winning symbol random number among the soft random numbers is updated.
In step S4-12, switch management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-13. In the switch management processing, processing (acquisition of various random numbers, etc.) is executed according to the state of each switch 101, 102, 104 (whether or not an ON state is detected). The switch management processing will be described later.

At step S4-13, a special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-14. In the special game management process, the operation of the special figure display device and the operation of the special electric accessory 53a are managed. Special game management processing will be described later.
In step S4-14, normal game management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-15. The normal game management process manages the operation of the normal diagram display device and the operation of the normal electric accessory 52a. The normal game management process will be described later.

At step S4-15, a state management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-16. The state management process monitors the occurrence and release of various errors (abnormal states). Then, various settings (setting of subcommands, etc.) are executed at the time of detection of occurrence/cancellation of various errors.
In the state management process, based on the values saved in the input information storage area corresponding to the steering wheel detection signal (the value saved in the previous timer interrupt process and the value saved in the current timer interrupt process) Then, it is determined whether or not the state in which the steering wheel detection signal is not input has changed to the state in which it is input. When it is determined that the steering wheel detection signal is changed from the non-input state to the input state, a game situation designating command for designating the generation of a shooting ready state is stored in a sub-command output request buffer of a RAM 230. - 特許庁
Furthermore, in the state management process, based on the values saved in the input information storage area corresponding to the steering wheel detection signal (the value saved in the previous timer interrupt process and the value saved in the current timer interrupt process) Then, it is determined whether or not the state in which the steering wheel detection signal is being input has changed to the state in which it is not being input. When it is determined that the handle detection signal is changed from the input state to the non-input state, a game situation designation command for designating cancellation of the firing ready state is stored in a sub-command output request buffer of a RAM 230. - 特許庁
At step S4-16, a winning opening switch process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-17. In the prize-winning switch process, processes (such as updating various counters) are executed according to the states of the switches 101 to 103, 105, and 106 (whether or not the ON state is detected).

At step S4-17, a payout control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-18. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-16, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
In this embodiment, as prize ball control counters, a prize ball control counter 1 that stores the number of ball game balls entering the big winning hole 53 and the number of ball game balls entering the right other winning hole 54 are stored. a prize ball control counter 2 that stores the number of ball game balls that have entered the upper left, middle left, lower left, and other winning openings 55 to 57; and ball game balls that have entered the first starting opening 51. and a prize ball control counter 5 that stores the number of ball game balls entered into the second start hole 52 are set.
Then, in the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (15 [balls] in this embodiment) of prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . Thereafter, when the game ball payout device 440 completes the payout of the prize balls, the payout control board 400 transmits a main command designating the completion of the payout to the main control board 200 . Then, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 1 in accordance with the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is equal to or greater than "1", it generates a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (10 [balls] in this embodiment) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2 in response to receiving the main command designating the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is equal to or greater than "1", it generates a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (10 [balls] in this embodiment) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is equal to or greater than "1", it generates a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 3 [balls]) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is equal to or greater than "1", it generates a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (1 [ball] in this embodiment) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 5 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.

In step S4-18, a firing position designation management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. In the firing position designation management process, processing related to designation of the firing position is executed.
Specifically, in the launch position designation management process, when changing from the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the left path to the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the right path (at the start of the jackpot game state, etc.) , "1" is set in the shooting position specifying flag area of the RAM 230, and a subcommand specifying launching of the game ball to the right path is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a subcommand designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is transmitted to the effect control board 300 .
On the other hand, when the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the right path is changed to the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the left path (at the end of the time saving control, etc.), " 0”.

At step S4-19, an external information management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-20. In the external information management process, external information (external signal) to be output to the hall computer (or data display device) is set.
In this embodiment, the external information output from the pachinko machine 1 to an external device (an electronic device such as a hall computer, a data display device, etc.) includes information on the number of pattern determinations, starting gate information, jackpot information, security information, and an out gate. Payout number information, error occurrence information, etc. are defined.
"Symbol determination frequency information" is external information regarding the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation display and stop display of special symbols). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the symbol determination frequency information to the hall computer (or data display device) every time the number of executions of the stop display of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number.
The “starting opening information” is external information regarding the entry of game balls into the starting openings 51 and 52 . The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the starting port information to the hall computer (or data display device) each time the ON state of the detection signal input from the starting port switches 101 and 102 is detected.
The "jackpot information" is external information about the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state. The main control board 200 outputs an external signal corresponding to the jackpot information to the hall computer (or data display device) each time a jackpot game state is generated.
The "outlet payout information" is external information regarding the number of game balls ejected from the ejection path (or the number of game balls ejected from the outlet 58). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the information on the number of out-putting balls to the hall computer each time the value of the out-ball number counter for external information reaches a predetermined value.
"Security information" is external information indicating that a setting change state is occurring, a setting confirmation state is occurring, or various errors (abnormalities) are occurring. CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the security information to the hole computer when the value of the security timer is "1" or more.

In the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information determination counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). When it is determined that the value of the external information fixed number counter has reached a predetermined value, the pattern fixed number information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . After that, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information fixed number counter. As a result, pattern determination frequency information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information starting entrance ball entry number counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [time] in the present embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the external information starting hole entry number counter has reached a predetermined value, the starting hole information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . After that, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]) is subtracted from the value of the external information starting entrance number counter. As a result, starting point information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information jackpot frequency counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). When it is determined that the value of the external information jackpot frequency counter has reached a predetermined value, the jackpot information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . Thereafter, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information jackpot number counter. As a result, jackpot information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
In the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information out-ball number counter has reached a predetermined value (10 [balls] in this embodiment). When it is determined that the value of the external information out ball number counter has reached a predetermined value, the out outlet payout information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . Thereafter, a predetermined value (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information out-ball number counter. As a result, out-port payout information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

Also, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is a value corresponding to the game ready status.
Then, it is determined that the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is not a value corresponding to the game ready state (setting change state, setting confirmation state, setting error state, RAM error state, or backup error state). value), the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, security information (external signal) is output to the hole computer.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the security timer is "1" or more. When it is determined that the value of the security timer is "1" or more, the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. FIG. As a result, security information (external signal) is output to the hole computer.

At step S4-20, an LED display setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-21. In the LED display setting process, display data to be output to the main display device 60 or the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with a common 0 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 1 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 2 output request buffer (8 bits), and a common 3 output request buffer (8 bits). It is
In the LED display setting process, first, the common 2 output request buffer is cleared (initialized), and the common 3 output request buffer is cleared (initialized). Specifically, each bit value of the common 2 output request buffer is set to "0", and each bit value of the common 3 output request buffer is set to "0".

Next, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is obtained.
Then, when the obtained gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to the game ready state, the normal display data setting process described later is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to the setting change state, a display data setting process at the time of setting change, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine state flag has a value corresponding to the setting confirmation state, a display data setting process at the time of setting confirmation, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state), an abnormality display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed.

In the normal display data setting process, first, the value of the special figure 1 display pattern counter is obtained, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the value of the special figure 1 display pattern counter obtained is transferred to the common 0 output request buffer. set.
As a result, the first special symbol is displayed by the LED1 to LED8 among the light emitting elements forming the main display device 60. FIG.
Next, the value of the special figure 2 display pattern counter is acquired, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the value of the acquired special figure 2 display pattern counter is set in the common 1 output request buffer.
As a result, the second special symbol is displayed by the LEDs 9 to 16 among the light emitting elements forming the main display device 60 .
Next, the value of the general-purpose map display symbol counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value of the general-purpose map display symbol counter is set as the output data a.
Next, the values set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 are the "state before opening the large winning opening", the "control state for opening the large winning opening", the "valid state for closing the large winning opening", and the "opening of the large winning opening". It is determined whether or not the value designates one of the special game phases in the end wait state.
Then, the value set in the special game phase flag area is "pre-open state for large winning opening", "control state for opening large winning opening", "valid state for closing large winning opening", and "wait state for ending opening of large winning opening". ", when it is determined that it is a value that specifies one of the special game phases, the value set in the special symbol determination flag area of the RAM 230 (value corresponding to the type of the big hit symbol) is acquired and acquired. Display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data b.
On the other hand, the value set in the special game phase flag area is "pre-open state for large winning opening", "control state for opening large winning opening", "valid state for closing large winning opening", and "wait state for ending opening of large winning opening". , the output data b is not set.
Next, the value set in the firing position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data c.
Next, the display data (8 bits) obtained by ORing the output data a to output data c is set in the common 2 output request buffer.
As a result, the normal symbols are displayed by the LEDs 17 and 18 among the light-emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, and the number of round games executed during the big win game state by the LEDs 19 to 23 (type of the big win game state). is displayed, and the LED 24 displays the path (left path or right path) along which the game ball should be launched.
Next, the value of the special figure 1 pending number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data d.
Next, the value of the special figure 2 pending number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data e.
Next, the value of the normal figure reservation number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data f.
Next, it is determined whether or not the power supply is restored.
Then, when it is determined that the power is restored, the value set in the special figure high probability state flag area is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data g.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the power is not restored, the output data g is not set.
Next, the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data h.
Next, display data (8 bits) obtained by ORing output data d to output data h is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light-emitting elements that constitute the main display device 60, the LEDs 25 and 26 display the number of reserved special figures 1, the number of reserved special figures 2 is displayed by the LEDs 27 and 28, and the number of reserved special figures 2 is displayed by the LEDs 29 and 30. The number of pending is displayed, the LED31 displays the game state at the time of power return (during the occurrence of the special figure high probability state or the occurrence of the special figure low probability state), and the LED32 indicates the current game state (execution of time saving control in progress or stopped) is displayed.

In the setting change display data setting process, information indicating that a setting change state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and the settings stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are set. Information indicating the value is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data of "r" (8 bits) is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data of "n." (8 bits) is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and "-" is set. is set in the common 2 output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the set value stored in the set value area of the RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the LEDs 33 to 40 display the character "r", the LEDs 41 to 48 display the character "n.", and the LEDs 49 to 56 display the character ""-" is displayed, and the numbers indicating the set values are displayed by the LEDs 57 to 64.

In the setting confirmation display data setting process, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and the settings stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are set. Information indicating the value is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data of "r" (8 bits) is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data of "n." (8 bits) is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the RAM 230 is set. The display data corresponding to the setting value stored in the value area is set in the common 3 output request buffer. No display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (clear value remains).
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the LEDs 33 to 40 display the character "r", the LEDs 41 to 48 display the character "n." A number indicating the value is displayed. Note that the LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

In the abnormal display data setting process, information indicating that an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer. At the same time, an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data of "E" (8 bits) is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data of "r." (8 bits) is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and Display data (error code) corresponding to the state (setting error state, RAM error state, or backup error state) is set in the common 3 output request buffer. No display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (clear value remains).
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the LEDs 33 to 40 display the letter "E", the LEDs 41 to 48 display the letter "r." A number representing the code is displayed. Note that the LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

At step S4-21, a solenoid data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-22. In the solenoid data setting process, control data (driving data) to be output to the solenoids 64 and 65 are stored (set) in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
In step S4-22, port output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-23. In port output processing, various signals are output to the hall computer, solenoids 64 and 65, and the like.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signal, control signal, etc.) set in the port output request buffer is output to the output ports 205 (output port 2, output port 3). As a result, the external signal set in the port output request buffer is output to the hall computer. Further, each solenoid 64, 65 is driven and controlled based on the drive signal set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-23, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-24. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt prohibition state is set to prohibit interrupts of other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.

In step S4-24, test signal output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-25. In the test signal output process, test information (test signal) is set.
The test signal output process is a process based on a program for executing a test-related process defined by gaming machine regulations. That is, the test signal output processing is processing based on the program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220 . The test signal tube is invoked during execution of timer interrupt processing.
Specifically, in the test signal output process, test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (jackpot game state, execution state of time saving control, probability state of special symbol lottery, etc.) to the port output request buffer of RAM 230 Remember.
In step S4-25, performance display device control processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-26. The performance display device control processing will be described later.
In step S4-26, register return processing is executed, a series of processing is completed, and the original processing is returned to. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S4-1 is restored. After the register return processing is completed, the program returns to the main loop processing (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Dynamic port output processing)
Next, the dynamic port output processing in step S4-3 will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing dynamic port output processing.
When the dynamic port output process is executed in step S4-3, as shown in FIG. 11, the process first proceeds to step S29-1.
In step S29-1, output data clear processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-2. In the output data clear process, the A register is cleared (initialized). Specifically, "0" is set as each bit value of the A register.
In step S29-2, main display device data output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-3. In the main display device data output process, the value of the A register (value cleared in step S29-1) is output to output port 0. FIG. As a result, the output port 0 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the main display device 60 becomes low level.

In step S29-3, performance display device data output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-4. In the performance display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to the output port 4. FIG. As a result, the output port 4 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the performance display device 206 becomes low level.
In step S29-4, common selection processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-5. In the common selection process, the value of the common counter is updated.
Specifically, in the common selection process, it is determined whether or not the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit (“3” in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the common counter has not reached the upper limit value, "1" is added to the value of the common counter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit, a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is set as the value of the common counter.

In step S29-5, common output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-6.
In common output processing, output data corresponding to the value of the common counter is output to output port 1 .
That is, when the value of the common counter is "0", output data is output to the output port 1 with "COM0" set to high level and "COM1", "COM2", and "COM3" set to low level. As a result, "COM0" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“1”, output data is output to the output port 1 with “COM1” set to high level and “COM0”, “COM2”, and “COM3” set to low level. As a result, "COM1" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“2”, output data is output to the output port 1 with “COM2” set to high level and “COM0”, “COM1”, and “COM3” set to low level. As a result, "COM2" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“3”, output data is output to the output port 1 with “COM3” set to high level and “COM0”, “COM1” and “COM2” set to low level. As a result, "COM3" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".

Also, in the common output process, the output data of the launch permission signal is output to the output port 1 .
That is, first, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set).
Then, when it is determined that the game ready state has occurred, it outputs to the output port 1 output data for setting the launch permission signal to a high level. As a result, a launch enable signal is output.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the playable state has not occurred, output data for setting the launch permission signal to low level is output to the output port 1 . This stops the output of the launch permission signal.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not the game ready status has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state has occurred. It is determined that no possible state has occurred.
In this embodiment, the output of the launch permission signal is set only when it is determined in the common output process that the playable state has occurred. As a result, the launch permission signal is output only while the game-enabled state is occurring (during setting). However, in the common output process, regardless of the state of the gaming machine, the output of the launch permission signal may be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to have a configuration in which the firing enable signal is always output while the main control board 200 is powered on.

In step S29-6, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S29-7, and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S29-11.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not the game ready status has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state has occurred. It is determined that no possible state has occurred.

In step S29-7, main display device data acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-8. In the main display device data acquisition process, display data for the main display device 60 is acquired and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the main display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is checked. Then, among the common 0 to common 3 output request buffers of the RAM 230, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is stored in the A register. set.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“1”, the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“2”, the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“3”, the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the main display device data acquisition process is the common The display data are set in the 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer.

In step S29-8, main display device data output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-9. In the main display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-7 is output to output port 0. FIG.
As a result, the data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver. 250a.
That is, the display on the main display device 60 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer).

In step S29-9, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-10. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt prohibition state is set to prohibit interrupts of other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S29-10, performance display device output processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-4) is performed. Performance display device output processing will be described later.

In step S29-11, performance display device data acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-12. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is checked. Then, among the common 0 to common 3 output request buffers of the RAM 230, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is stored in the A register. set.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“1”, the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“2”, the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“3”, the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the LED display setting process of step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt process (specifically, the display data setting process at the time of setting change, setting confirmation In the time display data setting process or the abnormal time display data setting process), it becomes the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer.

In step S29-12, performance display device data output processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-4) is performed. In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-11 is output to the output port 4. FIG.
As a result, the data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver. 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer).

(Performance display device output processing)
Next, the performance display device output process in step S29-10 will be described.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing performance display device output processing.
Performance display device output processing is processing based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 . That is, the performance display device output process is a process based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. FIG. Performance display device output processing is called during execution of dynamic port output processing.
When the performance display device output process is called in step S29-10, as shown in FIG. 12, the process first proceeds to step S30-1.
In step S30-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-2. In the register saving process, the values of all the registers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to the saving area of the RAM. Also, the values of all stack pointers used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved in the save area of the RAM.

In step S30-2, performance display device data acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is checked. Then, the display data set in the area corresponding to the value of the confirmed common counter is acquired from the identification segment output request buffer and the ratio segment output request buffer of the RAM 230, and the acquired display data is set in the A register. .
At this time, when the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the high-order 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“1”, the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“2”, the display data set in the high-order 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“3”, the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired by the performance display device data acquisition process is set in the identification segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer in the performance display device control processing of step S4-25 included in the previous timer interrupt processing. displayed data.

In step S30-3, performance display device data output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-4. In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S30-2 is output to the output port 4. FIG.
As a result, data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) based on the display data set in the output request buffer (identification segment output request buffer or ratio segment output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (the identification segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer).

In step S30-4, register restoration processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-5. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S30-1 (the value of the register used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) and the The value of the saved stack pointer (the value of the stack pointer used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) is restored.
In step S30-5, interrupt permission processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-4) is performed. In the interrupt permission processing, the interrupt disabled state is canceled. As a result, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like is permitted.

(Setting-related processing)
Next, the setting-related processing in step S4-8 will be described.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing setting-related processing.
When the setting-related process is executed in step S4-8, as shown in FIG. 13, the process first proceeds to step S37-1.
In step S37-1, it is determined whether or not the setting change state has occurred (set). If it is determined that the setting change state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-2, and the setting If it is determined that no change state has occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S37-8.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not the setting change status has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the setting change state, it is determined that the setting change state has occurred. Determine that no change state has occurred.

In step S37-2, set value acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the setting value acquisition process, the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are acquired (loaded), and the acquired setting values are stored in the register.
In step S37-3, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed. If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-4, and the RAM clear switch is pressed. 207 is not pressed (No), the process proceeds to step S37-5.
If the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed. If the RAM clear switch 207 is not turned on, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed. judge.
In step S37-4, set value update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-5. In the set value update process, "1" is added to the set value stored in the register.

In step S37-5, it is determined whether or not the set value stored in the register is less than a predetermined set comparison value ("6" in this embodiment). is not less than the set comparison value (the set value is equal to or greater than the predetermined set comparison value) (No), the process proceeds to step S37-6, and the set value stored in the register is compared with the predetermined set comparison value. If it is determined to be less than the value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-7.
In step S37-6, set value initialization processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-7. In the setting value initialization process, the setting value stored in the register is overwritten with a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment).
In step S37-7, set value saving processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-8. In the setting value saving process, the setting value stored in the register is saved in the setting value area of the RAM 230 .

In step S37-8, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state. If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in the ON state (is in the OFF state) (No), If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is ON (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-19). .
Here, if the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state. It is determined that it is not.
In step S37-9, a subcommand setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-10. In the subcommand setting process, a setting-related end specifying command (subcommand) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S37-10, subcommand group setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-11. In the subcommand group setting process, the subcommand group is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230 .
Here, the subcommand group includes a subcommand that specifies the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand that specifies the firing position, a subcommand that specifies the stop symbol of the first special symbol, and a stop symbol of the second special symbol. Subcommand to specify the pattern, subcommand to specify the special figure 1 reservation number, subcommand to specify the special figure 2 reservation number, subcommand to specify the value of the time saving counter, setting stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 It includes setting value specification commands for specifying values.
At step S37-11, the RAM set process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the next process (step S4-19) is performed. In the RAM set process, a playable state is set as the gaming machine state.
Specifically, a value corresponding to the playable state is stored (saved) as a value (gaming machine state flag) in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 .

(switch management processing)
Next, the switch management processing of step S4-12 will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing switch management processing.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-12, as shown in FIG. 14, the process first proceeds to step S5-1.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the gate switch 104 has been detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the gate switch 104 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-2, and the gate If it is determined that the ON state of the switch 104 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-3.
In step S5-2, normal figure starting ball detection processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-3. Normal figure starting ball detection processing will be described later.
In addition, in the normal figure starting ball detection process, it is determined whether or not it is in the right hitting period. When it is determined that the ball is not in the right-handed period (it is in the left-handed period), "1" is added to the value of the right-handed error counter.
In the present embodiment, the period during which one of the game states during the execution of the jackpot game state and the time-saving control is the right-handed period. On the other hand, the period in which the normal game state (the game state in which the jackpot game state is not occurring and the time saving control is stopped) is the left-handed period.

In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 starting opening switch 101 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting opening switch 101 is detected (Yes), step When the process proceeds to S5-4 and it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-5.
In step S5-4, a special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-5. The special figure 1 starting ball detection processing will be described later.
In step S5-5, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 starter switch 102 is detected, and if it is determined that the on state of the special figure 2 starter switch 102 is detected (Yes), step When the process proceeds to S5-6 and it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 is not detected (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). do.
In step S5-6, a special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). The special figure 2 starting ball detection processing will be described later.

(normal figure starting ball detection processing)
Next, normal figure starting ball detection processing in step S5-2 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing normal/normal starting ball detection processing.
When the normal chart starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, as shown in FIG. 15, first, the process proceeds to step S6-1.
In step S6-1, normal figure random number acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-2. In the general pattern random number acquisition process, the winning random number (random value) is acquired (loaded) from the loop counter corresponding to the normal symbol lottery.
In step S6-2, it is determined whether the value of the normal pattern reservation number counter is the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment), and if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern reservation number counter is not the upper limit value (No), the process proceeds to step S6-3, and if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern pending number counter is the upper limit value (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S5- 3).
In step S6-3, normal figure pending number counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-4. In the general pattern reservation number counter update process, the value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the general pattern reservation number counter is newly set to the general pattern reservation number counter.

In step S6-4, the general pattern random number storage process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3). In the general pattern random number storage process, the hit random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the general pattern game information storage area of the RAM 230 as the general pattern game information.
The RAM 230 includes a storage area 0 for storing general pattern game information during execution of a game, and a general pattern game information storage area for storing general pattern game information for which normal pattern hit/loss determination is suspended. It is
The general pattern game information storage area is configured to include a storage area 1 to a storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing general pattern game information.
The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (higher to lower) in descending order of priority. Then, the general-purpose game information stored in the general-purpose game information storage area is executed in order from the one stored in the storage area with the higher priority order.
In the general pattern random number storage process, the hit random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the general pattern game information storage area as the general pattern game information. At this time, the general pattern game information is stored in the storage area with the highest priority among the vacant storage areas.
In other words, if the current general pattern pending number counter value = "1", the random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 1. If the current general pattern pending number counter value = "2", the random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 2. If the current general pattern pending number counter value = "3", the random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 3. If the current general pattern pending number counter value = "4", the random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 4.

(Special figure 1 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process of step S5-4 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, as shown in FIG. 16, the process first proceeds to step S7-1.
In step S7-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 . In addition, "1" is added to the value of the external information starting entrance ball entry count counter.
Also, in the special symbol identification value setting process, it is determined whether or not it is during the period of hitting to the right. When it is determined that the ball is not in the right-handed period (it is in the left-handed period), the value of the right-handed error counter is reset (the value of the right-handed error counter is set to "0").
In step S7-2, a pending number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-3. In the pending number counter address setting process, in the pending number counter address setting area of the RAM 230, the address of the special figure 1 pending number counter is set.
In step S7-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special figure 2 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process of step S5-6 will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-6, as shown in FIG. 17, the process first proceeds to step S8-1.
In step S8-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 . In addition, "1" is added to the value of the external information starting entrance ball entry count counter.
Also, in the special symbol identification value setting process, it is determined whether or not it is during the period of hitting to the right. When it is determined that the ball is not in the right-handed period (it is in the left-handed period), "1" is added to the value of the right-handed error counter.
In step S8-2, a pending number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-3. In the pending number counter address setting process, in the pending number counter address area of the RAM 230, the address of the special figure 2 pending number counter is set.
In step S8-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special symbol random number acquisition process)
Next, the special symbol random number acquisition process of steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be described.
FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing a special symbol random number acquisition process.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, as shown in FIG. 18, the process first proceeds to step S9-1.
In step S9-1, a special symbol identification value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, a special figure pending number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-3. In the special figure pending number acquisition process, the value of the special figure pending number counter (special figure 1 pending number counter or special figure 2 pending number counter) specified by the address set in the pending number counter address area (special figure 1 pending Get (load) the number or special figure 2 pending number).

In step S9-3, a special random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-4. In the special random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random numbers) such as jackpot random numbers, winning pattern random numbers, reach group random numbers, reach mode random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers are acquired (loaded) from loop counters corresponding to each lottery. At this time, a corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-4, the number of reserved special figures acquired in step S9-2 (the number of reserved special figures 1 or the number of reserved special figures 2) is the upper limit ("4" in this embodiment). Then, if it is determined that the number of special figures pending is not the upper limit (No), the process proceeds to step S9-5, and if it is determined that the number of special figures pending is the upper limit (Yes), a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13 or S5-5).
In step S9-5, a special figure pending number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-6. In the special figure pending number counter update process, the value set in the special figure pending number counter (special figure 1 pending number counter or special figure 2 pending number counter) specified by the address set in the pending number counter address area The value obtained by adding "1" to is newly set to the special figure pending number counter.

In step S9-6, a special random number saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-7. In the special figure random number saving process, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the special figure game information storage area (special figure 1 game Information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area).
The RAM 230 includes a storage area 0 for storing special figure game information during execution of a game, a special figure 1 game information storage area for storing special figure 1 game information for which start determination is suspended, and a start determination for suspension. It is configured including a special figure 2 game information storage area.
The special figure 1 game information storage area is configured including a storage area 1 to a storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing the special figure 1 game information.
The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (higher to lower) in descending order of priority. Then, for the special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area, starting determination is executed in order from the one stored in the storage area with the higher priority.
The special figure 2 game information storage area is configured including a storage area 1 to a storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing the special figure 2 game information.
The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (higher to lower) in descending order of priority. Then, for the special figure 2 game information stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area, starting determination is executed in order from the one stored in the storage area with the higher priority.

In the special figure random number storage process, if the special symbol identification value obtained in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are used as special figure 1 game information. , is stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the memory area with the highest priority among the free memory areas.
That is, when the value of the current special figure 1 pending number counter = "1", various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 1. If the value of the current special figure 1 pending number counter = "2", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 2. If the value of the current special figure 1 pending number counter = "3", various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 3. If the value of the current special figure 1 pending number counter = "4", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 4.
On the other hand, if the special symbol identification value obtained in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 as special figure 2 game information, special figure 2 game Store in the information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the memory area with the highest priority among the free memory areas.
That is, when the value of the current special figure 2 pending number counter = "1", various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 1. If the value of the current special figure 2 pending number counter = "2", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 2. If the value of the current special figure 2 pending number counter = "3", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 3. If the value of the current special figure 2 pending number counter = "4", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 4.

In step S9-7, a hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the pending number designation command setting process, a pending number designation command specifying that the special figure pending number (special figure 1 pending number or special figure 2 pending number) has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 do. At this time, if the special symbol identification value obtained in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the reserved number designation command specifying that the special figure 1 reserved number has increased by "1" is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230, and if the value corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, a reservation number designation command that specifies that the special figure 2 reservation number has increased by "1", RAM 230 subcommand output request buffer.

In step S9-8, a preliminary determination process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13 or S5-5). In the prior determination process, the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure) saved (stored) in the special figure game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area) in step S9-6 2 game information) (hereinafter referred to as "pre-determined game information"), various lottery results are pre-determined.
In this embodiment, for all game information (special figure 1 game information and special figure 2 game information), prior determination of various lottery results is performed.
In addition, regarding the game information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, the prior determination of various lottery results may not be performed. In addition, for the special figure 2 game information acquired (stored) during the stop of the time saving control, the pre-determination of various lottery results is not executed, and the special figure 1 game information acquired (stored) during the execution of the time saving control , may be configured such that the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed.

In the prior determination process, first, the prior special figure per determination process is executed.
In the preliminary special figure hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery ("big hit" or "loss") is determined (preliminary special figure hit determination).
The ROM 220 stores a special symbol lottery table in which the jackpot values of the special symbol lottery are registered. In addition, as a special figure winning lottery table, the set value ("1" to "6") and the game state ("special figure low probability state" or "special figure high probability state") Correspond to each combination A special figure winning lottery table is stored.
Specifically, as a special figure winning lottery table, "set value 1 low probability special figure winning lottery table", "setting value 1 high probability special figure winning lottery table", "setting value 2 low probability special Figure winning lottery table", "Set value 2 high probability special figure winning lottery table", "Setting value 3 low probability special figure winning lottery table", "Setting value 3 high probability special figure winning lottery table" And, "setting value 4 low probability special figure winning lottery table", "setting value 4 high probability special figure winning lottery table", "setting value 5 low probability special figure winning lottery table", "setting value 5 high probability special figure win-loss lottery table”, “set value 6 low probability special figure win-loss lottery table”, and “set value 6 high probability special figure win-loss lottery table” are stored.

In the "setting value 0 low probability special figure winning lottery table", the setting value = "0" and "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure low probability state" is in), it is selected. And, in the "setting value 0 low probability special figure winning lottery table", "0" to "204" among the big winning random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as big winning values.
In the "setting value 0 high probability special figure winning lottery table", the setting value = "0" and "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure high probability state" is in), it is selected. And, in the "set value 0 high probability special figure win-lose lottery table", "0" to "2039" among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "setting value 1 low probability special figure winning lottery table", the setting value = "1" and "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure low probability state" is in), it is selected. And, in the "setting value 1 low-probability special drawing lottery table", "0" to "209" among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "setting value 1 high probability special figure winning lottery table", the setting value = "1" and "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure high probability state" is in), it is selected. And, in the "setting value 1 high probability special figure win-lose lottery table", "0" to "2089" among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.
"Set value 2 low probability special figure winning lottery table" has set value = "2" and "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (Occurrence of "special figure low probability state" is in), it is selected. Then, in the "setting value 2 low probability special figure win-lose lottery table", "0" to "214" among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "set value 2 high probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "2" and "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure high probability state" is in), it is selected. Then, in the "setting value 2 high probability special figure win-lose lottery table", "0" to "2139" among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.

"Set value 3 low probability special figure winning lottery table" has set value = "3" and "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (Occurrence of "special figure low probability state" is in), it is selected. Then, in the "setting value 3 low probability special figure win-lose lottery table", "0" to "219" among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "set value 3 high probability special figure win-loss lottery table", the set value = "3" and "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure high probability state" is in), it is selected. And, in the "set value 3 high probability special figure win-lose lottery table", "0" to "2189" among the big hit random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as big hit values.
"Set value 4 low probability special figure win-lose lottery table" has set value = "4" and "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (Occurrence of "special figure low probability state" is in), it is selected. And, in the "set value 4 low-probability special figure win-lose lottery table", "0" to "224" among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "setting value 4 high probability special figure winning lottery table", the setting value = "4" and "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure high probability state" is in), it is selected. And, in the "setting value 4 high probability special figure winning lottery table", among the big hit random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "2239" are registered as big hit values.
In the "set value 5 low probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "5" and "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure low probability state" is in), it is selected. And, in the "setting value 5 low-probability special figure win-lose lottery table", "0" to "229" among the big hit random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as big hit values.
In the "set value 5 high probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "5" and "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure high probability state" is in), it is selected. And, in the "setting value 5 high probability special figure win-lose lottery table", "0" to "2289" among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.

In the pre-special figure hit determination process, the value (set value) set in the set value area and the current game state ("special figure high probability state" or "special figure low probability state") are confirmed. , Read out the special drawing lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result.
Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read special symbol winning lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery ("big hit" or "loss") is determined (preliminary special symbol winning determination). do.
Specifically, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the pre-determination target game information matches the jackpot value registered in the read special drawing lottery table, the result of the special symbol drawing is called "jackpot ” (winning).
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the pre-determination target game information does not match the jackpot value registered in the read special drawing lottery table (if it matches the outlier value), special The result of the design lottery is determined as "lost" (lost).

In advance determination processing, next, advance special symbol design determination processing is executed. In the prior special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (preliminary special symbol determination).
In the pre-special figure design determination process, when it is determined as a "big hit" (winning) by the pre-special figure per determination, the type of "big hit design" is determined (preliminary special figure design determination).
The ROM 220 stores a jackpot symbol lottery table in which the correspondence between the jackpot symbol random number and the type of "big hit symbol" is registered. In addition, as the jackpot pattern lottery tables, a first jackpot pattern lottery table corresponding to the first special pattern lottery and a second jackpot pattern lottery table corresponding to the second special pattern lottery are stored.
In the first big-hit symbol lottery table, "big-hit 1 symbol" and "big-hit 2 symbols" are registered as types of "big-hit symbols". On the other hand, in the second big-hit symbol lottery table, "big-hit 3 symbols" to "big-hit 6 symbols" are registered as types of "big-hit symbols".
Then, when the pre-determination target game information is the special figure 1 game information, the first big hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read first big winning symbol lottery table, the type of the big winning symbol is determined.
On the other hand, when the pre-determination target game information is the special figure 2 game information, the second big hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read second big winning symbol lottery table, the type of the big winning symbol is determined.
On the other hand, in the pre-special figure design determination process, when it is determined as "lost" (defeated) by the pre-special figure hit determination, "missing design" is determined (preliminary special figure design determination) as the type of the stop design. .

In the advance determination process, next, a first prefetch designation command setting process is executed.
In the first look-ahead specification command setting process, the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 stores a first look-ahead specification command that specifies the type of the stop symbol determined by the pre-special symbol symbol determination.

In advance determination processing, next, advance special figure variation mode determination processing is executed.
At this time, when it is determined as "missing" (lost) by the prior special figure hit determination, a prior special figure variation determination process at the time of defeat, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined as a "jackpot" (winning) by the prior special figure hit determination, a prior special figure variation mode determination process at the time of winning, which will be described later, is executed.

In the preliminary special figure variation mode determination process at the time of defeat, first, preliminary random number type determination is performed.
In the preliminary random number type determination, it is determined whether the reach group random number included in the preliminary determination target game information is an "indefinite value" or a "fixed value".
Here, if the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information is "indefinite value", when acquiring (storing) the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the variation mode number (Primary variation mode number) and variation pattern number are not determined.
On the other hand, if the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information is a "fixed value", when acquiring (storing) the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) (step S9-8 ), the variation mode number (primary variation mode number) and the variation pattern number are determined.
In this embodiment, the reach group random number value is updated within the range of "0" to "10006". Among "0" to "10006", "0" to "8499" are set as "indefinite values", and "8500" to "10006" are set as "fixed values".
Therefore, in the pre-random number type determination, if the value of the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information is less than "8500", it is determined as an "indefinite value", and the reach group included in the pre-determination target game information If the value of the random number is "8500" or more, it is determined as "fixed value".

In the preliminary special figure variation mode determination process at the time of defeat, if it is determined to be a "fixed value" by the preliminary random number type determination, further, prior reach group determination, prior variation mode determination at the time of defeat, prior variation pattern determination at the time of defeat, to run.
In addition, in the pre-special figure fluctuation mode determination process at the time of defeat, if it is determined to be "indefinite value" by the preliminary random number type determination, the pre-reach group determination, the pre-variation mode determination at the time of failure, and the variation pattern determination at the time of failure are Not executed.

In prior reach group determination, reach group number (type of reach group) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a reach group determination table in which correspondence between reach group random numbers and reach group numbers (types of reach groups) is registered.
In addition, as a reach group determination table, the reservation type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the number of reservations ("0" to "3"), and the game state (low probability state, time saving state, Reach group determination table corresponding to each combination of (during variable probability state or during latent probability state) is stored.
Here, in the present embodiment, as the gaming state, a low probability state, a time saving state, a variable probability state, and a latent probability state are defined.
The "low probability state" is a game state during the occurrence of the special figure low probability state and during the stop of the time saving control. "Working time saving state" is a game state in which the special figure low probability state is occurring and working time saving control is being executed. "Variable probability state" is a game state during the occurrence of a special figure high probability state and during execution of time saving control. "Potential state" is a game state in which the special figure high probability state is occurring and the time saving control is stopped.
In the pre-reach group determination, first, check the pending type (type of game information to be determined in advance (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the number of reservations, and the game state, and in this confirmation result Read the corresponding reach group determination table, where the pending number is assumed to be "0".
Then, the reach group number is determined based on the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read reach group determination table.

In the preliminary fluctuation mode determination at the time of defeat, the fluctuation mode number (variation mode type) is judged.
The ROM 220 stores a variation mode determination table in which correspondences between reach mode random numbers and variation mode numbers (variation mode types) are registered.
Also, as the variation mode determination table, a losing variation mode determination table and a winning variation mode determination table are stored.
Further, as a change mode determination table at loss, a change mode determination table at loss corresponding to each reach group number (each type of reach group) is stored.
In particular, in each variation mode determination table, each reach mode random number is associated with a variation mode number (variation mode type) and a variation pattern determination table (information specifying a variation pattern determination table). . Thereby, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) and the variation pattern determination table are simultaneously selected based on each variation mode determination table.
In the preliminary fluctuation mode determination at the time of defeat, first, the reach group number determined by the preliminary reach group determination is confirmed, and the fluctuation mode determination table at the time of failure corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) and the variation pattern determination table are determined based on the ready-to-win mode random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read-out loss-time variation mode determination table.

In the preliminary fluctuation pattern determination at the time of defeat, the fluctuation pattern number (variation pattern type) is judged.
The ROM 220 stores a variation pattern determination table in which correspondences between variation pattern random numbers and variation pattern numbers (variation pattern types) are registered.
Also, a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different contents are stored as variation pattern determination tables.
In the prior variation pattern determination at the time of failure, first, the variation pattern determination table determined by the preliminary variation mode determination at the time of failure is read.
Then, the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read variation pattern determination table.

On the other hand, in the prior special figure variation mode determination processing at the time of winning, first, prior variation mode determination at the time of winning is executed.
In the prior variation mode determination at the time of winning, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) is determined.
In the winning-time prior variation mode determination, first, the winning-time variation mode determination table is read.
Then, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the variation pattern determination table are determined based on the ready-to-win mode random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read winning variation mode determination table.

In the prior special figure variation mode determination process at the time of winning, next, prior variation pattern determination at the time of winning is executed.
In the prior variation pattern determination at the time of winning, the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) is determined.
In the winning-time prior variation pattern determination, first, the variation pattern determination table determined by the winning-time prior variation mode determination is read.
Then, the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read variation pattern determination table.

In the advance determination process, next, second and third look-ahead designation command setting processes are executed.
In the second and third look-ahead specified command setting processing, if it is determined to be "missing" (defeated) by the pre-special per determination, and is determined to be a "fixed value" by the pre-random number type determination, pre-defeat A second look-ahead specification command that specifies the variation mode number determined by the variation mode determination, and a third look-ahead specification command that specifies the variation pattern number determined by the prior variation pattern determination at the time of failure. Store in buffer.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be "missing" (defeated) by the pre-special hit determination, and if it is determined to be an "undefined value" by the prior random number type determination, the second look-ahead designation command that specifies the "undefined value" , and a third prefetch designation command designating an “undefined value” are stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
On the other hand, if it is determined to be a "big hit" (winning) by the pre-special hit determination, the second pre-reading designation command for specifying the variation mode number determined by the pre-variation mode determination when winning, and the pre-variation pattern when winning A third prefetch designation command designating the variation pattern number determined by the determination is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

By the above, if the value of the reach group random number included in the game information to be pre-determined is a "fixed value", the variation mode number and the variation pattern number are determined, and the determined variation mode number and variation pattern number are specified The second and third look-ahead designation commands are transmitted to the effect control board 300 .
On the other hand, if the value of the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information is "indefinite value", the fluctuation mode number and fluctuation pattern number are not determined, and the second and third that specify "indefinite value" A prefetch designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 300 .

(Special game management processing)
Next, the special game management process of step S4-13 will be explained.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing special game management processing.
In this embodiment, the game (hereinafter referred to as "special game") executed based on the special symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "special game") phase / stage (hereinafter referred to as "special game phase"), "special symbol variation waiting state", "Special figure fluctuating state", "Special figure stop symbol display state", "Large winning opening pre-open state", "Large winning opening open control state", "Large winning opening closed valid state" and "Large winning opening open end" 7 "wait states" are defined.
Then, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (special game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven special game phases is set.
Also, the ROM 220 stores a special game control module corresponding to each special game phase as a special game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the special game.
Then, in the special game management process, a special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and a process based on the selected special game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-13, as shown in FIG. 19, the process first proceeds to step S10-1.
In step S10-1, special game phase acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S10-2, a special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-3. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (special game phase) acquired in step S10-1 is read.
In step S10-3, a special game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game control module execution process, the process based on the special game control module read in step S10-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value obtained in step S10-1 is a value corresponding to the "special figure fluctuation waiting state", the later-described special figure fluctuation waiting process is started, and the "special figure fluctuation state" If it is a value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation process described later is started, and if it is a value corresponding to the "special figure stop symbol display state", the special figure stop process described later is started, If the value corresponds to the "pre-open state of the big winning opening", the processing before opening the big winning opening is started, and if the value corresponds to the "control state of opening the big winning opening", it will be described later. When the big winning hole opening control process is started and the value corresponds to the "big winning hole closing valid state", the later-described big winning hole closing valid process is started and the "big winning hole opening end wait state" is entered. If it is a corresponding value, a big winning opening opening end wait process, which will be described later, is started.

(Special figure fluctuation waiting process)
Next, the special figure variation waiting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation waiting process.
When the special figure variation waiting process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 20, the process first proceeds to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "1" or more, and when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is not "1" or more (No) , moves to step S11-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 pending number counter is greater than or equal to "1" (Yes), moves to step S11-3.
In step S11-2, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is "1" or more, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is "1" or more (Yes) In, when it moves to step S11-3 and determines that the value of the special figure 1 pending number counter is not "1" or more (No), it moves to step S11-16.

In step S11-3, a special figure pending number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-4. In the special figure reservation number update process, the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure reservation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "1" or more.
Then, if the value of the special figure 2 pending number counter is "1" or more, the value (in this embodiment, "1") specifying the game based on the special figure 2 game information as the special symbol discrimination flag set value Along with setting, subtract "1" from the value of the special figure 2 pending number counter.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reserved number counter is not "1" or more (the value of the special figure 2 reserved number counter is "0"), special figure 1 game information as a special symbol discrimination flag set value A value (in this embodiment, "0") specifying a game based on is set, and "1" is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 pending number counter.
In step S11-4, a hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-5. In the pending number designation command setting process, a pending number designation command specifying that the special figure pending number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM230.
Concretely, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", the reserved number designation command specifying that the special figure 2 reserved number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM230.
On the other hand, if the special symbol discrimination flag set value = "0", a reserved number designation command specifying that the special figure 1 reserved number has decreased by "1" is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S11-5, a special pattern storage area shift process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-6. In the special symbol storage area shift process, the storage area in which the game information is stored is shifted.
Concretely, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value=“1”, the storage contents of the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 2 of the special figure 2 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 3 of the special figure 2 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 2 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the special figure 2 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 3 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Next, clear (initialize) the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the special figure 2 game information storage area.
On the other hand, if the set value of the special symbol discrimination flag=“0”, the contents stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, clear (initialize) the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area.

In step S11-6, setting abnormality determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-7. In the setting error determination process, occurrence of setting error is monitored.
Specifically, in the setting abnormality determination process, first, the setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 is acquired. Next, it is determined whether or not the acquired setting value is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (“6” in this embodiment).
When it is determined that the obtained set value is not less than the predetermined set comparison value (is greater than or equal to the predetermined set comparison value), the value of the game machine state flag area (game machine state flag) of the RAM 230 is set to the set abnormal state. Store (save) the corresponding value. Also, a subcommand specifying the occurrence of a setting error is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-7).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired setting value is less than the predetermined setting comparison value, the next process (step S11-7) is performed.

In step S11-7, a special figure hit determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-8. In the special figure hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined (special figure hit determination).
In the special figure per determination process, first, the setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 and the current game state ("special figure high probability state" or "special figure low probability state") are confirmed. , Read out the special drawing lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result.
Then, based on the big hit random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read special figure winning lottery table, it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is "big hit" (special per figure).
Specifically, when the value of the jackpot random number contained in the game information stored in the storage area 0 matches the jackpot value registered in the read special drawing drawing table, a special drawing drawing is performed. result is determined as a "big hit" (winning).
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 does not match the jackpot value registered in the read-out special prize lottery table (if it matches the outlier value ), the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be “lost” (lost).

In step S11-8, a special symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-9. In the special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (special symbol determination).
Concretely, in the special figure design determination processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is determined as a "big hit" (election) by special figure hit determination.
Then, when it is determined as "big hit" (winning) by the special figure hit determination, the type of "big hit design" is determined.
For this, when the set value of the special symbol discrimination flag=“0”, the first big hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read first big winning symbol lottery table, the type of the big winning symbol is determined.
On the other hand, when the set value of the special symbol discrimination flag=“1”, the second big hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read second big winning symbol lottery table, the type of the big winning symbol is determined.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be "lost" (lost) by the special figure hit determination, "missing design" is determined as the type of the stop design.
Next, a value corresponding to the determined stop symbol type is set in the special symbol determination flag area of the RAM 230 .
In step S11-9, a pattern type designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-10. In the symbol type designation command setting process, the symbol type designation command designating the type of the stop symbol determined in step S11-8 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-10, a special figure stop pattern number determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-11. In the special figure stop design number determination process, the stop design number of the special design is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a stop symbol number lottery table in which correspondences between winning symbol random numbers and stop symbol numbers (segment data) are registered.
In addition, as a stop pattern number lottery table, a winning stop pattern number lottery table corresponding to the case of winning a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) and a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) or second special symbol lottery) is stored.
Further, as winning stop symbol number lottery tables, a winning stop symbol number lottery table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and a winning stop symbol number lottery table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery are stored. .
In the special figure stop pattern number determination process, first, the result of the special figure hit determination is confirmed.
Then, when it is determined as a "big hit" (winning) by the special symbol winning determination, the setting value of the special symbol discrimination flag is confirmed, and the stop symbol number lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read winning stop symbol number lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be "lost" (lost) by the special figure per determination, the stop design number lottery table is read when losing. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read stop symbol number lottery table upon losing.
Next, the determined stop symbol number is stored in the stop symbol number storage area of the RAM 230 .

In step S11-11, a special figure variation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-12. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, the variation mode of the special symbol (variation mode type and variation pattern type) is determined.
Specifically, in the special figure variation pattern determination process, first, the result of the special figure per determination is confirmed. And, if the result of the special figure hit determination is "missing" (lost), the special figure fluctuation state determination processing at the time of defeat, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination is "big hit" (winning), the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of winning, which will be described later, is executed.

In the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of defeat, reach group determination is first performed.
In the reach group determination, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined.
In the reach group determination, first, check the pending type (type of game information stored in the storage area 0 (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the number of reservations, and the game state, The reach group determination table corresponding to this confirmation result is read.
Then, the reach group type is determined based on the reach group random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read reach group determination table.
In the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of losing, next, at the time of losing the variation mode determination is executed.
In the determination of the fluctuation mode at the time of failure, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern judgment table are judged.
In the determination of fluctuation mode when losing, first, the reach group number determined by the reach group determination is confirmed, and the fluctuation mode determination table when losing is read corresponding to the confirmation result.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read-out fluctuation mode determination table at the time of defeat, a variation mode number (variation mode type) and a variation pattern determination table , to determine.
In the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of losing, next, at the time of losing the change pattern determination is executed.
In the determination of the fluctuation pattern at the time of defeat, the fluctuation pattern number (variation pattern type) is judged.
In the determination of variation pattern at the time of failure, first, the variation pattern determination table determined by the determination of the variation mode at the time of failure is read.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read variation pattern determination table.

On the other hand, in the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of winning, first, variation mode determination at the time of winning is executed.
In the winning variation mode determination, a variation mode number (variation mode type) and a variation pattern table are determined.
In the winning variation mode determination, first, the winning variation mode determination table is read.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read winning variation mode determination table, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the variation pattern determination table , to determine.
In the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of winning, next, variation pattern determination at the time of winning is executed.
In winning variation pattern determination, a variation pattern number (variation pattern type) is determined.
In the winning variation pattern determination, first, the variation pattern determination table determined by the winning variation mode determination is read.
Then, the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read variation pattern determination table.

In step S11-12, a variation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-13. In the variation pattern command setting process, a variation mode designation command designating the variation mode number (type of variation mode) determined in step S11-11 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
Also, a variation pattern designation command designating the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) determined in step S11-11 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-13, a special figure fluctuation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-14. In the special figure fluctuation time setting process, the time for the special symbol fluctuation display is set.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation time setting process, first, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation mode number determined in step S11-11 (hereinafter referred to as "variation time 1") is acquired.
Also, the variation time (hereinafter referred to as “variation time 2”) corresponding to the variation pattern number determined in step S11-11 is obtained.
Then, the total time of the acquired variable time 1 and variable time 2 is calculated, and the calculated total time is set in the special game timer.

In step S11-14, a special figure variation display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-15. In the special figure fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set to the special figure display timer.
Next, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", a predetermined initial value is set to the special figure 1 display symbol counter. By this, lighting control of the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter is performed among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device.
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", a predetermined initial value is set to the special figure 2 display symbol counter. By this, lighting control of the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure 2 display pattern counter is performed among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device.

In step S11-15, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure fluctuating state" is set.
In step S11-16, a customer waiting setting process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the customer waiting setting process, the demonstration designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

(Processing during special figure fluctuation)
Next, the processing during special figure fluctuation executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing processing during special figure fluctuation.
When the special figure fluctuation process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 21, first, the process proceeds to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S12-2. Then, when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-4.
In step S12-2, it is determined whether the value of the special figure display timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is "0" (Yes), step S12- 3, and when it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S12-3, a special figure variation display data update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special figure fluctuation display data update process, the data for controlling the fluctuation display of the special figure display device is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure variation display data update process, when the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, "1" is added to the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, "1" is added to the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter.

In step S12-4, a special figure stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-5. In the special figure stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special figure stop display data setting process, the stop design number stored in the stop design number storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", the acquired stop symbol number (data corresponding to the stop symbol number) is set as the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter. Thereby, lighting control (stop display) is performed for the segment corresponding to the set stop design number among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device.
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", the acquired stop symbol number (data corresponding to the stop symbol number) is set as the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter. Thereby, lighting control (stop display) is performed for the segment corresponding to the set stop design number among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device.

In step S12-5, a special figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-6. In the special figure stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the special game timer.
In step S12-6, a stop designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-7. In the stop designation command setting process, the stop designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Also, a predetermined number (1 [times] in this embodiment) is added to the value of the external information fixed number counter.
In step S12-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure stop symbol display state" is set.

(Processing during special stop)
Next, the special figure stopping process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing processing during special figure stop.
When the special figure stopping process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 22, the process first proceeds to step S13-1.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S13-2 When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S13-2, it is determined whether or not the type of the stopped design is "big hit design", and when it is determined that the type of the stopped design is not "big hit design" (No), the process proceeds to step S13-3. However, when it is determined that the type of the stopped symbol is the "big hit symbol" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-6.
In step S13-3, it is determined whether or not time-saving control is being executed, and if it is determined that time-saving control is being executed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-4, and time-saving control is being executed If it is determined that it is not (No), the process proceeds to step S13-5.
Here, in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230, if "1" is set, it is determined that the time-saving control is being executed, and if "0" is set, the time-saving control is executed. Determine not inside.

In step S13-4, a time saving control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-5. In the time saving control management process, it is determined whether or not to end the time saving control.
Specifically, in the time saving control management process, first, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value of the time saving counter is newly set as the value of the time saving counter.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter is "0".
And when it determines with the value of a time saving counter being "0", "0" is set to the time saving control flag area|region of RAM230 (time saving control is stopped).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter is not "0", the state in which "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is maintained (the state in which the time saving control is being executed is maintained).
In step S13-5, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure variation waiting state" is set.
At step S13-6, game state update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-7. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, "0" is set to the special figure high probability state flag area of the RAM230. Moreover, "0" is set to the time saving control flag area|region of RAM230.

In step S13-7, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-8. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric role item 53a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a special electric role control table corresponding to each type of "jackpot symbol". In addition, in each special electric role control table, the effective time for closing the large winning opening, the closing time for the large winning opening, the number of round games, the number of open/close switching corresponding to each round game, the control data (solenoid control data, control time data, etc.).
In the special electric role control data setting process, the special electric role control table corresponding to the type of "jackpot symbol" determined in step S11-8 is read, and the read special electric role control table is stored in the special electric role control table of the RAM 230. Set to area.
Next, "0" is set in the counter for the number of times the special electric service has been continuously operated.

At step S13-8, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-9. In the opening time setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer.
In step S13-9, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-10. In the opening designation command setting process, the opening designation command designating the type of "jackpot design" determined in step S11-8 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Also, a predetermined number (1 [times] in this embodiment) is added to the value of the external information jackpot number counter.
In step S13-10, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the big winning opening" is set.

(Pre-processing for opening the big prize pool)
Next, the big winning opening pre-opening process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the pre-opening processing for the big winning opening.
When the big winning opening pre-opening process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 23, the process first proceeds to step S14-1.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S14-2. When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S14-2, special electric service continuous operation frequency counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-3. In the special electric service continuous operation number counter update process, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the special electric service continuous operation number counter is newly set in the special electric service continuous operation number counter.
In step S14-3, a round start specifying command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-4. In the round start designation command setting process, the round start designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, a special electric service open/close switching number setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-5. In the special electric service open/close switching number setting process, the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the open/close switching number corresponding to the value of the special service continuous operation counter is read. . Then, the opening/closing switching frequency read out is set in the special electric service opening/closing switching frequency counter.
Next, "0" is set as the value of the special electric winning number counter.
In step S14-5, a special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "large winning opening opening control state" is set.

(Special electric service opening/closing switching processing)
Next, the special electric power open/close switching process in steps S14-5 and S16-3 will be described.
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special electric service open/close switching process.
When the special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5 and S16-3, as shown in FIG. 24, the process first proceeds to step S15-1.
In step S15-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service open/close switching number counter is "0". , the process proceeds to step S15-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service open/close switching frequency counter is "0" (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S14-6 Or move to S16-4).

In step S15-2, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-3. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the special electric accessory 53a to be in an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control data setting process, the special electric service control table set in the special service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the solenoid corresponding to the value of the special service open/close switching number counter is selected. Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data specifying energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the control of the special electric accessory solenoid 65 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S15-3, a special electric service control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-4. In the special electric service control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control time setting process, the special electric service control table set in the special service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the control corresponding to the value of the special service open/close switching number counter is performed. read out the time. Then, the read control time is set to the special game timer.
In step S15-4, a special electric power opening/closing switching frequency counter update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S14-6 or S16-4). In the special electric service opening/closing switching number counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special electric service opening/closing switching number counter is newly set in the special electric service opening/closing switching number counter.

(Grand prize opening control process)
Next, the big winning opening opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening control process.
When the big winning hole opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 25, the process first proceeds to step S16-1.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S16-2 If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching number counter is "0". , the process proceeds to step S16-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service switching frequency counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, a special electric power opening/closing switching process (see FIG. 24) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric role winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (10 [balls] in this embodiment). If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5. ends the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S16-5, a big winning opening control ending process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-6. In the big winning opening opening control end process, solenoid control data specifying de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S16-6, a special winning opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-7. In the large winning opening closing effective time setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined large winning opening closing valid time (interval time) is set by the special game timer. set to
In step S16-7, a round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-8. In the round end designation command setting process, the round end designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "large winning opening closed valid state" is set.

(Large winning mouth closing effective processing)
Next, a description will be given of the big winning opening closing valid process executed in step S10-3.
FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening closing effective process.
When the big winning opening closing valid process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 26, the process first proceeds to step S17-1.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S17-2 If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S17-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has not reached the specified value (No ), the process proceeds to step S17-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-5.
Here, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the number of round games specified in the special electric role control table is acquired as a specified value to make a determination. .
In step S17-3, a big winning opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-4. In the big winning opening closing time setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined big winning opening closing time is set in the special game timer.
In step S17-4, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the big winning opening" is set.

At step S17-5, an ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-6. In the ending time setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer.
In step S17-6, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-7. In the ending specifying command setting process, the ending specifying command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "big winning opening opening end wait state" is set.

(Wait processing for end of big winning opening opening)
Next, the waiting process for finishing the opening of the big winning opening executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the waiting process for ending the opening of the big winning opening.
When the big winning opening end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 27, the process first proceeds to step S18-1.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S18-2. When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

At step S18-2, game state setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-3. In the game state setting process, the game state is set.
Specifically, in the game state setting process, the value of the special figure high probability state flag of the RAM 230 is set according to the type of the stop symbol (jackpot symbol).
At this time, when the type of the stopped symbol is "1 big win" or "3 big wins" to "5 big wins", "1" is set in the special-symbol high-probability state flag area of the RAM230. On the other hand, when the type of the stopped symbol is "big hit 2 symbols" or "big hit 6 symbols", "0" is set in the special symbol high probability state flag area of the RAM230.
Next, a predetermined number of times of time saving is set in the time saving counter. At this time, when the type of the stop symbol is "big hit 2 symbols" or "big hit 6 symbols", 100 [times] is set as the predetermined number of times of time saving. On the other hand, when the type of the stop symbol is "big hit 1 symbol" or "big hit 3 symbols" to "big hit 5 symbols", 10000 [times] is set as the predetermined number of times of time saving. Moreover, "1" is set to the time saving control flag area|region of RAM230.
Next, a value corresponding to the type of the big-hit symbol is set in the last-time big-hit symbol flag area of the RAM 230 .
In step S18-3, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure variation waiting state" is set.

(Normal game management processing)
Next, the normal game management process of step S4-14 will be explained.
FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing normal game management processing.
Here, in the present embodiment, the game (hereinafter referred to as "normal game") executed based on the normal symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "normal game") phase / stage (hereinafter referred to as "normal game phase"), "normal pattern fluctuation waiting state", "Normal figure fluctuating state", "Normal figure stop pattern display state", "Normal figure electric accessory open state", "Normal figure electric accessory open control state", "Normal figure electric accessory closed valid State" and "normal figure electric accessory open end wait state" are defined.
Then, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (normal game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven normal game phases is set.
Also, the ROM 220 stores a normal game control module corresponding to each normal game phase as a normal game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the normal game.
Then, in the normal game management process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and the process based on the selected normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-14, as shown in FIG. 28, the process first proceeds to step S19-1.
In step S19-1, normal game phase acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, the value (normal game phase) set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S19-2, normal game control module acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-3. In the normal game control module acquisition process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value (normal game phase) acquired in step S19-1 is read.

In step S19-3, a normal game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game control module execution process, the process based on the normal game control module read in step S19-2 is started.
Specifically, if the value obtained in step S19-1 is a value corresponding to the "normal pattern fluctuation waiting state", the normal pattern fluctuation waiting process described later is started, corresponding to the "normal pattern fluctuation state" If it is a value, the normal pattern fluctuation process described later is started, and if it is a value corresponding to the "normal pattern stop symbol display state", the normal pattern stop process described later is started, "Before opening normal electric accessories state”, the normal electric accessary product opening preprocessing described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the “normal electric accessary product opening control state”, the normal electric accessary product opening control process described later is performed. If it is a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory closed valid state", the normal electric accessory closing valid process described later is started and the value corresponds to the "normal electric accessory open end wait state" , The normal electric accessary product opening end wait process to be described later is started.

(Normal pattern change waiting process)
Next, normal figure fluctuation wait processing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing normal pattern change waiting processing.
When normal figure fluctuation waiting processing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 29, the process first proceeds to step S20-1.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether the value of the general pattern reservation number counter is "1" or more, and if it is determined that the value of the general pattern reservation number counter is "1" or more (Yes) , Move to step S20-2, if it is determined that the value of the normal figure pending number counter is not "1" or more (No), end the series of processes and move to the next process (step S4-15) do.

In step S20-2, normal figure pending number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-3. In the general pattern reservation number update process, the general pattern reservation number is updated.
Concretely, in the general pattern reservation number update process, first, "1" is subtracted from the value of the general pattern reservation number counter.
Next, shift the storage area where the normal game information is stored. Concretely, the storage contents of the storage area 1 of the normal game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 2 of the general-purpose game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 1 of the general-purpose game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 3 of the general-purpose game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 2 of the general-purpose game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the general-purpose game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 3 of the general-purpose game information storage area. Next, clear (initialize) the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the normal game information storage area.

In step S20-3, normal figure hit-lose determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-4. In the normal pattern lottery determination process, the result of the normal pattern lottery is determined (normal pattern hit/loss determination).
The ROM 220 stores a general pattern winning/losing lottery table in which winning values of the normal symbol lottery are registered. In addition, as the normal figure win-lose lottery table, the normal figure win-lose lottery table corresponding to the execution of the time saving control and the normal figure win-lose lottery table corresponding to the stop of the time saving control are stored.
In the normal figure hit-lose lottery table corresponding to the stop of the time saving control, the hit value is registered so that the winning probability is the first probability (1/99 in this embodiment). On the other hand, in the normal figure winning lottery table corresponding to the execution of the time saving control, the winning probability is the second probability higher than the first probability (1/1 in this embodiment), so that the hit value is registered. ing.
Then, in the general pattern hit-lose determination process, the hit random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0, the normal pattern hit-lose lottery table corresponding to the current execution status of the time saving control (during execution or stopped), Based on, the normal figure win-lose judgment is executed.
Specifically, when the value of the winning random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 matches the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined as "winning" (winning).
On the other hand, when the value of the winning random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 does not match the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined as "loss" (loss).

In step S20-4, normal pattern stop symbol determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-5. In the normal pattern stop symbol determination process, the type of the normal pattern stop symbol (stop symbol number) is determined (normal pattern stop symbol determination).
Specifically, in the normal pattern stop design determination process, when it is determined as "hit" (winning) by the normal pattern winning judgment, "normal pattern per pattern" is set as the type of stop design (stop design number). judge.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be "lost" (lost) by the normal figure winning/losing determination, "missing symbol" is determined as the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number).
Next, the determined stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 .
In step S20-5, normal figure fluctuation pattern determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-6. In the general pattern variation pattern determination process, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) in the normal pattern is determined (normal pattern variation pattern determination).
Specifically, in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination process, when the time saving control is being stopped, the first type (in this embodiment, 2.0 The type corresponding to the fluctuation time of [s]) is determined.
On the other hand, when the time saving control is being executed, the second type (in the present embodiment, the type corresponding to the fluctuation time of 0.5 [s]) as the type of normal figure fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) judge.

In step S20-6, normal figure fluctuation time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-7. In the general pattern fluctuation time setting process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the type of general pattern fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) determined in step S20-6 is obtained. And, the acquired fluctuation time is set to the normal game timer.
In step S20-7, normal figure fluctuation display data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-8. In the general pattern fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the general pattern display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal pattern fluctuation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the normal pattern display timer.
Next, a predetermined initial value is set in the general pattern display symbol counter. As a result, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal pattern display symbol counter among the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal pattern display device is controlled to be lit.
Next, predetermined segment data is set as segment data corresponding to the normal map display device. As a result, lighting of the segment corresponding to the set segment data is controlled among the predetermined number of segments that constitute the normal map display device.
In step S20-8, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the ordinary game phase update process, in the ordinary game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "ordinary figure fluctuating state" is set.

(Normal map fluctuation process)
Next, the process during normal figure fluctuation executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing processing during normal pattern fluctuation.
When the normal figure fluctuation process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 30, first, the process proceeds to step S21-1.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S21-2. Then, when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-4.
In step S21-2, it is determined whether the value of the normal map display timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the normal map display timer is "0" (Yes), step S21- 3, and when it is determined that the value of the normal map display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S4-15) is performed.
In step S21-3, normal figure fluctuation display data update processing is executed, a series of processing is completed, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal pattern fluctuation display data update process, the data for controlling the variable display of the normal pattern display device is updated.
Specifically, in the general pattern fluctuation display data update process, "1" is added to the value of the general pattern display symbol counter.

In step S21-4, a normal map stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-5. In the normal map stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the normal map display device is set.
Specifically, in the general pattern stop display data setting process, the stop pattern number stored in the stop pattern storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, the acquired stop design number is set as the value of the general-purpose diagram display design counter. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments that constitute the normal pattern display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal pattern display pattern counter is controlled to light up (stopped display).
In step S21-5, normal figure stop time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-6. In the normal figure stop time setting process, the predetermined stop time is set to the normal game timer.
In step S21-6, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal figure stop symbol display state" is set.

(Normal map stop processing)
Next, the process during normal figure stop executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing processing during normal map stop.
When the normal map stop process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 31, the process first proceeds to step S22-1.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S22-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether or not the stop pattern is the "normal pattern per pattern", and if it is determined that the stop pattern is not the "normal pattern per pattern" (No), the process proceeds to step S22-3. However, when it is determined that the stopped symbol is the "normal pattern winning symbol" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal figure fluctuation waiting state" is set.
In step S22-4, normal electric service control data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-5. In the ordinary electric role control data setting process, control data for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a normal electric work control table corresponding to the execution status of the time saving control (during execution or during suspension). In each ordinary electric duty control table, the time before opening the ordinary electric duty, the valid time for closing the ordinary electric duty, the waiting time for the end of opening, the number of open/close switching times, the control data corresponding to each open/close switching (solenoid control data, control time, etc.) data), etc.
In the ordinary electric service control data setting process, the ordinary electric service control table corresponding to the execution status of the time saving control (during execution or being stopped) is read, and the read ordinary electric service control table is stored in the ordinary electric service control table area of the RAM 230. set.
Next, referring to the ordinary electric work control table set in the ordinary electric work control table area of the RAM 230, the opening/closing switching times are read out. Then, the number of open/close switching times read out is set in the normal electric open/close switching number counter. In addition, "0" is set as the value of the winning number counter for the ordinary electric role.

At step S22-5, a normal electric service pre-opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. In the ordinary electric role opening time setting process, the ordinary electric role control table set in the ordinary electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined ordinary electric role opening time before the normal electric role opening is set in the ordinary game timer.
In step S22-6, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product opening pre-state" is set.

(Normal electric accessory opening preprocessing)
Next, the normal electric accessary product opening preprocessing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessory opening preprocessing.
When the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 32, the process first proceeds to step S23-1.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S23-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S23-2, normal electric open/close switching processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S23-3. The ordinary electric open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S23-3, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product opening control state" is set.

(Normal electrical open/close switching process)
Next, the normal electric open/close switching process in steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing normal electric open/close switching processing.
When the ordinary electric open/close switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, as shown in FIG. 33, the process first proceeds to step S24-1.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is "0". If it is determined that the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is not "0" (No) , the process proceeds to step S24-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter is "0" (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S23-3 Or move to S25-4).
In step S24-2, normal electric service control data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-3. In the normal electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the normal electric accessory 52a to be in an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric power control data setting process, the normal electric power control table set in the normal electric power control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the solenoid corresponding to the value of the normal electric power open/close switching frequency counter is selected. Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data specifying energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, control of the normal electric accessory solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the normal electric accessory 52a is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S24-3, normal electric service control time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. In the ordinary electric power control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric service control time setting process, the normal electric service control table set in the normal service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the control corresponding to the value of the normal service open/close switching frequency counter is performed. read out the time. Then, the read control time is set to the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, normal electric switch opening/closing number counter update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S23-3 or S25-4) is performed. In the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter is newly set in the normal electric opening/closing switching number counter.

(Normal electric accessory opening control process)
Next, the normal electric accessory opening control process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessory opening control processing.
When the normal electric accessary product opening control process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 34, the process first proceeds to step S25-1.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S25-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is "0". If it is determined that the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter value is not "0" , the process proceeds to step S25-3, and when it is determined that the value of the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, normal electric open/close switching processing (see FIG. 33) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (3 [ball] in this embodiment), and the value of the normal electric winning number counter reaches a predetermined value. If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5. ends the series of processes and shifts to the next process (step S4-15).

In step S25-5, normal electric power opening control end processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-6. In the normal electric power opening control end process, solenoid control data specifying de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the normal electric accessory 52a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S25-6, normal electric service closing effective time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-7. In the normal service closing effective time setting process, the normal service control table set in the normal service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined normal service closing valid time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S25-7, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product closing valid state" is set.

(Normal electric accessory closing effective processing)
Next, the normal electric accessary product closing valid process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessary product closing valid processing.
When the normal electric accessary product closing valid process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 35, the process first proceeds to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S26-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S26-2, an opening end wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26-3. In the open end wait time setting process, the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined open end wait time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S26-3, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product opening end wait state" is set.

(Normal electric accessory opening end wait process)
Next, the normal electric accessary product open end wait process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessary product opening end wait processing.
When the normal electric accessary product open end wait process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 36, the process first proceeds to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S27-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S27-2, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal figure fluctuation waiting state" is set.

(Performance display device control processing)
Next, the performance display device control processing at step S4-25 will be described.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing performance display device control processing.
The performance display device control processing is processing based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 . That is, the performance display device control processing is processing based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220 . Performance display device control processing is called during execution of timer interrupt processing.
When the performance display device control process is called in step S4-25, as shown in FIG. 37, the process proceeds to step S38-1.
In step S38-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-2. In the register saving process, the values of all the registers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to the saving area of the RAM. Also, the values of all stack pointers used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved in the save area of the RAM.

In step S38-2, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-3, and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S38-11.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not the game ready status has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state has occurred. It is determined that no possible state has occurred.
In step S38-3, total out counter addition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-4.
In the total count counter addition process, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the OUT switch 109 has been detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 is detected, "1" is added to the value of the total out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the total out counter is not added.

In step S38-4, it is determined whether or not it is in a predetermined game state, and if it is determined that it is in a predetermined game state (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-5, and it is determined that it is not in a predetermined game state. If so (No), the process proceeds to step S38-7.
Here, the "predetermined game state" is a game state in which the "special low probability state" has occurred, the time saving control is stopped, and the jackpot game state has not occurred. .
At step S38-5, normal out counter addition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-6.
In the normal out counter addition process, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the out switch 109 has been detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the OUT switch 109 is detected, "1" is added to the value of the normal OUT counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the OUT switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the normal OUT counter is not added.

In step S38-6, normal prize ball counter addition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-7.
In the normal prize ball counter addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of the game ball to the first start port 51. Add "3". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is not detected, the value of the normal ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of the game ball to the second start port 52. Add "1". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 is not detected, the value of the normal ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the right winning opening switch 105 is detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the right winning hole switch 105 is detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is added to the value of the normal winning ball counter, which is the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the right other winning hole 54. ” is added. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the right winning hole switch 105 is not detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the left winning port switch 106 is detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the left winning hole switch 106 is detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is the number of winning balls paid out according to the entry of game balls into the other left winning holes 55 to 57. Add "10". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the left winning hole switch 106 is not detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is not added.

In step S38-7, it is determined whether or not the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value (Yes), step S38-8. , and when it is determined that the value of the total out counter has not reached the reference value (No), the process proceeds to step S38-9.
In this embodiment, the reference value=60000×n (n=integer). "n" is a value indicating the current section, and is set to "1" as an initial value.
In step S38-8, section update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-9. In the section update process, the section is updated.
In the section update process, first, the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230 is shifted (moved) to the base value buffer 2 of the RAM 230 .
Next, a predetermined initial value ("0" in this embodiment) is set as the value of the normal out counter. Also, a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is set as the value of the normal winning ball counter.
Next, "1" is added to the value (n) indicating the current section. This updates the reference value.
At step S38-9, a base ratio calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-10. In the base ratio calculation process, a base ratio is calculated.
Specifically, in the base ratio calculation process, the base ratio is calculated based on the value of the normal out counter and the value of the normal ball counter. Then, the calculated base ratio is stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230 .
Here, the base ratio is the ratio of the value of the normal winning ball counter to the value of the normal out counter.

At step S38-10, base ratio display data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-11. In the base ratio display data setting process, display data to be output to the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with an identification segment output request buffer (16 bits) and a ratio segment output request buffer (16 bits).
In the base ratio display data setting process, first, which base ratio to display is selected from the base ratio of the current section and the base ratio of the previous section.
Then, when the display of the base ratio of the current section is selected, information indicating that it is the base ratio of the current section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the current section is set to Set to ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data of "b" (8 bits) is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, and the display data of "b" (8 bits) is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer. , the display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to The display data corresponding to the ones digit of is set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the character "b" is displayed by the LEDs 33 to 40, the character "b" is displayed by the LEDs 41 to 48, and the current state is displayed by the LEDs 49 to 56. A number indicating the tens digit of the base ratio is displayed, and a number indicating the ones digit of the current base ratio is displayed by the LEDs 57 to 64 .

On the other hand, if the display of the base ratio of the previous section is selected, information indicating that it is the base ratio of the previous section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the previous section is set to Set to ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" are set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, and the display data of "c" (8 bits) are set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer. , the display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to The display data corresponding to the ones digit of is set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the character "b" is displayed by the LEDs 33 to 40, the character "c" is displayed by the LEDs 41 to 48, and the current state is displayed by the LEDs 49 to 56. A number indicating the tens digit of the base ratio is displayed, and a number indicating the ones digit of the current base ratio is displayed by the LEDs 57 to 64 .

In step S38-11, register restoration processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-12. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S38-1 (the value of the register used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) and the The value of the saved stack pointer (the value of the stack pointer used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) is restored.
At step S38-12, an interrupt permission process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-26). In the interrupt permission processing, the interrupt disabled state is released. As a result, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like is permitted.

(Various productions executed in pachinko machine 1)
Next, various effects executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.

(hold display)
First, the suspension display (suspension effect) executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, each game information (special figure 1 game information/special figure 2 game information) stored in the game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area/special figure 2 game information storage area) is targeted Pending display is executed.
The pending display is a display (effect) that suggests (announces) that derivation of the start determination result (completion of the stop display of the special symbols) is pending for the game information that is the target of the pending display. ing. That is, the pending display indicates that the special symbol notification display (start determination) is suspended or that the special symbol notification display is being executed for the game information that is the target of the suspension display. It is a suggestive display.
In the present embodiment, as the pending display for the game information, the pending symbol h corresponding to the game information is displayed in the pending symbol display areas b1 and b2.

In this embodiment, one of the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information is displayed on hold, and the other game information is not displayed on hold according to the game state.
Concretely, while the time saving control is stopped, the reservation display is executed for the special figure 1 game information, and the reservation display is not executed for the special figure 2 game information. On the other hand, while the time saving control is being executed, the reserved display is executed for the special figure 2 game information, and the reserved display is not executed for the special figure 1 game information.
That is, while the time saving control is stopped, the special figure 1 game information (special figure 1 game information during execution of variable display/stop display of special symbols) stored in the storage area 0 in the reserved symbol display area b1 The corresponding reserved design h is displayed, and in the reserved design display area b2, each special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area (variation display / stop display (start determination) of the special figure special design) A reserved design h corresponding to each reserved special figure 1 game information) is displayed.
On the other hand, during execution of the time saving control, in the reserved symbol display area b1, to the special figure 2 game information (special figure 2 game information during execution of variable display / stop display of special symbols) stored in the storage area 0 The corresponding reserved design h is displayed, and in the reserved design display area b2, each special figure 2 game information stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area (variation display / stop display (start determination) of the special figure special symbol A reserved design h corresponding to each reserved special figure 2 game information) is displayed.

In the pachinko machine 1, the display screen 31a displays a background image/interface image corresponding to the game state. Under the present circumstances, the content of the background image / interface image displayed during stop of time saving control, and the background image / interface image displayed during execution of time saving control mutually differs.
The interface image is configured including five pedestal images. Each pedestal image is an image showing the pedestal of the reserved design h, and is an image that defines (specifies) the display position of the reserved design h. In this embodiment, one reserved symbol h can be displayed above each pedestal image.
In the interface image, five pedestal images are displayed side by side at predetermined intervals along the horizontal direction. Among the five base images, the first base image from the left is set as the base image corresponding to the storage area 0, the second base image from the left is set as the base image corresponding to the storage area 1, and the left base image is set as the base image corresponding to the storage area 1. The third pedestal image from the left is the pedestal image corresponding to the storage area 2, the fourth pedestal image from the left is the pedestal image corresponding to the storage area 3, and the fifth pedestal image from the left is the storage area. 4 is a pedestal image.

Then, at the position above the pedestal image corresponding to the storage area 0 (hereinafter referred to as "the holding display position"), the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) stored in the storage area 0 ) is displayed. That is, above the pedestal image corresponding to the storage area 0, the reserved symbol display area b1 is configured.
On the other hand, at the position above the pedestal image corresponding to the storage area 1 (hereinafter referred to as "holding 1 display position"), the game information stored in the storage area 1 (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information ) is displayed. That is, above the pedestal image corresponding to the memory area 1, the display position of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the game information stored in the memory area 1 is configured in the reserved symbol display area b2.
On the other hand, at the position above the pedestal image corresponding to the storage area 2 (hereinafter referred to as "holding 2 display position"), the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information ) is displayed. That is, above the pedestal image corresponding to the memory area 2, the display position of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the game information stored in the memory area 2 is configured in the reserved symbol display area b2.
On the other hand, at the position above the pedestal image corresponding to the storage area 3 (hereinafter referred to as "holding 3 display position"), the game information stored in the storage area 3 (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information ) is displayed. That is, above the pedestal image corresponding to the memory area 3, the display position of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the game information stored in the memory area 3 is configured in the reserved symbol display area b2.
On the other hand, at the position above the pedestal image corresponding to the storage area 4 (hereinafter referred to as "holding 4 display position"), the game information stored in the storage area 4 (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information ) is displayed. That is, above the pedestal image corresponding to the memory area 4, the display position of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the game information stored in the memory area 4 is configured in the reserved symbol display area b2.
And, while the time saving control is stopped, at each holding display position (the holding display position, the holding 1 display position, the holding 2 display position, the holding 3 display position, the holding 4 display position), corresponding to the special figure 1 game information A reserved design h is displayed, and a reserved design h corresponding to the special figure 2 game information is displayed at each reserved display position during execution of the time saving control.

In the hold display targeting the special figure 1 game information, the hold design corresponding to the special figure 1 game information at the hold display position, hold 1 display position, hold 2 display position, hold 3 display position, hold 4 display position h is displayed.
That is, during the period when the special figure 1 game information is stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area, the reserved design h corresponding to the special figure 1 game information is displayed in the reserved design display area b2. At this time, the reserved pattern h corresponding to the special figure 1 game information is displayed at the reserved display position corresponding to the storage area (storage area 1 to storage area 4) in which the special figure 1 game information is stored. On the other hand, during the period when the special figure 1 game information is stored in the storage area 0, the reserved design h corresponding to the special figure 1 game information is displayed in the reserved design display area b1.
On the other hand, in the hold display targeting the special figure 2 game information, at the hold display position, hold 1 display position, hold 2 display position, hold 3 display position, hold 4 display position, corresponding to the special figure 2 game information A reserved pattern h is displayed.
That is, during the period when the special figure 2 game information is stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area, the reserved design h corresponding to the special figure 2 game information is displayed in the reserved design display area b2. At this time, the reserved pattern h corresponding to the special figure 2 game information is displayed at the reserved display position corresponding to the storage area (storage area 1 to storage area 4) in which the special figure 2 game information is stored. On the other hand, during the period when the special figure 2 game information is stored in the storage area 0, the reserved design h corresponding to the special figure 2 game information is displayed in the reserved design display area b1.

For example, various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 3 of the special figure 2 game information storage area as the special figure 2 game information, and the holding display for the special figure 2 game information is executed In this case, the reserved design h corresponding to the special figure 2 game information is displayed at the reserved 3 display position corresponding to the storage area 3 of the reserved design display area b2 according to the start of the reserved display.
After that, the storage area for storing the special figure 2 game information is shifted from the storage area 3 to the storage area 2, and the display position of the reserved design h corresponding to the special figure 2 game information is stored. The pending 3 display position corresponding to area 3 is shifted to the pending 2 display position corresponding to storage area 2 .
In addition, the storage area for storing the special figure 2 game information is shifted from the storage area 2 to the storage area 1, and the display position of the reserved design h corresponding to the special figure 2 game information is stored. The pending 2 display position corresponding to area 2 is shifted to the pending 1 display position corresponding to storage area 1 .
Furthermore, the storage area for storing the special figure 2 game information is shifted from the storage area 1 to the storage area 0, and the display position of the reserved design h corresponding to the special figure 2 game information is stored. The pending display position corresponding to area 1 is shifted to the pending display position.
Then, according to the end of the stop display of the special symbol based on the special figure 2 game information, the display of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the special figure 2 game information at the reserved display position is ended, thereby, the reserved display finish.

(synchronization of multiple pending indications)
Next, synchronization of a plurality of pending displays (holding pattern h) will be described.
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the relationship between the frame images forming the stay animation and the timing at which the synchronization flag is turned ON.
Here, "the synchronization flag is turned ON" means that the value stored in the synchronization flag area changes from "0" to "1".
Moreover, FIG. 54 has shown progress (control) of the pending|holding display performed during time saving control. In addition, the suspension display is advanced (controlled) by the same method as during execution of the time saving control shown in FIG. 54 even during the stop of the time saving control.
In the pachinko machine 1, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area as the special figure 2 game information, and the special figure 2 game information is targeted. Suspension display is started, and according to the end of the notification display of the second special symbol based on the special figure 2 game information, the suspension display for the special figure 2 game information is ended.
Suspension display for each special figure 2 game information is configured by sequentially executing winning animation display, stay animation display, standby animation display, subtraction animation display, and the like.

The "winning animation display" is a display of contents suggesting (announcing) the appearance of the pending symbol h. The prize-winning animation display is configured by reproducing the prize-winning animation once.
The "winning animation" is a moving image in which the pending symbol h appears. The prize-winning animation consists of 10 frames of images (image data).
Thus, when the winning animation display is executed at the reservation 1 display position, the reservation pattern h appears at the reservation 1 display position.
On the other hand, when the winning animation display is executed at the reservation 2 display position, the reservation pattern h appears at the reservation 2 display position.
On the other hand, when the winning animation display is executed at the reservation 3 display position, the reservation pattern h appears at the reservation 3 display position.
On the other hand, when the winning animation display is executed at the reservation 4 display position, the reservation pattern h appears at the reservation 4 display position.
It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the winning animation display is not executed at the reserved display position.

The “stay animation display” is a display of contents suggesting (announcing) the stay (existence) of the reserved pattern h. The stay animation display is configured by loop-playing (loop-displaying) the stay animation. The stay animation is a moving image of the contents of the reserved design h performing a predetermined action (hereinafter referred to as "action during stay").
That is, the stay animation display is configured by repeating (periodically) playing back (displaying) the stay animation at a predetermined cycle. As a result, in the stay animation display, the action during stay of the reserved pattern h is repeated at a predetermined cycle (periodically).
As shown in FIG. 54(a), the stay animation consists of 30 frames of images (image data). Specifically, the stay animation (movement during stay) is configured (reproduced) by sequentially displaying images (image data) corresponding to frames 1 to 30 .
Thus, when the stay animation display is executed at the reserved display position, the reserved design h repeats the staying action at the reserved display position.
On the other hand, when the stay animation display is executed at the hold 1 display position, the hold design h repeats the action during stay at the hold 1 display position.
On the other hand, when the stay animation display is executed at the hold 2 display position, the hold design h repeats the action during stay at the hold 2 display position.
On the other hand, when the stay animation display is executed at the hold 3 display position, the hold pattern h repeats the action during stay at the hold 3 display position.
On the other hand, when the stay animation display is executed at the hold 4 display position, the hold pattern h repeats the action during stay at the hold 4 display position.

"Standby animation display" is a display that is executed during a standby state, which will be described later. The standby animation display is configured by displaying a standby image (still image). In particular, the standby image has the same content as the first frame (first frame, frame 1) of the 30 frames of images (image data) that make up the stay animation (hereinafter referred to as the “first image”). It is an image. That is, in standby animation display, a standby image (still image) is continuously displayed.
Thereby, when the standby animation display is executed at the reservation 1 display position, the reservation design h is displayed in a stationary (stopped) state at the reservation 1 display position.
On the other hand, when the standby animation display is executed at the hold 2 display position, the hold design h is displayed in a stationary (stopped) state at the hold 2 display position.
On the other hand, when the standby animation display is executed at the hold 3 display position, the hold pattern h is displayed in a stationary (stopped) state at the hold 3 display position.
On the other hand, when the standby animation display is executed at the reservation 4 display position, the reservation pattern h is displayed in a stationary (stopped) state at the reservation 4 display position.
In addition, in this embodiment, the standby animation display is not performed at the suspension display position.

The "subtraction animation display" is a display of the content of shifting the pending pattern h (moving the pending display position). The subtraction animation display is configured by playing back the subtraction animation once. The "subtraction animation" is a moving image of contents in which the reserved pattern h moves from one reserved display position to another reserved display position (a reserved display position one higher than the one reserved display position). The subtraction animation consists of 10 frames of images (image data).
Specifically, when the subtraction animation display corresponding to the reservation 4 display position is executed, the reservation pattern h displayed at the reservation 4 display position moves to the reservation 3 display position.
On the other hand, when the subtraction animation display corresponding to the reservation 3 display position is executed, the reservation pattern h displayed at the reservation 3 display position moves to the reservation 2 display position.
On the other hand, when the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 2 display position is executed, the hold design h displayed at the hold 2 display position moves to the hold 1 display position.
On the other hand, when the subtraction animation display corresponding to the reservation 1 display position is executed, the reservation pattern h displayed at the reservation 1 display position moves to the reservation display position.

In the pending display for each special figure 2 game information, the winning animation display is always executed according to the start. After the prize-winning animation display ends, the display transitions to standby animation display, stay animation display, or subtraction animation display, depending on the situation.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, at two or more of the pending display positions, the pending 1 display position, the pending 2 display position, the pending 3 display position, and the pending 4 display position, in parallel in time , when the suspended display is executed, the content of the display (animation) is synchronized with respect to the suspended display (specifically, stay animation) executed at the two or more suspended display positions.
Here, "synchronizing the contents of the display (animation)" means that the frames are updated at the same time and the contents of the images (image data) displayed at the same time are the same. say.
Thereby, when the suspended display (specifically, the stay animation display) is executed in parallel at two or more suspended display positions, the suspended symbols displayed at the two or more suspended display positions. h's sojourn actions will be synchronized with each other.
Therefore, when a plurality of pending displays are executed in parallel with each other in time, it is possible to improve the appearance of the plurality of pending displays, thereby improving the presentation effect.
Synchronization of multiple pending indications is described in detail below.

In the pachinko machine 1, at least at the holding display position among the holding display position, the holding 1 display position, the holding 2 display position, and the holding 3 display position, when the holding display is executed, a new special figure When the 2 game information is acquired, the hold display for the newly acquired special figure 2 game information is configured to be synchronized with the hold display being executed at the hold display position through the standby state. ing.
The "standby state" is a state of waiting for synchronization with the pending display being executed at the relevant pending display position (or pending display position 1). That is, for the hold display targeting the newly acquired special figure 2 game information, during the standby state, it is not synchronized with the hold display being executed at the hold display position (or hold 1 display position) .

As described above, the stay animation is composed of images (image data) for 30 frames (frames 1 to 30). In the stay animation display, the stay animation is played back in a loop. That is, in the stay animation display, the images of frames 1 to 30 forming the stay animation are repeatedly displayed.
Further, the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 is provided with a synchronous flag area. Then, in the synchronization flag area, information specifying permission of synchronization ("1" in this embodiment) and information specifying prohibition (standby) of synchronization ("0" in this embodiment) , any information (value) is stored (set).
Then, in the present embodiment, when the stay animation display is being executed (the stay animation is played in a loop) at the hold display position, only one frame is displayed in the synchronization flag area during each play of the stay animation. "1" is stored.
That is, as shown in FIG. 54(b), during the loop playback of the stay animation at the hold display position, of the 30 frames of images constituting the stay animation, the first image (first frame image, frame 1 "1" is stored in the synchronization flag area each time the timing of drawing (displaying) the first image) occurs, and the timing of drawing (displaying) the image of the next frame (second frame, frame 2) of the first image. occurs, a "0" is stored in the synchronization flag area.
As a result, during the loop playback of the stay animation at the hold display position, each time the playback of the stay animation (playback from the first frame, frame 1) is started, only one frame is set to "1" in the synchronization flag area. ” is stored.

Further, in the present embodiment, similarly to the hold position, during the loop playback of the stay animation at the hold 1 display position, of the 30 frames of images constituting the stay animation, the first image (the first frame image/ "1" is stored in the synchronization flag area every time the timing to draw the image of frame 1) occurs, and every time the timing to draw the image of the next frame (the second frame, frame 2) of the first image occurs. , "0" is stored in the synchronization flag area.
With this configuration, even if the stay frame display is not executed at the reservation display position, the newly acquired special figure 2 game information is displayed based on the stay frame display being executed at the reservation 1 display position. It is possible to synchronize the corresponding pending display with the pending display being executed in the Hold 1 display position.
Even with such a configuration, during the execution of the stay animation display at the hold 1 display position, the stay animation display being executed at the hold 1 display position is already displayed at the hold display position. Since it is synchronized with the animation display, the timing at which the first image is drawn (displayed) for the stay animation that is loop-reproduced at the hold display position and the first image for the stay animation that is loop-reproduced at the hold 1 display position are displayed. The drawing (display) timing matches. Also, the timing of drawing (displaying) the image of the next frame of the first image for the stay animation loop-reproduced at the hold display position, and the timing after the first image for the stay animation loop-reproduced at the hold 1 display position. coincides with the timing at which the image of the frame is drawn (displayed).
As a result, the timing (frame) at which "1" is stored in the synchronization flag area based on the stay animation loop-played at the hold display position, and the stay animation loop-played at the hold 1 display position This coincides with the timing (frame) at which "1" is stored in the synchronization flag area. Also, synchronization is performed based on the timing (frame) at which "0" is stored in the synchronization flag area based on the stay animation loop-reproduced at the hold display position, and the stay animation loop-played at the hold 1 display position. This coincides with the timing (frame) at which "0" is stored in the flag area.
Therefore, when the value stored in the synchronization flag area is changed based only on the stay animation loop-played at the hold display position, the stay animation loop-played at the hold display position and the hold 1 display position The period during which "1" is stored in the synchronization flag area does not change even when the value stored in the synchronization flag area is changed based on both of the stay animations that are loop-reproduced in .
Note that the value of the synchronization flag area may be set (stored) based only on the stay animation that is loop-reproduced at the hold display position.

Then, at least at the reserved display position among the reserved display position, the reserved 1 display position, the reserved 2 display position, and the reserved 3 display position, the reserved display (hereinafter referred to as "preceding reserved display") is executed. When the new special figure 2 game information is acquired, the holding display (hereinafter referred to as "subsequent holding display") targeting the newly acquired special figure 2 game information is started. At this time, the winning animation display is first started as the subsequent pending display.
Further, in the subsequent pending display, the standby animation display (standby state) is started in accordance with the end of the winning animation display. After the standby animation display (standby state) is started, the standby animation display (standby state) ends in response to the change of the value stored in the synchronization flag area from "0" to "1". Stay animation display is started.
As a result, reproduction of the stay animation for the subsequent hold display is started at the time when the leading image of the 30 frames of images forming the stay animation for the preceding hold display is drawn (displayed). That is, for the preceding pending display, when the timing at which the first image of the 30 frames of the staying animation is drawn (displayed) occurs, for the subsequent pending display, the 30 frames of the staying animation are displayed. Drawing (display) of the leading image is started.
As described above, the preceding pending display (stay animation display) and the subsequent pending display (stay animation display) are synchronized with each other.

For example, as shown in FIG. 54(c), when the winning animation display of the subsequent pending display ends during the period in which "0" is stored in the synchronization flag area, the winning animation for the subsequent pending display In response to the end of the display, the standby animation display (standby state) is started, and until the timing when the value of the synchronization flag area changes from "0" to "1", the start of the stay animation display (synchronization with the preceding hold display) is continued. Wait. Then, in response to the change of the value of the synchronization flag area from "0" to "1", the standby animation display is ended and the stay animation display is started for the subsequent hold display (synchronized with the preceding hold display). be done.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54(d), when the timing at which the winning animation display of the subsequent pending display ends coincides with the timing at which the value of the synchronization flag area changes from "0" to "1" , for the subsequent pending display, the staying animation display is started (synchronized with the preceding pending display) in accordance with the end of the winning animation display. In this case, the waiting animation display (waiting state) is not executed for the subsequent pending display.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 54 (e), during the period when "1" is stored in the synchronization flag area, when new special figure 2 game information is acquired (newly acquired special figure 2 game Even if the winning animation display of the subsequent pending display for information is started), the timing at which the winning animation display of the subsequent pending display ends is the period in which "0" is stored in the synchronization flag area. As long as it is in the middle, the standby animation display (standby state) is started according to the end of the winning animation display for the subsequent hold display, and until the timing when the value of the synchronization flag area changes from "0" to "1", The start of the dwell animation display (synchronization to the previous hold display) will be awaited.

(Control of pending display)
Next, control of hold display will be described.
As described above, the control ROM 302 of the effect control board 300 stores the animation table. In particular, the animation tables stored in the control ROM 302 include a winning animation table that defines the progress of the winning animation display, a stay animation table that defines the progress of the stay animation display, and a standby animation table that defines the progress of the standby animation display. A table and a subtractive animation table defining the progression of the subtractive animation display are included.

Also, as winning animation tables, a winning animation table 1 corresponding to the display position of Hold 1, a winning animation table 2 corresponding to the display position of Hold 2, a winning animation table 3 corresponding to the display position of Hold 3, and a display position of Hold 4 and a winning animation table 4 corresponding to .
Frame information for 10 frames is registered in each of the winning animation tables 1 to 4 in chronological order. Then, for the ten frames of frame information registered in each of the winning animation tables 1 to 4, images based on each frame information are sequentially displayed according to the order in which they are registered, thereby displaying the winning animation. progresses.
Here, in each frame information registered in the winning animation table 1, coordinate information specifying the coordinates of the hold 1 display position is defined as the coordinate information. On the other hand, in each frame information registered in the winning animation table 2, coordinate information specifying the coordinates of the hold 2 display position is defined as the coordinate information. On the other hand, in each frame information registered in the winning animation table 3, coordinate information specifying the coordinates of the pending 3 display position is defined as the coordinate information. On the other hand, in each frame information registered in the winning animation table 4, coordinate information specifying the coordinates of the hold 4 display position is defined as the coordinate information.
As a result, when the winning animation table 1 is set in the animation table setting area, which will be described later, the winning animation display is executed at the reservation 1 display position. Also, when the winning animation table 2 is set in the animation table setting area, the winning animation display is executed at the reserved 2 display position. Also, when the winning animation table 3 is set in the animation table setting area, the winning animation display is executed at the reserved 3 display position. Also, when the winning animation table 4 is set in the animation table setting area, the winning animation display is executed at the pending 4 display position.
Here, in all of the winning animation tables 1 to 4, the image address information included in each frame information is defined so that the same animation (winning animation) is executed.

Also, as stay animation tables, a stay animation table 0 corresponding to the hold display position, a stay animation table 1 corresponding to the hold 1 display position, a stay animation table 2 corresponding to the hold 2 display position, and a hold 3 display position and a stay animation table 4 corresponding to the pending 4 display position.
Frame information for 30 frames is registered in each stay animation table 0 to 4 in chronological order. Then, for the 30 frames of frame information registered in each of the stay animation tables 0 to 4, an image based on each frame information is sequentially displayed according to the order in which they are registered, thereby displaying the stay animation. progresses.
Here, in each frame information registered in the stay animation table 0, coordinate information specifying the coordinates of the pending display position is defined as the coordinate information. On the other hand, in each frame information registered in the stay animation table 1, coordinate information specifying the coordinates of the hold 1 display position is defined as the coordinate information. On the other hand, in each frame information registered in the stay animation table 2, coordinate information specifying the coordinates of the hold 2 display position is defined as the coordinate information. On the other hand, in each frame information registered in the stay animation table 3, coordinate information specifying the coordinates of the hold 3 display position is defined as the coordinate information. On the other hand, in each frame information registered in the stay animation table 4, coordinate information specifying the coordinates of the hold 4 display position is defined as the coordinate information.
As a result, when the stay animation table 0 is set in the animation table setting area, which will be described later, the stay animation display is executed at the pending display position. Further, when the stay animation table 1 is set in the animation table setting area described later, the stay animation display is executed at the hold 1 display position. Also, when the stay animation table 2 is set in the animation table setting area, the stay animation display is executed at the hold 2 display position. Also, when the stay animation table 3 is set in the animation table setting area, the stay animation display is executed at the hold 3 display position. Also, when the stay animation table 4 is set in the animation table setting area, the stay animation display is executed at the hold 4 display position.
Here, in all the stay animation tables 0 to 4, the image address information included in each frame information is defined so that the same animation (stay animation) is executed.

In particular, out of the 30 frames of frame information registered in the stay animation tables 0 and 1, the frame information corresponding to the first frame (first frame, frame 1) is subjected to the synchronization flag setting process, which will be described later. The specified information (hereinafter referred to as "synchronization flag setting information") is included. Then, when the frame information includes the synchronization flag setting information, the synchronization flag setting process is called.
As will be described later, in the synchronization flag setting process, "1" is stored in the synchronization flag area.
Here, when stay animation tables 0 to 4 are set in the animation table setting area, loop reproduction (repetition of processing based on the animation table) is set for the stay animation table. As a result, in the animation table setting area, during the period in which stay animation tables 0 to 4 are set, the processing based on the frame information for 30 frames registered in the stay animation table is repeatedly executed.
As a result, in the animation table setting area, during the period when stay animation tables 0 and 1 are set, the first frame ( Each time a process based on the frame information corresponding to the first frame (frame 1) is executed, a synchronization flag setting process, which will be described later, is called (executed).
Therefore, in the animation table setting area, the value stored in the synchronization flag area changes from "0" to "1" every 30 frames while the stay animation tables 0 and 1 are set. become.

As standby animation tables, a standby animation table 1 corresponding to the display position of suspension 1, a standby animation table 2 corresponding to the display position of suspension 2, a standby animation table 3 corresponding to the display position of suspension 3, and a display position of suspension 4 and a standby animation table 4 corresponding to .
Frame information for one frame is registered in each of the standby animation tables 1-4. At this time, the frame information registered in each of the standby animation tables 1 to 4 corresponds to the first frame (first frame, frame 1) of the 30 frames of frame information registered in the stay animation table. Image address information is defined so that an image having the same content as the frame information is displayed. By executing the frame information registered in each of the standby animation tables 1 to 4, the standby animation display progresses.
Here, in each frame information registered in the standby animation table 1, coordinate information specifying the coordinates of the hold 1 display position is defined as the coordinate information. On the other hand, in each frame information registered in the standby animation table 2, coordinate information specifying the coordinates of the hold 2 display position is defined as the coordinate information. On the other hand, each frame information registered in the standby animation table 3 defines, as coordinate information, coordinate information specifying the coordinates of the hold 3 display position. On the other hand, in each frame information registered in the standby animation table 4, coordinate information specifying the coordinates of the hold 4 display position is defined as the coordinate information.
Thus, when the standby animation table 1 is set in the animation table setting area described later, the standby animation display is executed at the suspension 1 display position. Also, when the standby animation table 2 is set in the animation table setting area, the standby animation display is executed at the suspension 2 display position. Also, when the standby animation table 3 is set in the animation table setting area, the standby animation display is executed at the pending 3 display position. Also, when the standby animation table 4 is set in the animation table setting area, the standby animation display is executed at the suspension 4 display position.
Here, in all the standby animation tables 1 to 4, the image address information included in the frame information is defined so that the same content of animation (standby animation) is executed.

In particular, the frame information registered in each of the standby animation tables 1 to 4 includes information (hereinafter referred to as "synchronization monitoring information") specifying execution of synchronization monitoring processing, which will be described later. Then, when the frame information includes synchronization monitoring information, synchronization monitoring processing is called.
As will be described later, in the synchronization monitoring process called based on the standby animation tables 1 to 4, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the synchronization flag area is "1". Then, when it is determined that the value stored in the synchronization flag area is "1", a stay animation table is set instead of the standby animation table for the pending display corresponding to the standby animation table. Thereby, the pending display corresponding to the standby animation table is synchronized with the pending display being executed at the pending display position (or the pending 1 display position). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value stored in the synchronization flag area is not "1", the setting of the standby animation table is continued for the suspended display corresponding to the standby animation table.
Here, when each standby animation table 1 to 4 is set in the animation table setting area, loop reproduction (repetition of processing based on the animation table) is set for the standby animation table. As a result, during the period in which one or a plurality of standby animation tables 1 to 4 are set in the animation table setting area, processing based on the frame information registered in the standby animation table for each standby animation table is performed by: Executed repeatedly.
As a result, during the period in which one or a plurality of standby animation tables 1 to 4 are set in the animation table setting area, processing based on the frame information registered in the standby animation table is performed for each standby animation table. The synchronization monitoring process is called (executed) each time it is executed. That is, synchronization monitoring processing is executed for each frame of each standby animation table.

Also, as subtraction animation tables, a subtraction animation table 1 corresponding to the hold 1 display position, a subtraction animation table 2 corresponding to the hold 2 display position, a subtraction animation table 3 corresponding to the hold 3 display position, and a hold 4 display position and a subtraction animation table 4 corresponding to .
Frame information for 10 frames is registered in each of subtraction animation tables 1 to 4. FIG.
Frame information for 10 frames is registered in each of the subtraction animation tables 1 to 4 in chronological order. Then, for the ten frames of frame information registered in each of the subtraction animation tables 1 to 4, images based on each frame information are sequentially displayed according to the order in which they are registered, thereby performing subtraction animation display. progresses.
Here, in the frame information for 10 frames registered in the subtraction animation table 1, coordinate information is defined so that the reserved pattern h moves from the reserved 1 display position to the reserved display position. On the other hand, in the frame information for 10 frames registered in the subtraction animation table 2, coordinate information is defined so that the reserved pattern h moves from the reserved 2 display position to the reserved 1 display position. On the other hand, in the frame information for 10 frames registered in the subtraction animation table 3, the coordinate information is defined so that the reserved pattern h moves from the reserved 3 display position to the reserved 2 display position. On the other hand, in the frame information for 10 frames registered in the subtraction animation table 4, coordinate information is defined so that the reserved pattern h moves from the reserved 4 display position to the reserved 3 display position.
As a result, when the winning animation table 1 is set in the animation table setting area, a subtraction animation display is executed to shift the pending symbol h from the pending 1 display position to the pending display position. In addition, when the winning animation table 2 is set in the animation table setting area, a subtraction animation display is executed to shift the pending symbol h from the pending 2 display position to the pending 1 display position. Further, when the winning animation table 3 is set in the animation table setting area, a subtraction animation display is executed to shift the pending symbol h from the pending 3 display position to the pending 2 display position. Further, when the winning animation table 4 is set in the animation table setting area, a subtraction animation display is executed to shift the pending symbol h from the pending 4 display position to the pending 3 display position.
Here, in all the subtraction animation tables 1 to 4, the image address information included in each frame information is defined so that the same animation (subtraction animation) is executed.

CPU310 of the production control board 300 corresponds to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information in the animation table setting area in response to the reception of the reservation number designation command specifying the increase (addition) of the special figure 2 reservation number A prize-winning animation table and a standby animation table are set as pending display animation tables.
At this time, the winning animation table and the waiting animation table are synthesized (connected) so that the processing based on the waiting animation table is started after the processing based on the winning animation table ends. Also, loop playback is set for the standby animation.
Specifically, when the special figure 2 pending number after addition = "1", the winning animation table 1 and the standby animation table are the animation tables of the pending display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information. Set to 1.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 pending number after plastering = "2", the prize animation table 2 and the standby animation table 2 are used as the animation table of the pending display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information. set.
On the other hand, if the special figure 2 pending number after addition = "3", the winning animation table 3 and the standby animation table 3 are used as the animation table of the pending display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information. set.
On the other hand, if the special figure 2 pending number after addition = "4", the winning animation table 4 and the standby animation table 4 are used as the pending display animation table corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information. set.
As a result, as a pending display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information, the waiting animation display is started after the winning animation display is finished, and the value of the synchronization flag area changes from "0" to "1". Synchronization to previous pending indications will wait until the timing occurs.
Then, in response to the change of the value of the synchronization flag area from "0" to "1", the standby animation table is discarded for the pending display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information, and the stay animation table is set. At this time, loop playback is set for the stay animation table.

On the other hand, the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 sets the animation table for the reserved display corresponding to all the special figures 2 game information in response to the reception of the reserved number designation command specifying the reduction (subtraction) of the special figure 2 reserved number. In the area, discard (delete) the animation table set for each pending display, and set a new subtraction animation table and stay animation table.
At this time, the subtraction animation table and the stay animation table are combined (connected) so that the process based on the stay animation table is started after the process based on the subtraction animation table is completed. Also, loop playback is set for the stay animation table.
Specifically, if the special figure 2 pending number after subtraction = "0", discard the animation table (stay animation table) corresponding to the pending display that has been executed at the pending display position. Also, the animation table (stay animation table or standby animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 1 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 1 and the stay animation table are generated as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 0.
On the other hand, if the special figure 2 pending number after subtraction = "1", discard the animation table (stay animation table) corresponding to the pending display that was being executed at the pending display position. Also, the animation table (stay animation table or standby animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 1 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 1 and the stay animation table are generated as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 0. Also, the animation table (stay animation table or standby animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 2 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 2 and the stay animation table are created as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 1.
On the other hand, if the special figure 2 pending number after subtraction = "2", discard the animation table (stay animation table) corresponding to the pending display that was being executed at the pending display position. Also, the animation table (stay animation table or standby animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 1 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 1 and the stay animation table are generated as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 0. Also, the animation table (stay animation table or standby animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 2 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 2 and the stay animation table are created as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 1. Also, the animation table (stay animation table or standby animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 3 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 3 and the stay animation table are created as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set 2.
On the other hand, if the special figure 2 pending number after subtraction = "3", discard the animation table (stay animation table) corresponding to the pending display that was being executed at the pending display position. Also, the animation table (stay animation table or standby animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 1 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 1 and the stay animation table are generated as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 0. Also, the animation table (stay animation table or standby animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 2 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 2 and the stay animation table are created as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 1. Also, the animation table (stay animation table or standby animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 3 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 3 and the stay animation table are created as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set 2. Also, the animation table (the stay animation table or the standby animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 4 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 4 and the stay animation table are created as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set 3.
As a result, as a pending display corresponding to one or more special figure 2 game information, during the period when the standby animation display is being executed, when a pending number designation command specifying a decrease in the special figure 2 pending number is received , after the subtraction animation display is executed for the suspension display corresponding to all the special figure 2 game information, the stay animation display is started at the same time, and the contents of the suspension display are synchronized.

(Regarding specific examples of pending display progress)
Next, a specific example of progress of pending display will be described.
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the progress of the pending display according to the first example. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the progress of the pending display according to the second example. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing the progress of the pending display according to the third example. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the progress of the pending display according to the fourth example. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the progress of the pending display according to the fifth example. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing the progress of the pending display according to the sixth example.
Here, FIGS. 55 to 60 show the progress (control) of the pending display executed during the time saving control. In addition, even during stop of time saving control, a pending|holding display advances (controls) by the method same as the case during execution of the time saving control shown in FIGS. 55-60.

(first example)
FIG. 55 shows that when the special game (notification display of special symbols/jackpot game state) is not executed, and the number of special figures 2 pending = "0", the number of special figures 2 is increased by "1" ( If one special figure 2 game information is acquired) shows the progress of the pending display.
As shown in FIG. 55, during the non-execution of the special game, and during the state of special figure 2 pending number = "0", new special figure 2 game information (hereinafter referred to as "subsequent game information") is acquired Then, in response to this, the pending display (display of the pending symbol h) targeting the subsequent game information is started.
At this time, as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information, first, the winning animation display is started at the hold 1 display position.
Further, according to the end of the winning animation display at the hold 1 display position, the hold display position for executing the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information moves (shifts) from the hold 1 display position to the hold display position. That is, the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 1 display position is executed as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information. Thereby, the reserved pattern h corresponding to the succeeding game information moves (shifts) from the reserved 1 display position to the reserved display position.
Furthermore, in response to the termination of the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 1 display position, the stay animation display is started at the hold display position as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information.
And, according to the end of the stop display of the special symbol corresponding to the subsequent game information, the suspension display (stay animation display at the suspension display position) corresponding to the subsequent game information is terminated.

(Second example)
FIG. 56 shows that during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, and from the state of special figure 2 pending number = "0", when the special figure 2 pending number increases by "1" (one special figure 2 game information is obtained).
As shown in FIG. 56, during the variable display of the second special symbol based on the preceding game information, and the state of special figure 2 pending number = "0" (the pending display position, the pending 1 display position, the pending 2 display position, Hold 3 display position, and, of the hold 4 display position, only at the hold display position, the hold display (stay animation display) corresponding to the preceding game information is being executed), new special figure 2 game information (hereinafter referred to as "subsequent game information") is acquired, accordingly, the number of special figures 2 pending is increased to "1", and the pending display (display of pending pattern h ) is started.
At this time, as the suspension display corresponding to the subsequent game information, the winning animation display is first started at the suspension 1 display position. Also, the standby animation display is started in accordance with the end of the winning animation display. Furthermore, after waiting for the value of the synchronization flag area to change from "0" to "1", the standby animation display is terminated and the stay animation display is started. Thereby, the pending display corresponding to the subsequent game information is synchronized with the staying animation display corresponding to the preceding game information.

(Third example)
FIG. 57 shows that when the special figure 2 reservation number decreases from the state of special figure 2 reservation number = "1" (the stop display of the second special symbol ends, and the start determination based on the special figure 2 game information is executed shows the progress of pending indications in
As shown in FIG. 57, in the state of special figure 2 reserved number = "1", the stop display of the second special symbol based on the preceding game information is terminated, and when the special figure 2 reserved number is reduced to "0", this , the pending display corresponding to the preceding game information at the pending display position is terminated, and the pending display position for executing the pending display corresponding to the subsequent game information moves from the pending 1 display position to the pending display position. (shift.
That is, the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 1 display position is executed as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information. Thereby, the reserved pattern h corresponding to the succeeding game information moves (shifts) from the reserved 1 display position to the reserved display position.
Furthermore, in response to the termination of the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 1 display position, the stay animation display is started at the hold display position as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information.
And, according to the end of the stop display of the special symbol corresponding to the subsequent game information, the suspension display (stay animation display at the suspension display position) corresponding to the subsequent game information is terminated.

(Fourth example)
FIG. 58 shows that during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, and from the state of special figure 2 pending number = "1", when the special figure 2 pending number increases by "3" (three special figure 2 game information are obtained sequentially).
As shown in FIG. 58, during the variable display of the second special symbol based on the preceding game information 1, and the state of the special figure 2 pending number = "1" (the pending display position, the pending 1 display position, the pending 2 display position , the hold 3 display position, and the hold 4 display position, at the hold display position, the hold display (stay animation display) corresponding to the preceding game information 1 is executed, and at the hold 1 display position, the preceding In the state where the pending display (stay animation display) corresponding to the game information 2 is being executed), when new special figure 2 game information (hereinafter referred to as "subsequent game information 1") is acquired, according to this As a result, the special figure 2 reservation number increases to "2", and the reservation display (display of the reservation pattern h) targeting the subsequent game information 1 is started.
At this time, as the pending display corresponding to the subsequent game information 1, the winning animation display is first started at the pending 2 display position. Also, the standby animation display is started in accordance with the end of the winning animation display. Furthermore, after waiting for the value of the synchronization flag area to change from "0" to "1", the standby animation display is terminated and the stay animation display is started. Thereby, the pending display corresponding to the succeeding game information 1 is synchronized with the pending display corresponding to the preceding game information 1,2.
Also, during the variable display of the second special symbol based on the preceding game information 1, and the state of the special figure 2 pending number = "2" (the pending display position, the pending 1 display position, the pending 2 display position, the pending 3 display position , and, of the hold 4 display positions, the hold display (stay animation display) corresponding to the preceding game information 1 is executed at the hold display position, and at the hold 1 display position, the hold 1 display position corresponds to the preceding game information 2 The pending display (stay animation display) is being executed, and the pending display (winning animation display) corresponding to the subsequent game information 1 is being executed at the pending 2 display position), a new special figure 2 When the game information (hereinafter referred to as "subsequent game information 2") is acquired, the special figure 2 pending number is increased to "3" accordingly, and the pending display (suspended display of pattern h) is started.
At this time, as the suspension display corresponding to the subsequent game information 2, the winning animation display is first started at the suspension 3 display position. Also, the standby animation display is started in accordance with the end of the winning animation display. Furthermore, after waiting for the value of the synchronization flag area to change from "0" to "1", the standby animation display is terminated and the stay animation display is started. Thereby, the pending display corresponding to the subsequent game information 2 is synchronized with the pending display corresponding to the preceding game information 1 and 2 and the pending display corresponding to the subsequent game information 1 .
Furthermore, during the variable display of the second special symbol based on the preceding game information, and the state of the special figure 2 pending number = "3" (the pending display position, the pending 1 display position, the pending 2 display position, the pending 3 display position, And, of the hold 4 display positions, the hold display (stay animation display) corresponding to the preceding game information 1 is executed at the hold display position, and at the hold 1 display position, the hold display corresponding to the preceding game information 2 A pending display (stay animation display) is being executed, and a pending display (winning animation display) corresponding to the subsequent game information 1 is being executed at the pending 2 display position, and at the pending 3 display position, the subsequent When the new special figure 2 game information (hereinafter referred to as "subsequent game information 3") is acquired in the state where the pending display (winning animation display) corresponding to the game information 2 is being executed, As a result, the special figure 2 reservation number increases to "4", and the reservation display (display of the reservation pattern h) targeting the subsequent game information 3 is started.
At this time, as the pending display corresponding to the subsequent game information 3, the winning animation display is first started at the pending 4 display position. Also, the standby animation display is started in accordance with the end of the winning animation display. Furthermore, after waiting for the value of the synchronization flag area to change from "0" to "1", the standby animation display is terminated and the stay animation display is started. Thereby, the pending display corresponding to the subsequent game information 3 is synchronized with the pending display corresponding to the preceding game information 1 and 2 and the pending display corresponding to the subsequent game information 1 and 2. - 特許庁

(Fifth example)
FIG. 59 shows that when the special figure 2 reservation number decreases from the state of special figure 2 reservation number = "4" (the stop display of the second special symbol ends, and the start determination based on the special figure 2 game information is executed shows the progress of pending indications in
As shown in FIG. 57, in the state of special figure 2 reserved number = "4", the stop display of the second special symbol based on the preceding game information 1 is terminated, and when the special figure 2 reserved number is reduced to "3", Accordingly, the pending display corresponding to the preceding game information 1 at the pending display position is terminated, and the pending display position for executing the pending display corresponding to the preceding game information 2 is shifted from the pending 1 display position to the pending display. The holding display position that moves (shifts) to the position and executes the holding display corresponding to the subsequent game information 1 moves (shifts) from the holding 2 display position to the holding 1 display position and holds the holding display corresponding to the subsequent game information 2. is moved (shifted) from the hold 3 display position to the hold 2 display position, and the hold display position for executing the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 3 shifts from the hold 4 display position to the hold 3 display position Move (shift) to
That is, as the hold display corresponding to the preceding game information 2, the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 1 display position is executed. As a result, the pending symbol h corresponding to the preceding game information 1 moves (shifts) from the pending 1 display position to the pending display position. Also, as the suspension display corresponding to the subsequent game information 1, the subtraction animation display corresponding to the suspension 2 display position is executed. As a result, the pending symbol h corresponding to the subsequent game information 1 moves (shifts) from the pending 2 display position to the pending 1 display position. Also, as the suspension display corresponding to the subsequent game information 2, a subtraction animation display corresponding to the suspension 3 display position is executed. As a result, the pending symbol h corresponding to the subsequent game information 2 moves (shifts) from the pending 3 display position to the pending 2 display position. Also, as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 3, a subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 4 display position is executed. As a result, the pending symbol h corresponding to the subsequent game information 3 moves (shifts) from the pending 4 display position to the pending 3 display position.
Further, when the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 1 display position ends, the stay animation display is started at the hold display position as the hold display corresponding to the preceding game information 1 . Further, in accordance with the end of the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 2 display position, the stay animation display is started at the hold 1 display position as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 1 . Further, in accordance with the end of the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 3 display position, the stay animation display is started at the hold 2 display position as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 2 . Further, in accordance with the end of the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 4 display position, the stay animation display is started at the hold 3 display position as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 3 .
After that, the stop display of the second special symbol based on the preceding game information 2 is terminated, and when the special figure 2 reservation number is reduced to "2", accordingly, the reservation corresponding to the preceding game information 2 at the reservation display position As the display is terminated, the pending display position for executing the pending display corresponding to the subsequent game information 1 moves (shifts) from the pending 1 display position to the pending display position, and the pending display corresponding to the subsequent game information 2 is displayed. The hold display position to be executed moves (shifts) from the hold 2 display position to the hold 1 display position, and the hold display position to execute the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 3 shifts from the hold 3 display position to the hold 2 display position. Move (shift).
In addition, when the stop display of the second special symbol based on the subsequent game information 1 is terminated and the special figure 2 reservation number decreases to "1", accordingly, the reservation corresponding to the subsequent game information 1 at the reservation display position As the display is terminated, the pending display position where the pending display corresponding to the subsequent game information 2 is executed moves (shifts) from the pending 1 display position to the pending display position, and the pending display corresponding to the subsequent game information 3 is displayed. is executed moves (shifts) from the hold 2 display position to the hold 1 display position.
Furthermore, when the stop display of the second special symbol based on the subsequent game information 2 is terminated and the special figure 2 reservation number decreases to "0", accordingly, the reservation corresponding to the subsequent game information 2 at the reservation display position As the display ends, the pending display position for executing the pending display corresponding to the subsequent game information 3 moves (shifts) from the pending display position 1 to the pending display position.
Then, according to the termination of the stop display of the special symbols corresponding to the subsequent game information 3, the pending display (display of the stay animation at the pending display position) corresponding to the subsequent game information 3 is ended.

(6th example)
Figure 60, during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, and from the state of special figure 2 pending number = "2", special figure 2 pending number is increased by "2" (two special figure 2 game information , sequentially acquired), and then before the timing at which the value of the synchronization flag area changes from "0" to "1" occurs, if the number of special figures 2 pending decreases (the stop display of the second special symbol It ends and shows the progress of the pending display in (when the start determination based on the special figure 2 game information is executed).
As shown in FIG. 60, during the variable display of the second special symbol based on the preceding game information 1, and the state of the special figure 2 pending number = "1" (the pending display position, the pending 1 display position, the pending 2 display position , the hold 3 display position, and the hold 4 display position, at the hold display position, the hold display (stay animation display) corresponding to the preceding game information 1 is executed, and at the hold 1 display position, the preceding In the state where the pending display (stay animation display) corresponding to the game information 2 is being executed), when new special figure 2 game information (hereinafter referred to as "subsequent game information 1") is acquired, according to this As a result, the special figure 2 reservation number increases to "2", and the reservation display (display of the reservation pattern h) targeting the subsequent game information 1 is started.
At this time, as the pending display corresponding to the subsequent game information 1, the winning animation display is first started at the pending 2 display position. Also, the standby animation display is started in accordance with the end of the winning animation display.
Also, during the variable display of the second special symbol based on the preceding game information 1, and the state of the special figure 2 pending number = "2" (the pending display position, the pending 1 display position, the pending 2 display position, the pending 3 display position , and, of the hold 4 display positions, the hold display (stay animation display) corresponding to the preceding game information 1 is executed at the hold display position, and at the hold 1 display position, the hold 1 display position corresponds to the preceding game information 2 The pending display (stay animation display) is being executed, and the pending display (winning animation display) corresponding to the subsequent game information 1 is being executed at the pending 2 display position), a new special figure 2 When the game information (hereinafter referred to as "subsequent game information 2") is acquired, the special figure 2 pending number is increased to "3" accordingly, and the pending display (suspended display of pattern h) is started.
At this time, as the suspension display corresponding to the subsequent game information 2, the winning animation display is first started at the suspension 3 display position. Also, the standby animation display is started in accordance with the end of the winning animation display.
After the start of the standby animation corresponding to the subsequent game information 1 and the standby animation corresponding to the subsequent game information 2, and before the timing at which the value of the synchronization flag area changes from "0" to "1", the preceding game information 1 When the stop display of the second special symbol based on is terminated and the special figure 2 reservation number is reduced to "2", accordingly, the reservation display corresponding to the preceding game information 1 at the reservation display position is terminated. , the holding display position for executing the holding display corresponding to the preceding game information 2 moves (shifts) from the holding 1 display position to the holding display position, and the holding display position for executing the holding display corresponding to the subsequent game information 1 is , moves (shifts) from the hold 2 display position to the hold 1 display position, and the hold display position for executing the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 2 moves (shifts) from the hold 3 display position to the hold 2 display position.
That is, as the hold display corresponding to the preceding game information 2, the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 1 display position is executed. As a result, the pending symbol h corresponding to the preceding game information 1 moves (shifts) from the pending 1 display position to the pending display position. Also, as the suspension display corresponding to the subsequent game information 1, the subtraction animation display corresponding to the suspension 2 display position is executed. As a result, the pending symbol h corresponding to the subsequent game information 1 moves (shifts) from the pending 2 display position to the pending 1 display position. Furthermore, as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 2, the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 3 display position is executed. As a result, the pending symbol h corresponding to the subsequent game information 2 moves (shifts) from the pending 3 display position to the pending 2 display position.
Then, according to the end of the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 1 display position, the stay animation display is started at the hold display position as the hold display corresponding to the preceding game information 1 . Further, in accordance with the end of the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 2 display position, the stay animation display is started at the hold 1 display position as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 1 . Furthermore, in accordance with the end of the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 3 display position, the stay animation display is started at the hold 2 display position as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 2 .
As described above, in this case, the termination of the subtraction animation is not triggered by the change of the value of the synchronization flag area from "0" to "1" for the pending display corresponding to the subsequent game information 1 and 2. As a trigger, it is synchronized with the pending display corresponding to the preceding game information 1,2.

(Type of pending display)
Next, the types of pending display will be described.
In this embodiment, as the types of the hold display, the normal hold display and the reduced working hours hold display are defined.
The normal time suspension display is a type of suspension display that is executed while the time saving control is stopped.
The time saving display is a type of the holding display executed during the execution of the time saving control.
The period (one period) of operation|movement (stay animation display) during stay differs by the normal time holding|maintenance display and the time-saving holding|maintenance display. In the present embodiment, the period of operation during stay is configured to be shorter in the shorter working hours on hold display than in the normal on hold display. Concretely, the action during stay of the normal hold display is composed of 40 frames. On the other hand, the action during stay of the time saving display is composed of 30 frames. In addition, the period of operation|movement during stay may be comprised longer than the normal time suspension display in the time saving time suspension display.
Further, the mode of the reserved design h is different between the normal time reserved display and the time saving reserved display. That is, in the normal-time pending display, a pending symbol h (hereinafter referred to as a "sphere pending symbol") consisting of a predetermined sphere is displayed. On the other hand, in the time saving display, a reserved pattern h (hereinafter referred to as a "character reserved pattern") consisting of a predetermined character is displayed.
Furthermore, the operating mode of the operation during stay is different between the normal time holding display and the time saving holding display. That is, in the normal holding display, as the action during stay, an action of swinging the sphere holding pattern in a predetermined manner is performed. On the other hand, in the time saving display, an action of rotating the character reserved design in a predetermined manner is executed as the action during stay.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute a suspension notice as a look-ahead notice effect.
"Holding notice" is a type of pre-reading notice effect. That is, the pending notice is the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on the predetermined game information, the mode of the pending display (specifically, the pending pattern h) corresponding to the game information (specifically, It is a production that suggests by color).
In this embodiment, the pending notice is an effect that suggests the result of pre-special symbol determination based on predetermined game information (specifically, the possibility of being a "jackpot symbol"). It should be noted that the pending notice may be configured to suggest the result of prior special figure variation pattern determination (specifically, the possibility of being "super reach variation") based on predetermined game information.

In the present embodiment, as types of normal hold display, normal default hold display and normal special hold display are defined.
The normal default hold display is a type of hold display that is not subject to hold notice. That is, the normal default hold display is a type of hold display that does not suggest the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8).
The normal special hold display is a type of hold display that is subject to a hold notice. That is, the normal special hold display is a type of hold display suggesting the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8).
In this embodiment, the colors of the reserved symbols h are different between the normal default reserved display and the normal special reserved display. Specifically, in the normal default hold display, a “white” sphere hold pattern is displayed. On the other hand, in the normal special hold display, a sphere hold pattern of a color other than "white" is displayed.
In the normal default pending display and normal special pending display, the configuration excluding the color of the pending pattern h (specifically, the mode of the pending pattern h, the mode of operation during stay, the cycle of operation during stay, etc.) are the same.

Further, as the type of the normal special hold display, a plurality of types of normal special hold display with different colors of the reserved pattern h are stipulated. Then, in the reservation notice executed while the time saving control is stopped, the degree of expectation for a big hit is suggested by the color of the ball reservation pattern. Specifically, as types of normal special hold display, a first normal special hold display in which a “blue” sphere hold pattern is displayed, and a second normal time special hold display in which a “red” sphere hold pattern is displayed A display and a third normal special hold display in which a “golden” sphere hold pattern is displayed are defined.
In addition, in the first normal special reservation display, the second normal special reservation display, and the third normal special reservation display, the configuration excluding the color of the reservation design h (specifically, the mode of the reservation design h, during stay The operation mode of the operation, the cycle of the operation during the stay, etc.) are the same.
Then, the jackpot expectations for each type of normal special hold display are "third normal special hold display", "second normal special hold display", and "first normal special hold display" in descending order of the big hit expectation. It is defined to be "special hold display" (high expectation for big hit → low expectation for big hit).
"Big hit expectation" means the possibility (degree) of occurrence of a big hit gaming state when the type is selected.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as types of the time saving display, a time saving default setting display and a working time saving special setting display are defined.
The time saving default hold display is a type of hold display that is not subject to hold notice. That is, the time saving default pending display is a type of pending display that does not suggest the result of the prior determination (step S9-8).
The time saving special hold display is a type of hold display that is the target of the hold notice. That is, the time saving special pending display is a type of pending display that suggests the result of the prior determination (step S9-8).
In the present embodiment, the color of the reserved pattern h is different between the time saving default reserved display and the time saving special reserved display. Concretely, in the time saving default holding display, a “white” character holding pattern is displayed. On the other hand, in the time saving special holding display, character holding patterns of colors other than "white" are displayed.
In the time-saving default pending display and the time-saving special pending display, the configuration excluding the color of the pending pattern h (specifically, the mode of the pending pattern h, the mode of operation during stay, the cycle of operation during stay, etc.) are the same.

In addition, as the type of the time saving special holding display, a plurality of types of time saving special holding display with different colors of the reserved pattern h are defined. In the pending notice executed during execution of the time saving control, the degree of expectation for a big hit is suggested by the color of the character pending symbol. Specifically, as the types of time saving special holding display, the first time saving special holding display in which the “blue” character holding pattern is displayed and the second working time special holding display in which the “red” character holding pattern is displayed A display and a third short-time special hold display in which a “golden” character hold pattern is displayed are defined.
In addition, in the first time reduction special reservation display, the second time reduction special reservation display, and the third time reduction special reservation display, the configuration excluding the color of the reservation design h (specifically, the reservation design h mode, during stay The operation mode of the operation, the cycle of the operation during the stay, etc.) are the same.
And the jackpot expectations for each type of time saving special hold display are, in order from the one with the highest jackpot expectation, "3rd time saving special holding display", "2nd time saving special holding display", "1st time saving It is defined to be "special hold display" (high expectation for big hit → low expectation for big hit).

In particular, the pachinko machine 1 is configured such that the operations during stay are synchronized with respect to a plurality of pending displays in which the operations during stay are executed at the same cycle.
In other words, if the normal special hold display (hold notice) is started while the normal default hold display is being executed, the stay action of the normal special hold display will be synchronized with the stay action of the normal default hold display. be.
Also, if the normal default hold display is started while the normal special hold display (hold notice) is being executed, the stay action of the normal default hold display will be synchronized with the stay action of the normal special hold display. be.
Similarly, if the time saving special hold display (hold notice) is started while the time saving default hold display is running, the operation during stay of the time saving special hold display is synchronized with the operation during stay of the time saving default hold display be done.
Also, if the short-time default hold display is started while the short-time special hold display (hold notice) is running, the behavior during the stay of the short-time default hold display will be synchronized with the operation during the stay of the short-time special hold display. be.

On the other hand, for a plurality of pending displays in which the actions during stay are executed in different cycles, the actions during stay are not synchronized. In particular, in the present embodiment, a plurality of on-hold displays, in which actions during stay are executed at different cycles, are not executed at the same time.
That is, the time saving default suspension display is not started during execution of the normal default suspension display. In addition, during the execution of the normal special hold display, the time saving default hold display is not started. In addition, the time saving special hold display is not started during the execution of the normal default hold display. Also, during the execution of the normal special hold display, the time saving special hold display is not started. In these cases, according to the start of time saving control, all normal time holding|maintenance displays are complete|finished, and it switches to working hour holding|maintenance display.
Similarly, normal time default suspension display is not started during execution of time saving default suspension display. Also, during execution of the time saving special hold display, the normal default hold display is not started. Also, during the execution of the time saving default hold display, the normal special hold display is not started. Also, during the execution of the time saving special hold display, the normal special hold display is not started. In these cases, after the end of the time saving control, the normal time holding display is started after digestion (end) of all the time saving time holding display.
As described above, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a plurality of types of pending displays with different periods of operations during stay are executed at the same time, and to prevent the contents of pending displays from becoming complicated. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the hold display.

(Variation production)
Next, the variation performance executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the following description, the first production design z1 displayed in the first production design display area a1 is assumed to be the "left design", and the first production design z1 displayed in the first production design display area a2 is assumed to be the "middle design". , the first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a3 is referred to as a "right symbol".
In this embodiment, the second effect symbol z2 is always variably displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 during execution of the variable effect (first half variable effect and second half variable effect).

First, each aspect of the first half variation production will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, as the variation mode numbers, a variation mode number corresponding to "pseudo continuous variation", a variation mode number corresponding to "pseudo continuous 2 variation", and a variation mode number corresponding to "pseudo continuous 3 variation" and are stipulated.
In addition, as categories (types) of the first half variable performance, "pseudo-continuous no-variation performance", "pseudo-continuous 2-variation performance", and "pseudo-continuous 3-variation performance" are defined.
Furthermore, as a pattern (mode) belonging to each category of the first half variable effect, one pattern or a plurality of patterns with different effect contents are defined.
Then, when a variation mode number corresponding to "pseudo continuous variation" is specified by the variation mode specifying command, "pseudo continuous variation performance" is selected as the category of the first half variation performance. On the other hand, when the variation mode number corresponding to "pseudo-continuation 2 variation" is specified by the variation mode designation command, "pseudo-continuation 2 variation performance" is selected as the category of the first half variation performance. On the other hand, when the variation mode number corresponding to the "pseudo continuation 3 variation" is specified by the variation mode specification command, the "pseudo continuation 3 variation presentation" is selected as the category of the first half variation presentation.

The "pseudo consecutive non-variable effect" includes a display effect in which the normal variable display of the first special symbol z1 is executed in each of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3.
"Normal fluctuation display" is a display in which the types of the first performance symbols z1 displayed at the lottery result display positions of the first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3 are sequentially replaced at a constant tempo.
The “lottery result display position” is the position where the first effect symbol z1 is stopped and displayed in the stop effect.
Concretely, in the "pseudo consecutive non-fluctuation effect", the normal fluctuation display of each symbol is sequentially started in the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol.

"Pseudo-continuous variation effect"("pseudo-continuous 2-variation effect", "pseudo-continuous 3-variation effect") is that during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol once, the variable display of the first effect symbol z1 is simulated. In addition, it is a production of the content that is executed multiple times. Specifically, the pseudo-continuous variation effect is configured including a plurality of times of the pseudo-variation effect.
Here, the "pseudo-continuous 2-fluctuation effect" includes two pseudo-fluctuation effects. On the other hand, the "pseudo-continuous 3-fluctuation effect" includes three pseudo-fluctuation effects.
In each pseudo-variation effect, temporary stop display of the first effect symbol z1 is executed after the normal variation display of the first special symbol z1 is executed in each of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. It is configured including the display rendering of the contents.
"Temporary stop display" is a pseudo stop display. Concretely, the temporary stop display is a display in which one type of first effect symbol z1 remains in a state of moving in a predetermined manner (swinging, rotating, etc.) at the lottery result display position.
The “stop display” is a display of content in which one type of first effect symbol z1 remains stopped at the lottery result display position.
Specifically, in the pseudo-fluctuation effect of each time, after the normal fluctuation display of each pattern is started in the order of the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern, the left pattern, the right pattern, and the middle pattern are temporarily stopped in the order. display is performed.
In particular, in each pseudo-fluctuation effect, the combination of the first effect symbol z1 temporarily stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is a "missing eye", a "reach eye", and a "chance eye". Any combination of these. Here, in the final pseudo-fluctuation effect, the combination of the first effect symbol z1 temporarily stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 becomes a "ready-to-win" state, establishing a ready-to-win state.
The ``missing eye'' is a combination not included in the ``jackpot pattern'' (specifically, a combination of different types of left, middle and right symbols) (except for specific combinations described later).
The "ready-to-win" is a combination included in the "jackpot pattern" (specifically, a combination in which the types of the left pattern and the right pattern are the same).
"Chance eye" is a specific combination (for example, "1, 2, 3”, etc.).
"Reaching state" means that the first effect symbol z1 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the two first effect symbol display areas among the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, and the first effect symbol z1 is temporarily stopped and displayed. The combination of the production pattern z1 is in a state of being a combination included in the "big hit pattern".

Next, each aspect of the second half variation production will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, as the variation pattern numbers, a variation pattern number corresponding to "non-reach variation", a variation pattern number corresponding to "normal reach variation", and a variation pattern number corresponding to "super reach variation" are specified. It is
In addition, as categories (types) of the second half variable performance, "non-reach variable performance", "normal reach variable performance", and "super reach variable performance" are defined.
Furthermore, as a pattern (mode) belonging to each category of the second half variable effect, one pattern or a plurality of patterns with different effect contents are defined.
Then, when a variation pattern number corresponding to "variation without reach" is specified by the variation pattern specification command, "variation performance without reach" is selected as the category of the second half variation performance. On the other hand, when the variation pattern number corresponding to "normal reach variation" is specified by the variation pattern specification command, "normal reach variation effect" is selected as the category of the second half variation effect. On the other hand, when a variation pattern number corresponding to "super reach variation" is specified by the variation pattern specification command, "super reach variation effect" is selected as the category of the second half variation effect.

The "non-reach fluctuation effect" is an effect that is executed following the "pseudo continuous non-fluctuation effect".
In this embodiment, as "no-reach fluctuation production", "no-reach fluctuation production (loss)" that is executed when the result of the determination of the special figure is "loss", and the result of the judgment of the special figure is "jackpot "No-reach variation effect (big hit)" to be executed in the case of ".
"No-reach fluctuation production"("No-reach fluctuation production (loss)" · "No-reach fluctuation production (jackpot)") is the first special pattern z1 in each of the three first production pattern display areas a1 to a3. It is configured to include a display rendering of the content for which the normal variable display is executed.
Concretely, in the ``non-reach fluctuation presentation'', after the normal fluctuation display of the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern is executed, each pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern.
At this time, in the "non-reach variable effect (loss)", the combination of the first effect symbols z1 temporarily stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 becomes the "loss symbol".
On the other hand, in the "non-reach fluctuation effect (big hit)", the combination of the first effect symbols z1 temporarily stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 becomes the "big hit symbol".

"Normal reach fluctuation effect" is an effect that is executed following the "pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect"("pseudo-continuous 2-fluctuation effect" and "pseudo-continuous 3-fluctuation effect").
In this embodiment, as "normal reach variation effect", "normal reach variation effect (loss)" that is executed when the result of the special figure hit determination is "miss", and the result of the special figure hit determination is "jackpot". "Normal reach variation effect (jackpot)" to be executed in a certain case is defined.
"Normal reach fluctuation effect"("Normal reach change effect (lost)" / "Normal reach change effect (big hit)") is an effect executed during the formation of the reach state, and whether or not the "jackpot pattern" is established After inciting , the ``big hit pattern'' is not established, or the contents of the ``big hit pattern'' are established.
Specifically, in the "normal ready-to-win fluctuation effect", the middle symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed after the ready-to-win effect image is displayed during the period in which the left symbol and the right symbol form the ready-to-win state.
At this time, in the "normal reach fluctuation effect (lost)", the middle symbols of a type different from the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed (the "jackpot symbol" is not established).
On the other hand, in the "normal reach fluctuation effect (big win)", the middle symbols of the same type as the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed ("big hit symbol" is established).
The ``ready-to-win effect image'' is a effect image with content that encourages the temporary stop display of middle symbols of the same type as the left and right symbols (the establishment of a ``jackpot symbol''). In this embodiment, as the ready-to-win effect images, an image in which the character included in the medium pattern performs a predetermined action and an image in which the medium pattern is given a predetermined effect are displayed.

The "super reach variation effect" is an effect that is executed following the "pseudo-continuous variation effect"("pseudo-continuous 2-variable effect" and "pseudo-continuous 3-variable effect").
In this embodiment, as "super reach variation effect", "super reach variation effect (loss)" that is executed when the result of the special hit determination is "miss", and the result of the special hit determination is "jackpot "super reach variation effect (jackpot)" to be executed in the case of ".
"Super reach variation effect"("super reach change effect (loss)", "super reach change effect (jackpot)") is an effect executed during the formation of the reach state, and the "jackpot pattern" is established. After inciting whether or not, the display of the content that avoids the establishment of the "big hit pattern" is executed, and then the variable display of the middle pattern is resumed, and then the content that develops from the ready-to-win state to the advanced reach state is displayed. is executed, and after again inciting whether or not the ``big win pattern'' is established, the ``big hit pattern'' is not established or the contents of the ``big hit pattern'' are established.
In the "developed reach state", the two first special symbols z1 forming the reach state are displayed in reduced size. In this embodiment, the developed reach state is formed by reducing the left and right symbols forming the reach state and displaying them at the upper end of the display screen 31a. In addition, during the period in which the developed reach state is formed, the medium symbols are not displayed.
Specifically, in the "super reach fluctuation effect", during the period when the left pattern and the right pattern form the reach state, after the above reach effect image is displayed, The symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, then the variable display of the medium symbols is resumed, and then the developed reach state is formed. The symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.
At this time, in the "super reach variation effect (lost)", the middle symbols of a type different from the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed (the "jackpot symbol" is not established).
On the other hand, in the "super reach variation effect (big win)", the middle symbols of the same type as the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed ("big hit symbol" is established).
The "advanced ready-to-win effect image" is a effect image with content that encourages the temporary stop display of middle symbols of the same type as the left and right symbols (establishment of "big hit symbol"). In this embodiment, a predetermined background image is displayed as the developed reach effect image.

(Main notice production)
Next, the main notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
The "main notice effect" is a effect that is executed during the variable effect, and is a effect that suggests the result of the start determination (special figure hit determination, special symbol pattern determination, special figure variation pattern determination, etc.) related to the variable effect. It has become.
In this embodiment, the main notice effect suggests the result of the special symbol determination (specifically, the possibility of being a "big hit symbol").
In this embodiment, a plurality of types with different content of effects are defined as the types of the main notice effect.

(stop production)
Next, the stop effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
"Stop effect" is a effect that is executed during the stop display of the special symbols.
In the stop effect, the first effect symbol z1 is stop-displayed in each of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, and the second effect symbol z2 is stop-displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. .

(Big hit production)
Next, the jackpot effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The big-hit performance is a performance that is executed while the big-hit game state is occurring.
In the pachinko machine 1, "jackpot presentation 1" to "jackpot presentation 6" are defined as the categories (types) of the jackpot presentation.
Also, one pattern or a plurality of patterns with different content of effects are defined as patterns (modes) belonging to each category of the jackpot effects.
Then, when the stop symbol number corresponding to the "big win 1 symbol" is specified by the opening designation command, "big win effect 1" is selected as the category of the big win effect. On the other hand, when the stop symbol number corresponding to the "big hit 2 symbol" is specified by the opening designation command, the "big win effect 2" is selected as the category of the big win effect. When a stop symbol number corresponding to "big hit 3 symbols" is specified by the opening designation command, "big win effect 3" is selected as the category of the big win effect. When a stop symbol number corresponding to "big hit 4 symbols" is specified by the opening designation command, "big win effect 4" is selected as the category of the big win effect. When a stop symbol number corresponding to "big hit 5 symbols" is specified by the opening designation command, "big win effect 5" is selected as the category of the big win effect. When a stop pattern number corresponding to "6 jackpot patterns" is specified by the opening designation command, "jackpot performance 6" is selected as the category of the jackpot performance.

The jackpot performance includes an opening performance performed during the opening period, an interval performance performed during the interval period, a round performance performed during the round game, an ending performance performed during the ending period, and the like. there is
The "opening period" is a period from the start of the jackpot gaming state until the opening time elapses.
The "interval period" is the period from the end of the opening period to the start of the first round game, or the period from the end of each round game to the start of the next round game.
The ending period is a period from the end of the interval period after the end of the final round game until the ending time elapses.

(Processing executed by production control board 300)
Next, processing executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
In this embodiment, command reception interrupt processing, sub timer interrupt processing, and movable body interrupt processing, which will be described later, are interrupt processing executed by an interrupt handler. On the other hand, Vsync interrupt processing, sound interrupt processing, and lamp interrupt processing, which will be described later, are interrupt processing (tasks) that can be executed in parallel at the same time by multitasking.
Here, Vsync interrupt processing, sound interrupt processing, and lamp interrupt processing may also be configured as interrupt processing executed by an interrupt handler.

(Sub CPU initialization processing)
First, the sub-CPU initialization process executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing sub CPU initialization processing.
A reset circuit (not shown) is arranged on the performance control board 300 . The reset circuit generates a reset signal when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.
CPU310 of the production|presentation control board 300 starts the sub CPU initialization process shown in FIG. 38 according to generation|occurrence|production of the reset signal by a reset circuit.
When the sub CPU initialization process is started, first, the process moves to step S28-1.
In step S28-1, an initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-2. In the initial setting process, various initial settings required for starting effect control are executed.
Specifically, in the initialization process, various registers and timers used by the CPU 310 are initialized to initialize the CPU 310 .
In the initialization process, various internal devices (CPU work memory 311, CPU interface 312, host interface 313, CG bus interface 314, DRAM interface 315, VRAM 316, serial communication controller 317, transfer circuit 318, preloader circuit 319, display circuit 320, graphics decoder circuit 321, drawing circuit 322, sound controller 323, etc.).
Also, in the initialization process, various external devices (control ROM 302, CGROM 303, DRAM 304, etc.) are initialized. At this time, a value (“0” in this embodiment) is set in the initial transfer completion flag area of the DRAM 304 to designate a state in which an initial transfer, which will be described later, is not completed.

In step S28-2, an initial transfer data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-3. In the initial transfer data setting process, information specifying data to be initially transferred is set.
Specifically, in the initial transfer data setting process, an initial transfer data list is set in a predetermined area of the DRAM 304, and a predetermined initial value ("0" in this embodiment) is set as the value of the data transfer counter. .
The "initial transfer data list" is a list of data to be transferred (preloaded) from the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304 when power is turned on. In this embodiment, the initial transfer data list defines all compressed audio data among the data stored in the CGROM 303 as data to be transferred.
Specifically, in the initial transfer data list, for all the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303, information specifying the address of the storage area (storage area of the CGROM 303) from which each compressed audio data is read (hereinafter referred to as "read address"). ), information specifying the address of the storage area (storage area of the DRAM 304) where the compressed audio data is written (hereinafter referred to as "write address"), and information specifying the order in which the compressed audio data is transferred. (Specifically, the value of the data transfer counter) is registered.

At step S28-3, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-4. In the interrupt permission processing, the interrupt disabled state is released. This enables (permits) the execution of various interrupt processes.
In step S28-4, random number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-5. In the random number update process, random numbers for various effects are updated.
In step S28-5, an initial transfer process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-4. Initial transfer processing will be described later.

(Initial transfer processing)
Next, the initial transfer processing in step S28-5 will be described.
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing initial transfer processing.
When the initial transfer process is executed in step S28-5, as shown in FIG. 39, the process proceeds to step S44-1.
In step S44-1, it is determined whether or not the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is "1". ) (No), the process proceeds to step S44-2, and when it is determined that the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is "1" (Yes), a series of After finishing the process, the process proceeds to the next process (step S28-4).

In step S44-2, SATA transfer processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S44-3. In the SATA transfer process, data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred (preloaded) to the preload area of the DRAM 304 according to the initial transfer data list set in step S28-1.
Specifically, in the SATA transfer process, first, the value of the data transfer counter is checked. Next, the initial transfer data list is referenced to acquire the read address and write address corresponding to the confirmed data transfer counter value. Then, the data (compressed audio data) stored in the storage area specified by the acquired read data address is read, and the read data (compressed image data) is stored in the storage area specified by the acquired write address. Remember.
In the SATA transfer process, next, "1" is added to the value of the data transfer counter.

In step S44-3, it is determined whether or not the initial transfer has been completed. If it is determined that the initial transfer has been completed (Yes), the process moves to step S44-4, and it is determined that the initial transfer has not been completed. If so (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S28-4).
Here, in step S44-3, based on the value of the data transfer counter, it is determined whether transfer of all data registered in the initial transfer data list has been completed. When it is determined that the transfer of all the data registered in the initial transfer data list is completed, it is determined that the initial transfer is completed, and the transfer of all the data registered in the initial transfer data list is completed. If it is determined that the initial transfer has not been completed, it is determined that the initial transfer has not been completed.
In step S44-4, an initial transfer completion flag setting process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S28-3). In the initial transfer completion flag setting process, a value (“1” in this embodiment) that designates the state in which the initial transfer is completed is set in the initial transfer completion flag area.

As described above, during the period from execution of the initial setting process to completion of transfer (initial transfer) of all data registered in the initial transfer data list (all compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303), the initial "0" is set in the transfer completion flag area. Then, the SATA transfer process of step S44-2 is repeatedly executed while "0" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area.
After that, when the transfer (initial transfer) of all the data registered in the initial transfer data list (all the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303) is completed, "1" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area. is set.
In particular, in the present embodiment, in response to setting "1" in the initial transfer completion flag area, control of audio output by the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound controller 323) and various image display devices 31 , 32 to control the display of the effect image (rendering process by VDP).
That is, when "0" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area, control of sound output by the various speakers 22 (sound output processing by the sound controller 323) and display of effect images by the various image display devices 31 and 32 are performed. (rendering process by VDP) and cannot be executed.
On the other hand, when "1" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area, control of sound output by various speakers 22 (sound output processing by sound controller 323) and display of effect images by various image display devices 31 and 32 (rendering process by VDP) and can be executed.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, before the transfer of all the data registered in the initial transfer data list (all the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303) is completed ("1" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area) before setting), control of driving (emission) of various lamps 20 and 21 (lamp driving processing by lamp controller 317a), and control of driving of various motors 23 (various movable bodies) (motor driving processing by motor controller 317b). ), a state occurs in which it is possible to execute
That is, after the initialization process is executed, in response to permission to execute various interrupt processes, control of driving (emission) of the various lamps 20 and 21 (lamp driving process by the lamp controller 317a) and various A state is generated in which it is possible to control the drive of the motor 23 (various movable bodies) (motor drive processing by the motor controller 317b).

(Command reception interrupt processing)
Next, command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 executes command reception interrupt processing (not shown) in response to reception of a control command from the main control board 200 .
In the command reception interrupt process, the control command received from the main control board 200 is stored (stored) in the reception buffer area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 .

(Sub timer interrupt processing)
Next, sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing sub timer interrupt processing.
The effect control board 300 is configured including a clock generation circuit. A clock generation circuit generates a clock pulse signal at predetermined intervals.
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 starts sub timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 40 at predetermined intervals based on the generation of clock pulses by the clock generation circuit. When the sub timer interrupt process is started, first, the process moves to step S31-1.
In step S31-1, register saving processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-2. In the register saving process, the value of the register is saved in the saving area of the DRAM 304 .

In step S31-2, timer update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-3. In the timer update process, values of various timers (effect scenario timer, etc.) included in the effect control board 300 are updated. Specifically, a predetermined value (a value corresponding to a predetermined period) is added or subtracted from the values of various timers.
In step S31-3, command analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-4. In the command analysis process, the control command stored in the reception buffer of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the received control command is executed. The command analysis processing will be described later.

In step S31-4, time schedule management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-5. In the time schedule management process, the progress of production is managed based on the production scenario data set in the production scenario setting area and the value of the production scenario timer corresponding to the production scenario data.
Specifically, in the time schedule management process, it is determined whether or not there is process data whose start time has come for each of the production scenario data set in the production scenario setting area. When it is determined that there is process data whose start time has come, each instruction information (message) included in the process data is stored (stored) in the corresponding buffer area.
At this time, the command information regarding the display effect (the effect start command designating the start of the display effect, the effect end command designating the end of the display effect, etc.) is stored in the display command buffer area.
On the other hand, the command information regarding the sound effect (the effect start command specifying the start of the sound effect, etc.) is stored in the sound command buffer area.
On the other hand, the command information regarding the lamp effect (the effect start command specifying the start of the lamp effect, etc.) is stored in the lamp command buffer area.
On the other hand, the command information regarding the movable body presentation (the presentation start command specifying the start of the movable body presentation, etc.) is stored in the movable body instruction buffer area.

In step S31-5, register return processing is executed, and the sub timer interrupt processing ends. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S31-1 is restored.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the command analysis processing in step S31-3 will be described.
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing.
When the command analysis process is executed in step S31-3, as shown in FIG. 41, the process proceeds to step S32-1.
In step S32-1, a set value command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-2.
In the setting value command reception process, it is determined whether or not a setting value specifying command has been received. And when it determines with having received the setting value designation|designated command, the value corresponding to the setting value which the said setting value designation|designated command designates is memorize|stored in the setting value storage area|region of DRAM304 of the production|presentation control board 300.

In step S32-2, a game state command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-3.
In the game state command reception process, it is determined whether or not a game state designation command has been received. Then, when it is determined that the game state designation command has been received, various production flags are set.
In step S32-3, a pending command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-4. The pending command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-4, prefetch command reception processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-5. The prefetch command reception processing will be described later.
In step S32-5, variation command reception processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-6. Variation command reception processing will be described later.
In step S32-6, a stop command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-7. The stop command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-7, an opening command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-8. The opening command reception processing will be described later.

At step S32-8, a game status command reception process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4).
In the game situation command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not a game situation designation command has been received. Then, when it is determined that the game situation designation command has been received, a game situation setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game situation designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4) without executing the game situation setting process.
In the game situation setting process, the game situation designation command is analyzed.
Then, when the game status designation command specifies the occurrence of the ready-to-fire state, a value (for example, "1 ”). In addition, an effect is started that suggests (informs) that the state of being ready to be fired is occurring.
On the other hand, when cancellation of the ready-to-fire state is designated by the game state designation command, a value (for example, "0 ”). In addition, the effect of suggesting (notifying) that the state of being ready to be fired is occurring is terminated.

(Holding command reception processing)
Next, the pending command reception process of step S32-3 will be described.
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing pending command reception processing.
When the hold command reception process is executed in step S32-3, as shown in FIG. 42, the process proceeds to step S36-1.
In step S36-1, it is determined whether or not a hold number designation command has been received, and if it is determined that a hold number designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-2, and a hold number designation command is issued. If it is determined that it has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In step S36-2, it is determined whether or not the hold number specifying command specifies an increase in the hold number (the hold number has increased by "1"). If it is determined that there is (Yes), the process moves to step S36-3, and the pending number designation command does not specify an increase in the pending number (designates that the pending number has decreased by "1") If so (No), the process proceeds to step S36-4.

In step S36-3, a pending number addition process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the pending number addition process, when it is determined that the pending number designation command specifies an increase in the special figure 1 pending number, add "1" to the value set in the special figure 1 pending number counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reservation number designation command specifies an increase in the special figure 2 reservation number, add "1" to the value set in the special figure 2 reservation number counter.
And, when the reservation number designation command designating the increase in the special figure 1 reservation number is received while the time saving control is stopped, the reservation display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 1 game information is started. On the other hand, during execution of the time saving control, when receiving a reservation number designation command that designates an increase in the special figure 2 reservation number, a reservation display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information is started.
That is, in the animation table setting area, the winning animation table and the waiting animation table are set as the pending display animation tables corresponding to the newly acquired game information.
At this time, the winning animation table and the waiting animation table are synthesized (connected) so that the processing based on the waiting animation table is started after the processing based on the winning animation table ends. Also, loop playback is set for the standby animation.

Specifically, if the increase in the special figure 1 pending number is specified, and the special figure 1 pending number after addition = "1", the animation of the pending display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 1 game information A winning animation table 1 and a standby animation table 1 are set as tables.
On the other hand, if the increase in the special figure 1 reserved number is specified and the special figure 1 reserved number after plastering = "2", as an animation table of the reserved display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 1 game information , the winning animation table 2 and the standby animation table 2 are set.
On the other hand, if the increase in the special figure 1 reserved number is specified and the special figure 1 reserved number after addition = "3", as an animation table of the reserved display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 1 game information , the winning animation table 3 and the standby animation table 3 are set.
On the other hand, if the increase in the special figure 1 reserved number is specified and the special figure 1 reserved number after addition = "4", as an animation table of the reserved display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 1 game information , the winning animation table 4 and the standby animation table 4 are set.
As a result, as a hold display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 1 game information, a standby animation display is started after the end of the winning animation display, and the value of the synchronization flag area changes from "0" to "1". Synchronization to previous pending indications will wait until the timing occurs.
On the other hand, if the increase in the special figure 2 pending number is specified and the special figure 2 pending number after addition = "1", as an animation table of the pending display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information , the winning animation table 1 and the standby animation table 1 are set.
On the other hand, if the increase in the number of special figures 2 reserved is specified and the number of special figures 2 reserved after plastering = "2", as an animation table of the reserved display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information , the winning animation table 2 and the standby animation table 2 are set.
On the other hand, if the increase in the special figure 2 pending number is specified and the special figure 2 pending number after addition = "3", as an animation table of the pending display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information , the winning animation table 3 and the standby animation table 3 are set.
On the other hand, if the increase in the special figure 2 pending number is specified and the special figure 2 pending number after addition = "4", as an animation table of the pending display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information , the winning animation table 4 and the standby animation table 4 are set.
As a result, as a pending display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information, a standby animation display is started after the winning animation display is finished, and the value of the synchronization flag area changes from "0" to "1". Synchronization to previous pending indications will wait until the timing occurs.

In step S36-4, a reservation number subtraction process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the reservation number subtraction process, when it is determined that the reservation number designation command specifies the subtraction of the special figure 1 reservation number, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the special figure 1 reservation number counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reservation number designation command specifies the subtraction of the special figure 2 reservation number, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the special figure 2 reservation number counter.
Then, the pending display being executed at the pending display position is ended, and the pending display being executed at the pending 1 display position to the pending display position 4 is shifted.
That is, in the animation table setting area, the animation table is discarded for the suspended display executed at the suspended display position, and the suspended display executed at the suspended 1 display position to the suspended 4 display position is canceled. Discard (delete) the animation table set for , and set a new subtraction animation table and stay animation table.
At this time, the subtraction animation table and the stay animation table are combined (connected) so that the process based on the stay animation table is started after the process based on the subtraction animation table is completed. Also, loop playback is set for the stay animation table.

Specifically, a decrease in the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) is specified, and the special figure reservation number after subtraction (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) = "0 , the animation table (stay animation table) corresponding to the pending display being executed at the pending display position is discarded. Also, the animation table (stay animation table or standby animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 1 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 1 and the stay animation table are generated as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 0.
On the other hand, a decrease in the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) is specified, and the special figure reservation number after subtraction (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) = "1" If there is, the animation table (stay animation table) corresponding to the pending display being executed at the pending display position is discarded. Also, the animation table (stay animation table or standby animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 1 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 1 and the stay animation table are generated as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 0. Also, the animation table (stay animation table or standby animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 2 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 2 and the stay animation table are created as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 1.
On the other hand, a decrease in the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) is specified, and the special figure reservation number after subtraction (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) = "2" If there is, the animation table (stay animation table) corresponding to the pending display being executed at the pending display position is discarded. Also, the animation table (stay animation table or standby animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 1 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 1 and the stay animation table are generated as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 0. Also, the animation table (stay animation table or standby animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 2 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 2 and the stay animation table are created as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 1. Also, the animation table (stay animation table or standby animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 3 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 3 and the stay animation table are created as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set 2.
On the other hand, a decrease in the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) is specified, and the special figure reservation number after subtraction (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) = "3" If there is, the animation table (stay animation table) corresponding to the pending display being executed at the pending display position is discarded. Also, the animation table (stay animation table or standby animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 1 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 1 and the stay animation table are generated as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 0. Also, the animation table (stay animation table or standby animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 2 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 2 and the stay animation table are created as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 1. Also, the animation table (stay animation table or standby animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 3 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 3 and the stay animation table are created as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set 2. Also, the animation table (the stay animation table or the standby animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 4 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 4 and the stay animation table are created as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set 3.
Thereby, when receiving a pending number designation command that specifies a decrease in the number of special figures 2 pending during the execution of the pending display corresponding to one or more game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) Then, after the subtraction animation display is executed for the suspension display corresponding to all the special figure 2 game information, the stay animation display is started at the same time, and the contents of the suspension display are synchronized.

(Prefetch command reception processing)
Next, the prefetch command reception processing in step S32-4 will be described.
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing prefetch command reception processing.
When the prefetch command reception process is executed in step S32-4, as shown in FIG. 43, the process proceeds to step S33-1.
In step S33-1, it is determined whether or not a prefetching designation command (first prefetching designation command, second prefetching designation command, and third prefetching designation command) has been received, and if it is determined that a prefetching designation command has been received (Yes ), the process proceeds to step S33-2, and when it is determined that the prefetch designation command has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step S33-2, prefetch information analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-3. In the look-ahead information analysis process, the information specified by the look-ahead specification command is stored in a predetermined area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 as pending information.
A suspension information storage area capable of storing suspension information is set in the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 . In addition, as a reservation information storage area, a first reservation information storage area corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 game information storage area of RAM 230) and a second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 game information storage area of RAM 230) ) is set.
The first pending information storage area includes storage areas 1 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing pending information. And, in the first pending information storage area, pending information corresponding to the special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area is stored. That is, the pending information stored in the storage area 1 of the first pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Further, the pending information stored in the storage area 2 of the first pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Further, the pending information stored in the storage area 3 of the first pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Further, the pending information stored in the storage area 4 of the first pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area.
The second pending information storage area includes storage areas 1 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing pending information. And, in the second pending information storage area, pending information corresponding to the special figure 2 game information stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area is stored. That is, the pending information stored in the storage area 1 of the second pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Further, the pending information stored in the storage area 2 of the second pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 2 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Further, the pending information stored in the storage area 3 of the second pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 3 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Further, the pending information stored in the storage area 4 of the second pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 4 of the special figure 2 game information storage area.
Each pending information includes pattern information indicating the type of stop pattern, the first variation information indicating the contents of the variation mode ("variation mode number" or "indefinite value"), and the contents of the variation pattern ("variation pattern number" or and second variation information indicating "indefinite value").

In the look-ahead information analysis process, first, it is determined whether or not the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery.
Then, when it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery, the type of stop design specified by the first look-ahead designation command ("lost design" or "jackpot p design ”), the contents of the variation mode specified by the second look-ahead specification command (“variation mode m” or “undefined value”), and the contents of the variation pattern specified by the third look-ahead specification command (“variation pattern n” or “ Analyze the symbol information corresponding to the type of the analyzed stop symbol, the first variation information corresponding to the contents of the analyzed variation mode, and the second corresponding to the contents of the analyzed variation pattern generating pending information including the variable information; Then, the generated pending information is stored (saved) in the first pending information storage area.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the type of stop design specified by the first look-ahead designation command ("lost design" or "jackpot p design ”), the contents of the variation mode specified by the second look-ahead specification command (“variation mode m” or “undefined value”), and the contents of the variation pattern specified by the third look-ahead specification command (“variation pattern n” or “ Analyze the symbol information corresponding to the type of the analyzed stop symbol, the first variation information corresponding to the contents of the analyzed variation mode, and the second corresponding to the contents of the analyzed variation pattern generating pending information including the variable information; Then, the generated pending information is stored (saved) in the second pending information storage area.
In the following description, the pending information stored in the pending information storage area in step S33-2 is referred to as "prefetch target pending information". In addition, among the pending information stored in the first pending information storage area, the pending information whose notification display (variable display and stop display) is executed prior to the prefetch target pending information is referred to as "preceding pending information".

In step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is being executed, and if it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is not being executed (No), the process proceeds to step S33-4, and the pre-reading notice effect is executed. If it is determined that the process is being executed (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In this embodiment, "1" is set in the flag area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 during execution of the pre-reading notice effect. Therefore, in step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is being executed based on whether or not "1" is set in the pre-reading notice effect in-progress flag area.
In step S33-4, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is met (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-5, and the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is not satisfied (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In this embodiment, (1) the prefetch target hold information is the hold information corresponding to the special figure 1 game information, (2) a predetermined number (in this embodiment, "2") or more preceding hold information is stored (3) that there is no preceding hold information indicating the type (variation pattern number) belonging to "normal reach variation" or "super reach variation" as the type of variation pattern, (4) during stop of time saving control (5) that the jackpot game state is not occurring, it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied.
It should be noted that the content of the look-ahead advance notice effect execution condition can be changed as appropriate. That is, not all the conditions (1) to (5) above, but in the case of one or more conditions among the above (1) to (5), as a configuration that is determined to meet the pre-reading notice effect execution condition I don't mind. Further, conditions different from the conditions (1) to (5) above may be included as conditions for executing the pre-reading advance notice effect.

In step S33-5, a pre-reading notice effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-6. In the pre-reading notice effect lottery process, a pre-reading notice effect lottery is executed for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect lottery.
A control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a pre-reading notice effect lottery table in which hit values of the pre-reading notice effect lottery are registered.
In the pre-reading notice effect lottery, first, a pre-reading notice effect lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the obtained pre-reading notice effect lottery random number and the pre-reading notice effect lottery table.
In step S33-6, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect lottery executed in step S33-5 has been won. If it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect lottery has been lost (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

At step S33-7, a pre-reading notice effect setting process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5). In the pre-reading notice effect setting process, the content of the pre-reading notice effect is set.
The "forecast notice effect" is a effect that suggests the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on predetermined game information.
In the pre-reading notice effect setting process, next, the contents of the pre-reading notice effect are determined, and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is set according to the decided contents. At this time, “1” is set in the flag area during the pre-reading notice effect of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 . It should be noted that "0" is set in the flag area during the foreseeing advance notice effect by a process (not shown) according to the end of the foreseeing notice effect.

(variation command reception processing)
Next, the variation command reception process of step S32-5 will be described.
FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing a variation command reception process.
When the variation command reception process is executed in step S32-5, as shown in FIG. 44, the process proceeds to step S34-1.
In step S34-1, it is determined whether or not a predetermined control command has been received. If it is determined that a predetermined control command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S34-2, and the predetermined control command is transmitted. If it is determined that it has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6).
Here, the predetermined control command refers to a symbol type designation command, a variation mode designation command and a variation pattern designation command.
In step S34-2, stop effect determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-3. In the stop effect determination process, a stop effect number (mode of stop effect) is determined.
Specifically, in the stop effect determination process, a stop effect number (mode of stop effect) is determined based on the type of stop symbol specified by the symbol type designation command. Then, the determined stop effect number is stored in the stop effect number storage area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 .

In step S34-3, a variable effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-4. In the variable effect determination process, a variable effect number (mode of variable effect) is determined.
Concretely, in fluctuation production decision processing, first, first half fluctuation production decision processing which decides the first half fluctuation production number (mode of first half fluctuation production) is executed.
A control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a first half variation performance lottery table in which the correspondence between a variation mode number (type of variation mode) and a first half variation performance number (mode of first half variation performance) is registered. .
In the first half variation performance determination process, first, the first half variation performance lottery table is read. Then, among the first half variation performance numbers registered in the first half variation performance lottery table, the first half variation performance number corresponding to the variation mode number specified by the variation mode designation command is determined (selected).

In the variable effect determination process, next, the second half variable effect determination process for determining the second half variable effect number (mode of the second half variable effect) is executed.
A control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a second half variation performance lottery table in which correspondence between a variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) and a second half variation performance number (mode of second half variation performance) is registered. .
In the second half variation performance determination process, first, the second half variation performance lottery table is read. Then, out of the second half variation performance numbers registered in the second half variation performance lottery table, the second half variation performance number corresponding to the variation pattern number designated by the variation pattern designation command is determined (selected).

In step S34-4, a notice effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-5. In the announcement effect determination process, a main announcement effect number (mode of main announcement effect) is selected.
A control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a preliminary announcement performance lottery table in which the correspondence between the preliminary announcement performance lottery random number and the main preliminary announcement performance number (mode of the main preliminary performance) is registered.
Further, as a notice effect lottery table, a notice effect lottery table corresponding to each stop symbol number (various types of stop symbols) is stored.
In order to determine the aspect of the main notice effect, first, a notice effect lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Also, the stop design number designated by the stop design designation command is confirmed, and the notice effect lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out. Then, the main notice effect lottery number is determined (judged) based on the obtained notice effect lottery random number and the read-out notice effect lottery table.

In step S34-5, a variable effect setting process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6). In the variable performance setting process, the performance scenario data of the variable performance is set.
Specifically, in the variable effect setting process, the effect scenario data corresponding to the first half variable effect number determined in step S34-3 and the effect scenario data corresponding to the second half variable effect number determined in step S34-3 are set. read out.
Next, the performance scenario data read out is combined to generate the performance scenario data relating to the variable performance. Then, the generated production scenario data and the production scenario timer corresponding to the production scenario data are set in the production scenario setting area.
Also, the effect scenario data corresponding to the main notice effect number determined in step S34-4 is read. Then, the effect scenario data read out and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area. As a result, the main notice effect is started at a predetermined timing during execution of the variable effect.

(Stop command reception processing)
Next, the stop command reception process of step S32-6 will be described.
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing stop command reception processing.
When the stop command reception process is executed in step S32-6, as shown in FIG. 45, the process proceeds to step S35-1.
In step S35-1, it is determined whether or not a stop designation command has been received, and if it is determined that a stop designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-2, where the stop designation command has been received. If it is determined that there is no (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7).
In step S35-2, stop effect start processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S32-7) is performed. In the stop effect start process, effect scenario data for the stop effect is set.
Specifically, in the stop effect setting process, the stop effect number stored in the stop effect number storage area is obtained, and the effect scenario data corresponding to the obtained stop effect number is read. Then, the effect scenario data read out and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area. As a result, the stop effect (stop display of the effect symbols z1 and z2) is started.

(Opening command reception processing)
Next, the opening command reception processing of step S32-7 will be described.
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing opening command reception processing.
When the opening command reception process is executed in step S32-7, as shown in FIG. 46, the process proceeds to step S39-1.
In step S39-1, it is determined whether or not an opening designation command has been received, and if it is determined that an opening designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S39-2, where the opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that there is no (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8).
In step S39-2, a winning effect setting process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8). In the winning effect setting process, the effect scenario data of the winning effect is set.
Specifically, in the winning effect setting process, the winning effect number is selected according to the type of stop symbol specified by the opening specifying command. Also, the effect scenario data corresponding to the selected winning effect number is read. Then, the effect scenario data read out and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area. Thus, the winning effect is started.

(Vsync interrupt processing)
Next, the Vsync interruption process which CPU310 of the production|presentation control board 300 performs is demonstrated.
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing Vsync interrupt processing.
The synchronizing signal generation circuit of the display circuit 320 generates a vertical synchronizing signal (Vsync) every second predetermined period (specifically, 16.66 [ms]). do).
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 starts Vsync interrupt processing shown in FIG. 47 every second predetermined period based on the generation of the vertical synchronization signal by the synchronization signal generation circuit. When the Vsync interrupt process is started, first, the process moves to step S40-1.
In step S40-1, it is determined whether or not the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is "1", and it is determined that the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is "1". If so (Yes), the process proceeds to step S40-2, and if it is determined that the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is not "1" (is "0") (No), the Vsync End interrupt processing.

In step S40-2, frame buffer switching processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-3. In the frame buffer switching process, the designation of the frame buffer area (designation of the drawing area/designation of the output area) is switched.
Specifically, in the frame buffer switching process, of the two frame buffer areas, the designation of the frame buffer area designated as the drawing area is switched from the drawing area to the output area, and the frame buffer designated as the output area is switched. Switch the area specification from the output area to the drawing area.

In step S40-3, drawing command buffer switching processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-4. In the drawing command buffer switching process, the designation of the drawing command buffer area (designation of construction area/designation of transfer area) is switched.
Specifically, in the drawing command buffer switching process, of the two drawing command buffer areas, the drawing command buffer area specified as the construction area is switched from the construction area to the transfer area, and the area designated as the transfer area is switched from the construction area to the transfer area. Switches the drawing command buffer area specification from the transfer area to the construction area.
In step S40-4, drawing/output start processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-5. In the drawing/output start processing, the start of drawing processing by the drawing circuit 322 is specified, and the start of output processing by the display circuit 320 is specified.
Specifically, in the drawing/output start process, a value designating the start of the drawing process is set in the drawing register of the microcomputer 301 . As a result, the drawing process by the drawing circuit 322 is started. That is, the drawing circuit 322 generates one frame of drawing data in the frame buffer area designated as the drawing area using one frame of compressed image data stored (preloaded) in the preload area of the DRAM 304 . be started.
Also, in the drawing/output start processing, a value designating the start of output processing is set in the display register of the microcomputer 301 . As a result, output processing by the display circuit 320 is started. That is, the display circuit 320 starts generating and outputting a video signal based on drawing data for one frame generated in the frame buffer area designated as the output area.

In step S40-5, drawing command transfer start processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-6. In the drawing command transfer start process, the start of transfer processing by the transfer circuit 318 is designated, and the start of preload processing by the preloader circuit 319 is designated.
Specifically, in the drawing command transfer start process, a value designating the start of the transfer process for transferring the display list to the preloader circuit 319 is set in the data transfer register of the microcomputer 301 . As a result, transfer processing by the transfer circuit 318 is started. That is, the transfer circuit 318 starts transferring the display list generated in the drawing command buffer area designated as the transfer area to the preloader circuit 319 .
Also, in the drawing command transfer start processing, a value designating the start of preload processing is set in the display preloader register of the microcomputer 301 . As a result, the preloading process by the preloader circuit 319 is started. That is, the preloader circuit 319 transfers one frame of compressed image data (transfer from the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304) specified by the display list (drawing command) transferred by the transfer circuit 318, and the display list ( drawing command) is started.

In step S40-6, command construction task wake-up processing is executed, and the Vsync interrupt processing ends. In the command construction task wake-up process, the wake-up of the command construction task process is set. As a result, command construction task processing, which will be described later, is started.

(command construction task processing)
Next, the command construction task processing which is activated in step S40-6 will be described.
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing command construction task processing.
When the command construction task process is awakened in step S40-6, as shown in FIG. 48, the process proceeds to step S46-1.
In step S46-1, it is determined whether or not unanalyzed command information is stored in the display command buffer area. If it is determined that unanalyzed command information is stored (Yes), step S46- 2, and when it is determined that unanalyzed command information is not stored (No), the process proceeds to step S46-3.
In step S46-2, command information analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S46-1. In the command information analysis process, unanalyzed command information is analyzed, and a process according to the analysis result is executed.
Specifically, in the command information analysis process, when the unanalyzed command information is the effect start command, first, among the animation tables stored in the control ROM 302, the display effect number corresponding to the effect start command is specified. Read the animation table. Then, in the animation table setting area of the DRAM 304, the read animation table, the frame rate corresponding to the animation table, and the display priority information corresponding to the animation table are set (stored/registered). At this time, the frame rate setting table is referenced, the frame rate corresponding to the index number assigned to the animation table is obtained, and the obtained frame rate is set.
On the other hand, if the unanalyzed command information is the effect end command, the animation table corresponding to the display effect number specified by the effect end command is cleared (erased) among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area. .

In step S46-3, command construction processing is executed, and the command construction task processing ends. In the command construction process, a display list is constructed in the drawing command buffer area designated as the construction area. The command building process will be described later.

(command construction processing)
Next, the command construction processing in step S46-3 will be described.
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing command construction processing.
When the command building process is executed in step S46-3, as shown in FIG. 49, the process proceeds to step S45-1.
In step S45-1, bit inversion processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-2. In the bit determination process, the value set in the update timing determination area of the DRAM 304 is inverted. That is, when "0" is set in the update timing determination area, "1" is set instead, and when "1" is set in the update timing determination area, it is set instead. to set “0”.
In step S45-2, it is determined whether or not the value set in the update timing determination area of the DRAM 304 is "1", and it is determined that the value set in the update timing determination area is "1". If so (Yes), the process proceeds to step S45-3, and if it is determined that the value set in the update timing determination area is not "1" (is "0") (No), step S45- Go to 5.
At step S45-3, a synchronization flag cancellation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-4. In the synchronization flag release process, “0” is stored (set) in the synchronization flag area of the DRAM 304 . As a result, "0" is stored in the synchronization flag area every 1/30 [s].

In step S45-4, frame update processing A is executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-5. In the frame update process A, among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, an animation table with a frame rate of 30 [FPS] and an animation table with a frame rate of 60 [FPS] and update the frame information.
Specifically, in the frame update process A, first, frame information of each animation table for all the animation tables set at the frame rate of 60 [FPS] among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area. update. That is, instead of the currently selected frame information, the frame information of the next order is selected as the frame information to construct the display list.
In the frame update process A, next, among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, the frame information of each animation table is updated for all the animation tables in which the frame rate=30 [FPS] is set. . That is, instead of the currently selected frame information, the frame information of the next order is selected as the frame information to construct the display list.
As described above, the frame information is updated for all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area.

In step S45-5, display list construction processing is executed, and the command construction processing ends. In the display list construction process, a display list is constructed in the drawing command buffer area designated as the construction area.
Specifically, in the display list construction process, first, for all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, a process of generating drawing commands based on each animation table is executed.
In the process of generating a drawing command based on each animation table, frame information selected as a target for constructing a display list is obtained from frame information defined in the animation table. A drawing command is generated based on the obtained frame information.
The drawing command contains the image address of the image data to be used for drawing, the magnification (enlargement/reduction ratio) at which the image data is drawn, the coordinates at which the image data is drawn (coordinates in the frame buffer area), and the drawing time of the image data. The transmittance (transparency, transparency, transparency) of is specified.
In the command building process, next, the drawing commands generated for all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area are arranged in a predetermined order to build a display list.
At this time, the order of drawing commands corresponding to the animation table is set based on the display priority information of each animation table set in the animation table setting area.
That is, among the plurality of drawing commands, the plurality of drawing commands are arranged such that the drawing commands with the lower display priority are executed first, and the drawing processing based on the drawing commands with the higher display priority is executed first. Sorted to build a display list. In other words, a display list is constructed by arranging a plurality of drawing commands so that drawing processing based on a drawing command having a lower display priority among the plurality of drawing commands is executed first. .

In addition, in the display list construction processing, for each animation table set in the animation table setting area, if synchronization flag setting information is included in frame information selected as a target for constructing a display list, synchronization flag setting information is set. Sets the process wakeup. As a result, synchronization flag setting processing, which will be described later, is started.
That is, in the animation table setting area, the stay animation table 0 is set, and among the frame information registered in the stay animation table 0, the first (first frame, frame 1) frame information is displayed. If it is selected for building a list, the sync flag setting process is awakened.
Similarly, in the animation table setting area, the stay animation table 1 is set, and among the frame information registered in the stay animation table 1, the first (first frame, frame 1) frame information is If it is selected for building a display list, the synchronization flag setting process is awakened.
As a result, one of the stay animation tables 0 and 1 is set in the animation table setting area, and among the frame information registered in the stay animation table, the first (first frame) When the frame information of frame 1) is selected as a target for constructing a display list, the synchronization flag setting process is activated once in the display list constructing process.
On the other hand, both stay animation tables 0 and 1 are set in the animation table setting area, and among the frame information registered in the stay animation tables 0 and 1, the first (first frame, frame 1) frame information is selected as a target for constructing a display list, the synchronization flag setting process is activated two [times] in the display list constructing process.

In addition, in the display list construction processing, for each animation table set in the animation table setting area, if synchronization monitoring information is included in frame information selected as a target for constructing a display list, synchronization monitoring processing is performed. Set wake up. As a result, synchronization monitoring processing, which will be described later, is started.
That is, when one or a plurality of standby animation tables are set in the animation table setting area, synchronous monitoring processing is activated for each standby animation table.
As a result, in the animation table setting area, if only the stay animation table 1 is set among the stay animation tables 1 to 4, the synchronization monitoring process is activated one time in the display list construction process. be.
On the other hand, in the animation table setting area, if the stay animation tables 1 and 2 are set among the stay animation tables 1 to 4, the synchronization monitoring process is activated 2 [times] in the display list construction process. be.
On the other hand, in the animation table setting area, if the stay animation tables 1 to 3 are set among the stay animation tables 1 to 4, the synchronization monitoring process is activated 3 [times] in the display list construction process. be.
On the other hand, in the animation table setting area, if the stay animation tables 1 to 4 are set among the stay animation tables 1 to 4, the synchronization monitoring process is activated 4 [times] in the display list construction process. be.

In step S45-6, frame update processing B is executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-5. In the frame update process B, among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, the frame information is updated for the animation table in which the frame rate=60 [FPS] is set.
Specifically, in the frame update process B, the frame information of each animation table is updated for all the animation tables set to the frame rate of 60 [FPS] among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area. do. That is, instead of the currently selected frame information, the next-ranked frame information is selected as the frame information to construct the display list.
As described above, among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, the frame information is updated only for the animation tables in which the frame rate=60 [FPS] is set.

(Synchronous flag setting processing)
Next, the synchronization flag setting process which is activated in step S45-5 will be described.
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing synchronization flag setting processing.
When the synchronization flag setting process is awakened in step S45-5, as shown in FIG. 61, the process proceeds to step S47-1.
In step S47-1, "1" is stored (set) in the synchronization flag area of the DRAM 304, and the synchronization flag setting process ends.

(Synchronous monitoring process)
Next, the synchronization monitoring process which is awakened in step S45-5 will be described.
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing synchronization monitoring processing.
When the synchronous monitoring process is awakened in step S45-5, as shown in FIG. 62, it proceeds to step S48-1.
In step S48-1, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the synchronization flag area of DRAM 304 is "1", and if it is determined that the value stored in the synchronization flag area is "1" ( If Yes), the process proceeds to step S48-2, and if it is determined that the value stored in the synchronization flag area is not "1" (is "0") (No), the synchronization monitoring process ends. do.
In step S48-2, a pending display synchronization process is executed, and the synchronization monitoring process ends. In pending display synchronization processing, synchronization of pending display is started.
Specifically, in the suspended display synchronization process, the standby animation table is discarded and the stay animation table is set for the suspended display corresponding to the standby animation table that caused the synchronization monitoring process. At this time, loop playback is set for the stay animation table.
As a result, the suspended display corresponding to the standby animation table that caused the synchronization monitoring process is synchronized with the suspended display being executed at the suspended display position (or the suspended display position 1).

(sound interrupt processing)
Next, the sound interrupt processing executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing sound interrupt processing.
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 starts sound interrupt processing shown in FIG. 50 every first predetermined period (1/30 [s] in this embodiment) based on the generation of the clock pulse by the clock generation circuit. do. When the sound interrupt process is started, first, the process moves to step S41-1.
In step S41-1, it is determined whether or not the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is "1", and it is determined that the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is "1". If so (Yes), the process moves to step S41-2, and if it is determined that the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is not "1" (is "0") (No), the sound End interrupt processing.

In step S41-2, command information analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-3. In the command information analysis process, it is determined whether or not unanalyzed command information is stored in the sound command buffer area. process.
Specifically, in the command information analysis process, if the unanalyzed command information is a production start command, among the sound tables stored in the control ROM 302, the sound table corresponding to the sound production number specified by the production start command and sets (stores) the read sound table in the sound table setting area of the DRAM 304 .
On the other hand, if the unanalyzed command information is a production end command, the sound table corresponding to the sound production number specified by the production end command is cleared (erased) among the sound tables set in the sound table setting area. .

In step S41-3, sound command construction processing is executed, and the sound interruption processing ends. In the sound command construction process, a sound command is generated in the sound command buffer area.
Specifically, in the sound command construction process, sound commands are generated for all sound tables set in the sound table setting area based on the information registered in each sound table.

(Lamp interrupt processing)
Next, the lamp interrupt processing executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing lamp interrupt processing.
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 starts lamp interrupt processing shown in FIG. do. When the lamp interrupt process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S42-1.
In step S42-1, command information analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-2. In the command information analysis process, it is determined whether or not unanalyzed command information is stored in the lamp command buffer area. process.
Specifically, in the command information analysis process, when the unanalyzed command information is a production start command, the lamp corresponding to the lamp production number specified by the production start command is selected from the lamp control table stored in the control ROM 302. The control table is read, and the read lamp control table and the sub-scenario timer corresponding to the lamp control table are set (stored) in the lamp control table setting area of the DRAM 304 .
On the other hand, if the unanalyzed command information is a production end command, the lamp control table corresponding to the lamp production number specified by the production end command is cleared ( to erase.

In step S42-2, lamp command construction processing is executed, and the lamp interrupt processing ends. In the lamp command construction process, a lamp command is generated in the lamp command buffer area.
Specifically, in the lamp command construction process, lamp commands are generated for all lamp control tables set in the lamp control table setting area based on the information registered in each lamp control table.

(Movable object interrupt processing)
Next, the movable body interrupt processing executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing movable body interrupt processing.
CPU310 of the effect control board 300, based on the generation of the clock pulse by the clock generation circuit, the movable body interrupt processing shown in FIG. Start. When the movable body interrupt process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S43-1.
In step S43-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-2. In the register saving process, the value of the register is saved in the saving area of the DRAM 304 .
In step S43-2, command information analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-3. In the command information analysis process, it is determined whether or not unanalyzed command information is stored in the movable body command buffer area. Execute the corresponding process.
Specifically, in the command information analysis process, when the unanalyzed command information is a production start command, the movable body production number specified by the production start command is selected from the movable body control table stored in the control ROM 302. The movable body control table is read, and the read movable body control table and the sub-scenario timer corresponding to the movable body control table are set (stored) in the movable body control table setting area of the DRAM 304 .
On the other hand, if the unanalyzed command information is a production end command, the movable body control table corresponding to the movable body production number specified by the production end command in the movable body control table set in the movable body control table setting area. Clear (delete) the table.

At step S43-3, a motor command construction process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-4. In the motor command construction process, a motor command is generated in the motor command buffer area.
Specifically, in the motor command construction process, a motor command is generated based on information registered in each movable body control table for all movable body control tables set in the movable body control table setting area.
In step S43-4, register return processing is executed, and the movable body interrupt processing ends. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S43-1 is restored.

(Processing from constructing drawing commands to generating and outputting video signals)
Next, processing from construction of a drawing command to generation and output of a video signal will be described.
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the flow of processing from constructing a drawing command to generating and outputting a video signal.
Here, in the following description, the time (period) from each occurrence of Vsync (start of Vsync interrupt processing) to the next occurrence of Vsync (start of next Vsync interrupt processing) is defined as "one frame (period). ”.
The CPU 310 of the production control board 300 selects the production (production number) to be executed according to the control command received from the main control board 200, and creates the production scenario data corresponding to the selected production number and the production scenario data. and a production scenario timer are set in the production scenario setting area of the DRAM 304.例文帳に追加
Then, the CPU 310 controls the progress of the effect based on the effect scenario data set in the effect scenario setting area and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data.
That is, the CPU 310 updates the effect scenario timer at a predetermined cycle, and based on the value of the effect scenario timer after the update, the process data registered in the effect scenario data include process data whose start time has come. determine whether or not to When it is determined that there is process data whose start time has come, processing based on the process data is executed.
At this time, if the process data whose start time has come contains command information designating the start of the display effect (display effect number), the CPU 310 sets the animation table corresponding to the display effect number and the animation table corresponding to the display effect number. A sub-scenario timer is set in the animation table setting area of the DRAM 304 .
On the other hand, if the process data whose start time has come contains a display priority change command, the display priority information set in the animation table setting area is changed according to the command information.
Then, CPU 310 controls the progress of the display effect based on the animation table set in the animation table setting area and the sub-scenario timer corresponding to the animation table.
That is, CPU 310 updates the sub-scenario timer set in the animation table setting area each time Vsync (vertical synchronization signal) is generated. Also, for each animation table set in the animation table setting area, a drawing command is generated based on the information corresponding to the updated sub-scenario timer value among the information defined in the animation table. Furthermore, the plurality of generated drawing commands are arranged in a predetermined order, and a display list is generated in the drawing command buffer area designated as the construction area. At this time, the order of drawing commands corresponding to the animation table is set based on the display priority information included in each animation table.
As a result, the VDP is controlled according to the display list generated in the drawing command buffer area, and the display effect (the display of effect images by the various image display devices 31 and 32) is controlled.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53, the CPU 310 switches the frame buffer area (switches between the drawing area and the output area) and the drawing command buffer area each time Vsync occurs (every frame). After executing (switching between construction area and transfer area designation), construction of a display list for one frame is started in the drawing command buffer area designated as the construction area. The construction of the display list by CPU 310 is performed during one frame.
The display list constructed in the drawing command buffer area is transferred to the preloader circuit 319 at the next occurrence of Vsync (during the next frame) when Vsync occurs (the designation of the drawing command buffer area is switched to the transfer area). forwarded to. Then, the preloader circuit 319 starts preloading the compressed image data for one frame specified in the received display list and rewriting the display list according to the preloading. Preloading of compressed image data for one frame by the preloader circuit 319 and rewriting of the display list according to the preloading are performed during one frame.
The display list rewritten by the preloader circuit 319 is transferred to the drawing circuit 322 with the next generation of Vsync as a trigger (during the next frame). Then, the drawing circuit 322 starts generating drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer area designated as the drawing area according to the received display list. Generation of drawing data for one frame by the drawing circuit 322 is executed during one frame. At this time, the drawing circuit 322 generates one frame of drawing data using the one frame of compressed image data preloaded during the previous one frame.
The drawing data for one frame generated in the frame buffer area will be displayed at the next occurrence of Vsync (the specification of the frame buffer area is switched to the output area) (during the next frame). The circuit 320 starts generating and outputting a video signal based on the drawing data. The display circuit 320 generates and outputs a video signal based on drawing data for one frame during one frame.

As described above, when the display list for the n-th frame is constructed in one predetermined frame, preloading of the compressed image data for the n-th frame is executed in one frame after the predetermined one frame, Rendering data for the n-th frame is generated during one frame two frames after the predetermined one frame, and video data for the n-th frame is generated during one frame three frames after the predetermined one frame. • The output is executed.
As a result, the image of the nth frame is displayed on the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 after three frames from the construction of the display list of the nth frame.

(Operation of pachinko machine 1)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the following description, the game information corresponding to the pending display being executed at the pending display position is referred to as "previous game information", and one or more acquired during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol based on the first game information The game information is referred to as "succeeding game information".
In the pachinko machine 1, when new succeeding game information is acquired during execution of the pending display (stay animation display) corresponding to the preceding game information at the pending display position, the newly acquired succeeding game information is handled. A pending display is started.
At this time, as a pending display corresponding to the newly acquired subsequent game information, the winning animation display is first started, and after the winning animation display is finished, the waiting animation display is started and stored in the synchronization flag area. The start of the stay animation display is waited until the timing at which the value changes from "0" to "1" occurs. When the value stored in the synchronization flag area changes from "0" to "1", the standby animation display ends and the stay animation display starts.
Here, in the present embodiment, during the loop reproduction of the stay animation corresponding to the preceding game information, the value stored in the synchronization flag area changes from "0" to " 1”.
As a result, when the value stored in the synchronization flag area changes from "0" to "1", the content of the hold display (stay animation display) corresponding to the preceding game information and the following game information are displayed. It is possible to synchronize the content of the hold display (stay animation display) to be performed with each other.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, when the subtraction of the pending number occurs during the period in which the standby animation display is executed for a plurality of subsequent game information, the subtraction animation display is started as the pending display corresponding to each subsequent game information. After the subtraction animation display ends, the stay animation display is executed.
As a result, it is possible to synchronize the content of the pending display (stay animation display) related to the plurality of pieces of subsequent game information with the occurrence of the subtraction of the pending number.

(Modification 1)
Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, various modifications can be made to the above embodiments.
For example, in the above-described embodiment, while the time saving control is stopped, the holding display is executed for the special figure 1 game information, and the holding display is executed for the special figure 2 game information while the time saving control is being executed. Then, regardless of whether the time saving control is stopped or being executed, when a plurality of pending displays are executed, the contents of the plurality of pending displays are synchronized.
However, when a plurality of pending displays are executed while time-saving control is stopped, the contents of the multiple pending displays are not synchronized, and a plurality of pending displays are executed while time-saving control is stopped. Alternatively, the contents of the plurality of pending displays may be synchronized.
Or, during the stop of the time saving control, if multiple pending displays are executed, the contents of the multiple pending displays are synchronized, and during the stop of the time saving control, if multiple pending displays are executed , the contents of the plurality of pending displays may not be synchronized.

(Modification 2)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, of the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information, the reserved display is executed for the game information corresponding to the game state. That is, while the time saving control is stopped, the special figure 1 game information is displayed on hold, and the special figure 2 game information is shown on hold during the time saving control.
At this time, at the time of transition (at the time of change) of the game state, if there is game information for which the start determination (or derivation of the result of the start determination) is withheld for the game information corresponding to the game state after the transition ( If the number of special figure pending is "1" or more), for all the game information for which the start determination is pending, the staying animation display may be started in a mutually synchronized state.

Specifically, according to the start of the time saving control (end of the jackpot game state), to start the pending display (stay animation display) corresponding to the special figure 2 game information. At this time, the pending display is started at the pending display position corresponding to the special figure 2 pending number.
That is, if the special figure 2 game information is stored in the storage area 0, and the special figure 2 reservation number at the start of the time saving control is "0", the stay animation display (stay animation ).
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 game information is stored in the storage area 0, and the special figure 2 reservation number at the start of the time saving control is "1", at each of the reservation display position and the reservation 1 display position , start the stay animation display (stay animation).
On the other hand, if the special figure 2 game information is stored in the storage area 0, and the special figure 2 reservation number at the start of the time saving control is "2", the reservation display position, the reservation 1 display position and the reservation 2 A stay animation display (stay animation) is started at each of the display positions.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 game information is stored in the storage area 0, and the special figure 2 reservation number at the start of the time saving control is "3", the reservation display position, the reservation 1 display position, the reservation 2 A stay animation display (stay animation) is started at each of the display position and the hold 3 display position.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 game information is stored in the storage area 0, and the special figure 2 reservation number at the start of the time saving control is "4", the reservation display position, the reservation 1 display position, the reservation 2 A stay animation display (stay animation) is started at each of the display position, the hold 3 display position, and the hold 4 display position.
Thereby, in response to the start of the time saving control, at two or more of the holding display positions, the holding 1 display position, the holding 2 display position, the holding 3 display position, and the holding 4 display position, the holding display When the (stay animation display) is started, it is possible to synchronize the contents of the suspension display (stay animation display) started at the two or more suspension display positions.
That is, according to the start of the time saving control, it is possible to start in a state of synchronizing with each other for the pending display of a plurality of special figure 2 game information.

On the other hand, in response to the end of the time saving control (the end of the second special symbol fluctuation display or stop display that is the trigger for the end of the time saving control), along with ending the pending display corresponding to the special figure 2 game information, special figure 1 game A hold display (stay animation display) corresponding to the information is started. At this time, the pending display is started at the pending display position corresponding to the special figure 1 pending number.
That is, if the special figure 1 game information is stored in the storage area 0, and the special figure 1 reservation number at the start of the time saving control is "0", the stay animation display (stay animation ).
On the other hand, if the special figure 1 game information is stored in the storage area 0, and the special figure 1 reservation number at the start of the time saving control is "1", at each of the reservation display position and the reservation 1 display position , start the stay animation display (stay animation).
On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game information is stored in the storage area 0, and the special figure 1 reservation number at the start of the time saving control is "2", the reservation display position, the reservation 1 display position and the reservation 2 A stay animation display (stay animation) is started at each of the display positions.
On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game information is stored in the storage area 0, and the special figure 1 reservation number at the start of the time saving control is "3", the reservation display position, the reservation 1 display position, the reservation 2 A stay animation display (stay animation) is started at each of the display position and the hold 3 display position.
On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game information is stored in the storage area 0, and the special figure 1 reservation number at the start of the time saving control is "4", the reservation display position, the reservation 1 display position, the reservation 2 A stay animation display (stay animation) is started at each of the display position, the hold 3 display position, and the hold 4 display position.
Thereby, according to the end of the time saving control, at two or more of the holding display positions, the holding 1 display position, the holding 2 display position, the holding 3 display position, and the holding 4 display position, the holding display When the (stay animation display) is started, it is possible to synchronize the contents of the suspension display (stay animation display) started at the two or more suspension display positions.
That is, according to the end of the time saving control, it is possible to start in a state of synchronizing with each other for the pending display of a plurality of special figure 1 game information.

Here, at the time of transition (at the time of change) of the game state, a plurality of pedestal images (moving images/animation images) included in the interface image are also configured to start to be displayed in a mutually synchronized state in the same manner as the hold display. I don't mind.
This makes it possible to synchronize the start timings of the animation (display of the first frame) for each base image and the pending display corresponding to the base image.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the power is turned on (when the power is restored after the power is cut off), the holding display may be started according to the saved game state and the number of special figure holdings. At this time, for the game information corresponding to the saved game state, if there is game information in which the start determination (or the derivation of the result of the start determination) is pending (the special figure pending number is "1" or more If there is), the stay animation display may be started in a mutually synchronized state for all pieces of game information for which start determination is pending.

Specifically, when the game state at the time of power-on is in the middle of execution of the time saving control, to start the pending display (stay animation display) corresponding to the special figure 2 game information. At this time, the pending display is started at the pending display position corresponding to the special figure 2 pending number.
That is, if the special figure 2 game information is stored in the storage area 0, and the special figure 2 reservation number at the start of the time saving control is "0", the stay animation display (stay animation ).
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 game information is stored in the storage area 0, and the special figure 2 reservation number at the start of the time saving control is "1", at each of the reservation display position and the reservation 1 display position , start the stay animation display (stay animation).
On the other hand, if the special figure 2 game information is stored in the storage area 0, and the special figure 2 reservation number at the start of the time saving control is "2", the reservation display position, the reservation 1 display position and the reservation 2 A stay animation display (stay animation) is started at each of the display positions.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 game information is stored in the storage area 0, and the special figure 2 reservation number at the start of the time saving control is "3", the reservation display position, the reservation 1 display position, the reservation 2 A stay animation display (stay animation) is started at each of the display position and the hold 3 display position.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 game information is stored in the storage area 0, and the special figure 2 reservation number at the start of the time saving control is "4", the reservation display position, the reservation 1 display position, the reservation 2 A stay animation display (stay animation) is started at each of the display position, the hold 3 display position, and the hold 4 display position.
As a result, when the power is turned on, the hold display (stay When the animation display) is started, it is possible to synchronize the contents of the suspension display (stay animation display) started at the two or more suspension display positions.
That is, according to the power-on, it is possible to start in a state of synchronizing with each other for pending display related to a plurality of special figure 2 game information.
Here, when the power is turned on, the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 0 may be configured so that the pending display is not executed. In other words, when the power is turned on, the suspension display may not be executed at the suspension display position. In the case of such a configuration, of the hold 1 display position, the hold 2 display position, the hold 3 display position and the hold 4 display position, at the hold display position according to the number of special figures 2 hold when the power is turned on, the hold display is will be executed.

On the other hand, when the game state at the time of power-on is in the stop of the time saving control, to start the pending display (stay animation display) corresponding to the special figure 1 game information. At this time, the pending display is started at the pending display position corresponding to the special figure 1 pending number.
That is, if the special figure 1 game information is stored in the storage area 0, and the special figure 1 reservation number at the start of the time saving control is "0", the stay animation display (stay animation ).
On the other hand, if the special figure 1 game information is stored in the storage area 0, and the special figure 1 reservation number at the start of the time saving control is "1", at each of the reservation display position and the reservation 1 display position , start the stay animation display (stay animation).
On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game information is stored in the storage area 0, and the special figure 1 reservation number at the start of the time saving control is "2", the reservation display position, the reservation 1 display position and the reservation 2 A stay animation display (stay animation) is started at each of the display positions.
On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game information is stored in the storage area 0, and the special figure 1 reservation number at the start of the time saving control is "3", the reservation display position, the reservation 1 display position, the reservation 2 A stay animation display (stay animation) is started at each of the display position and the hold 3 display position.
On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game information is stored in the storage area 0, and the special figure 1 reservation number at the start of the time saving control is "4", the reservation display position, the reservation 1 display position, the reservation 2 A stay animation display (stay animation) is started at each of the display position, the hold 3 display position, and the hold 4 display position.
As a result, when the power is turned on, the hold display (stay When the animation display) is started, it is possible to synchronize the contents of the suspension display (stay animation display) started at the two or more suspension display positions.
That is, according to the power-on, it is possible to start in a state of synchronizing with each other for the pending display of a plurality of special figure 1 game information.
Here, when the power is turned on, the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 0 may be configured so that the pending display is not executed. In other words, when the power is turned on, the suspension display may not be executed at the suspension display position. In the case of such a configuration, of the hold 1 display position, hold 2 display position, hold 3 display position and hold 4 display position, at the hold display position according to the number of special figures 1 hold when the power is turned on, the hold display is will be executed.

When the power is turned on (when the power is restored after the power is turned off), multiple pedestal images (moving images/animated images) included in the interface image will also start to be displayed in a synchronized state, similar to the hold display. It does not matter if the configuration is
This makes it possible to synchronize the start timings of the animation (display of the first frame) for each base image and the pending display corresponding to the base image.

(Modification 4)
In addition, in the above embodiment, as the type of normal special hold display (or time saving special hold display), a plurality of types with different periods of operation during stay (stay animation display) are defined, and hold notice is executed In this case, the type of pending display subject to the pending notice may be selected by lottery.
For example, as types of normal hold display, normal default hold display and normal special hold display are defined. Here, in this modified example, in the normal default hold display, 30 frames constitute a cycle (one cycle) of the action during stay. That is, in the normal default hold display, 30 frames are defined as the cycle (one cycle) of the action during stay.
In addition, as types of the normal special hold display, there are a round type special hold display, a character A system special hold display, a character B system special hold display, a character C system special hold display, a card type special hold display, Defines a star system special hold indication.
Then, according to the type of pending display (type of pending pattern h), the cycle of the operation during stay (one cycle) is configured to differ.

That is, in the round type special reserved display, a predetermined circular reserved pattern h (hereinafter referred to as "circular reserved pattern") is displayed. In addition, in the round-type special hold display, 30 frames constitute a cycle (one cycle) of actions during stay. That is, in the round type special hold display, 30 frames are defined as the cycle (one cycle) of the operation during stay.
In addition, as a round type special reservation display, a round blue reservation display in which a “blue” circular reservation pattern is displayed, a round red reservation display in which a “red” circular reservation pattern is displayed, and a “gold” and a round money reserved display in which a circular reserved symbol is displayed. Then, the expectation for each type of round type special reservation display is listed in order from the one with the highest degree of expectation for winning: "Round Gold Reservation Display", "Round Red Reservation Display", "Round Blue Reservation Display" ( High expectations for big hits → Low expectations for big hits).

On the other hand, in the character A series special pending display, a pending pattern h consisting of the character A (hereinafter referred to as "character A pending pattern") is displayed. In addition, in the character A series special hold display, 50 frames constitute a cycle of actions during stay (one cycle). That is, in the character A system special hold display, 50 frames are defined as the cycle (one cycle) of the action during stay.
In addition, as the character A series special pending display, a character A white pending display in which a "white" character A pending pattern is displayed, a character A blue pending display in which a "blue" character A pending pattern is displayed, and a "red" character A reserved pattern are displayed. A character A red pending display in which a character A pending pattern of "" is displayed, and a character A gold pending display in which a character A reserved pattern of "golden" is displayed are defined. Then, the degree of expectation for each type of character A system special reservation display is arranged in order from the highest degree of expectation for a big hit: "character A gold reservation display", "character A red reservation display", "character A blue reservation display", "Character A white pending display" (high expectation for big hit → low expectation for big hit).

On the other hand, in the character B system special pending display, a pending pattern h consisting of the character B (hereinafter referred to as "character B pending pattern") is displayed. In addition, in the character B system special hold display, 50 frames constitute a cycle (one cycle) of actions during stay. That is, in the character B system special hold display, 50 frames are defined as the cycle (one cycle) of the action during stay.
In addition, as the character B system special pending display, a character B white pending display in which a “white” character B pending pattern is displayed, a character B blue pending display in which a “blue” character B pending pattern is displayed, and a “red” and a character B gold pending display in which a character B pending pattern of "golden" is displayed. Then, the degree of expectation for each type of character B-type special pending display is arranged in descending order of the degree of expectation for a big hit: "character B gold pending display", "character B red pending display", "character B blue pending display", "Character B white pending display" (high expectation for big hit → low expectation for big hit).

On the other hand, in the character C system special pending display, a pending pattern h consisting of the character C (hereinafter referred to as "character C pending pattern") is displayed. In addition, in the character C system special hold display, 30 frames constitute a cycle (one cycle) of actions during stay. That is, in the character C system special hold display, 30 frames are defined as the cycle (one cycle) of the action during stay.
In addition, as the character C special pending display, a character C white pending display in which a “white” character C pending pattern is displayed, a character C blue pending display in which a “blue” character C pending pattern is displayed, and a “red” character C reserved pattern are displayed. and a character C gold pending display in which a character C reserved pattern of "golden" is displayed. Then, the degree of expectation for each type of character C-type special reservation display is arranged in descending order of the degree of expectation for a big hit: "character C gold reservation display", "character C red reservation display", "character C blue reservation display", "Character C white pending display" (high expectation for big win → low expectation for big win).

On the other hand, in the card type system special reserved display, a card type reserved pattern h (hereinafter referred to as "card type reserved pattern") is displayed. In addition, in the card-type special hold display, 30 frames constitute a cycle (one cycle) of operations during stay. That is, in the card-type special hold display, 30 frames are defined as the cycle (one cycle) of the operation during stay.
In addition, as card-type special reservation displays, a card-type white reservation display that displays a "white" card-type reservation pattern, a card-type blue reservation display that displays a "blue" card-type reservation pattern, and a "red" card-type reservation display. and a card-shaped gold reserve display in which a card-shaped reserve pattern of "golden" is displayed. Then, the jackpot expectations for each type of card-shaped special pending display are listed in order from the highest expected jackpot, "card-shaped gold pending display", "card-shaped red pending display", "card-shaped blue pending display", "Card-shaped white reservation display" (high expectation for big hit → low expectation for big hit).

On the other hand, in the star system special pending display, a star-shaped pending symbol h (hereinafter referred to as a "star-shaped pending symbol") is displayed. In addition, in the star system special hold display, 60 frames constitute a cycle (one cycle) of actions during stay. That is, in the star system special hold display, 60 frames are defined as the cycle (one cycle) of the operation during stay.
In addition, as the star system special hold display, a star rainbow hold display in which a star hold pattern whose color changes to "rainbow" is displayed is defined. Then, the degree of expectation for a big hit of the star system special hold display is made higher than the type of the other normal time special hold display.

Then, when the hold notice is started during execution of the normal default hold display, the same period of operation during stay as the normal default hold display is specified as the type of hold display targeted for the hold notice. Any one of the round-type special reservation display, the character C-type special reservation display, and the card-type special reservation display is selected. That is, in this case, as the type of hold display targeted for the hold notice, the character A system special hold display and the character B special hold display, which define a period of operation during stay different from the normal default hold display, are specified. None of the display and star system special hold display is selected.
At this time, in the lottery for selecting the type of suspension display that is the target of the suspension notice, the same cycle of actions during stay as the normal default suspension display is specified, a special round suspension display, a special character C series It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one of the pending display and the card-type special pending display is selected.
Alternatively, in the lottery for selecting the type of hold display to be the target of the hold notice, one of all types of normal special hold display is selected, and a stay different from the normal default hold display If a character A-type special hold display, a character B-type special hold display, or a star-type special hold display is selected, for which the cycle of the medium action is specified, the action during stay that is the same as the normal default hold display will be performed. It may be configured to be replaced with a type in which a period is specified (for example, normal default hold display).
Then, after the start of the notice of suspension, the action during stay of the hold indication targeted for the notice of suspension is synchronized with the action during stay of the normal default hold indication.
In addition, during the execution of the normal default hold display, the type of normal special hold display, which has a different period of operation during stay than the normal default hold display, is not started, but all normal time After the default suspension display is completed, it is possible to start the type of normal special suspension display in which a cycle of operation during stay different from that of the normal default suspension display is defined.
Or, regarding the suspension notice that starts during the execution of the normal default suspension display, as the type of suspension notice that is subject to the suspension notice, a character that has a different action cycle during stay than the normal default suspension display. When the A-system special pending display is selected, all the normal default pending displays may be replaced with the character A-system special pending display.

In addition, when another suspension notice is started while the character A series suspension display is being executed, the same staying operation as the character A series suspension display is used as the type of suspension display targeted for the other suspension notice. Character A system pending display and character B system pending display, in which the cycle of is defined, is selected. In other words, in this case, as the type of suspension display to be subject to the separate notice of suspension, a round-type special suspension display, a character C system, and a cycle of actions during stay that are different from those of the character A system suspension display are stipulated. None of the special pending display, card type special pending display, and star type special pending display is selected.
At this time, in the lottery for selecting the type of hold display to be the subject of the separate notice of hold, the character A series hold display and the character A series hold display for which the same period of action during stay as the character A series hold display is specified, and the character A configuration may be adopted in which any type of the B-system hold display is selected.
Alternatively, in the lottery for selecting the type of hold display to be the target of the separate notice of hold, one of all types of normal special hold display is selected, and the character A series hold display and If a round type special hold display, a character C type special hold display, a card type special hold display, or a star type special hold display is selected, the character A type It may be configured to be replaced with a type (for example, normal default hold display) in which the same period of operation during stay as the hold display is defined.
Then, after the start of the other on-hold notice, the action during stay of the on-hold display targeted by the different on-hold notice is synchronized with the action during stay of the character A system hold display.

As described above, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the cycles of actions during stay are seemingly inconsistent with respect to a plurality of pending displays that are executed at the same time, and it is possible to improve the presentation effect.

(Action of pachinko machine 1)
The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of guide holes gh along the outer rail 14. - 特許庁As a result, it is possible to arrange the outer rail 14 at an accurate position on the game board 11 .
Here, in the outer rail 14, the impact received by the collision of the shot game ball is greater at the start end side portion than at the end side portion, and the impact on the launch direction of the shot game ball is greater. Become. As a result, the outer rail 14 is required to have higher mounting strength and more accurate placement at the starting end side than at the terminating end side.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the number of guide holes gh provided in the outer rail 14 is larger in the first range H1 than in the second range H2, and more in the second range H2 than in the third range H3. However, many guide holes gh are provided.
That is, by increasing the number of guide holes gh provided in the base end portion of the outer rail 14, it is possible to prevent positional displacement and vibration in the base end portion. In particular, it is possible to stabilize the trajectory of the game ball and execute the game as designed.
On the other hand, by reducing the number of guide holes gh provided in the end portion of the outer rail 14, it becomes possible to facilitate processing of the outer rail 14 and attachment to the game board 11. FIG.
As described above, it is possible to achieve both prevention of displacement and vibration of the outer rail 14 and facilitation of processing of the outer rail 14 and attachment to the game board 11 .

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when the normal special hold display in which the operation during stay is repeated in the same period as the normal default hold display is started during execution of the normal default hold display, the normal special hold display is executed. While-stay behavior is synchronized to the normally-default-on-hold display’s during-stay behavior. On the other hand, during the execution of the normal default hold display, the short time default hold display in which the in-stay action is repeated at a cycle different from that of the normal default hold display is not started.
Also, during the execution of the time saving special hold display, if the time saving default hold display that repeats the staying action in the same cycle as the time saving special hold display is started, the staying action of the time saving default hold display is Synchronized with the operation during the stay of the time saving special hold display. On the other hand, during execution of the time saving special holding display, the normal time special holding display in which the action during stay is repeated at a cycle different from the time saving special holding display is not started.
As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a plurality of kinds of pending displays with different periods of actions during stay are executed at the same time, and to prevent the contents of pending displays from becoming complicated. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the hold display.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when other game information is acquired while the hold display corresponding to one game information is being executed, the hold display corresponding to the other game information is displayed as a waiting animation display (waiting state/waiting mode). ), a stay animation display (synchronization state/synchronization mode) synchronized with the hold display corresponding to one piece of game information is displayed. As a result, the hold animation display corresponding to the other game information to be started later is displayed as the standby animation display, and then the stay animation display is synchronized with the hold display corresponding to the one game information that is started earlier. . Therefore, before the timing at which it is possible to synchronize the pending display corresponding to other game information with the pending display corresponding to one piece of game information (the timing at which it is possible to start the stay animation display), the other It is possible to start a pending display (waiting animation display) corresponding to the game information.
Also, in the pachinko machine 1, the stay animation display is a moving image (animation image), and the standby animation display is a still image. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in control load.
Also, in the pachinko machine 1, the stay animation display is a moving image (animation image), the standby animation display is a still image, and especially the standby animation display consists of the image of the first frame of the stay animation display. This makes it possible to make the connection from the standby animation display to the stay animation display natural.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a pending display (stay animation display) corresponding to one game information and a pending display (stay animation display) corresponding to other game information are periodically repeated (loop reproduced). ) are moving images (animation images) of the same content. In particular, when the display of the image of the first frame of the moving image related to the suspended display (stay animation display) corresponding to one game information is started, the suspended display corresponding to the other game information is displayed. is synchronized with the hold display (stay animation display) corresponding to (set as a stay animation display). This makes it possible to simplify the process of synchronizing pending displays.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1, when other game information is acquired while the hold display corresponding to one game information is being executed, the hold display corresponding to the other game information is displayed for a waiting time (waiting animation display/waiting mode).・Standby state), synchronized with the hold display corresponding to one piece of game information (stay animation display, synchronization mode, synchronization state), and when the power is turned on (when the power is restored after the power is cut off), the start determination ( Alternatively, when there is game information for which the derivation of the result of start determination is pending, the pending display of all the game information is started in a state of being synchronized with each other. This makes it possible to simplify the process for synchronizing a plurality of hold displays when the power is turned on.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when other game information is acquired while the hold display corresponding to one game information is being executed, the hold display corresponding to the other game information is displayed for a waiting time (waiting animation display/waiting mode).・Standby state), synchronized with the hold display corresponding to one piece of game information (stay animation display, synchronization mode, synchronization state), and at the time of transition (change) of the game state, start determination (or start When there is game information for which derivation of the determination result is pending, display of all the game information is started in a mutually synchronized state. As a result, it is possible to simplify the process for synchronizing a plurality of pending displays at the time of game state transition.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when other game information is acquired while the hold display corresponding to one game information is being executed, the hold display corresponding to the other game information is displayed for a waiting time (waiting animation display/waiting mode).・Standby state), synchronized with the suspended display corresponding to one piece of game information (stay animation display, synchronized mode, synchronized state), and the start determination (or derivation of the start determination result) is suspended. At the time of subtraction (decrease) of the number of game information, if there is game information whose start determination (or derivation of the result of start determination) is pending, the pending display related to all the game information is synchronized with each other. Display starts. This makes it possible to simplify the process for synchronizing a plurality of pending displays when subtracting (decreasing) the number of game information for which the start determination (or the derivation of the result of the start determination) is pending. Become.

1 pachinko machine 12 inner rail 13 rail base 14 outer rail 31 main image display device 31a display screen 200 main control board 300 performance control board 301 microcomputer 302 control ROM
303 CGROM
304 DRAM
310 CPUs
316 VRAM
319 preloader circuit 320 display circuit 322 drawing circuit gh guide hole

Claims (1)

a game board forming a game area;
A plate-shaped outer rail provided on the game board;
a first pending display that repeats an action display in a first period, a second pending display that repeats an action display in the first period, and a third pending display that repeats an action display in a second period different from the first period; and display control means capable of executing
In the outer rail, a plurality of guide portions for guiding a position with respect to the game board are formed along the outer rail, and the intervals between the plurality of guide portions are uneven,
A range from the start end to the left vertex of the outer rail is defined as a first range, a range from the left vertex to the upper vertex of the outer rail is defined as a second range, and a range from the upper vertex to the terminal end of the outer rail is defined as a second range. 3 ranges, and the range from the left vertex of the outer rail to the terminal end is defined as a fourth range, the terminal end of the outer rail is located to the right of the upper vertex of the outer rail, and the The number of guide portions provided is greater in the first range than in the second range, greater in the second range than in the third range, and greater than or equal to the fourth range in the first range. and
The display control means is
When the second pending display is started during execution of the first pending display, the operation display of the second pending display is controlled to synchronize with the operation display of the first pending display,
A gaming machine that controls not to start the third pending display during execution of the first pending display.

Images